703798
50
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/602
Nächste Seite
Digital–inthe vehicleVehicle document walletDigital –onthe InternetDigital –asanApp
Familiarize yourself withthe con‐
tents of theOperator's Manual
directly via thevehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Startwiththe quickguide,
discoveryour vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledgewith
useful tips.
Hereyou can find comprehen‐
sive informationabout operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.
Youcan find theOperator's Man‐
ual on theMercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.
É2225840312ÌËÍ
2225840312
Apple
®
iOS Android
TM
Order no. P222 028413Partno. 222 5840312
EditionB2020
S-Class
Operator'sManual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz S-Class
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi‐
cles and about Mercedes-BenzAGcan be found
on thefollowing websites:
https://www.mbusa.com (USAonly)
https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team
©
Mercedes-Benz AG:not to be reprinted, trans‐
lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in
part, without written permission from Mercedes-
BenzAG.
Vehiclemanufacturer
Mercedes-Benz AG
Mercedesstrasse 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Example
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatalinjuries
if thefront-passengerairbag is enabled
If thefront-passengerfront airbag is enabled,
achild on thefront-passengerseat maybe
struck by thefront-passengerairbag during
an accident.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat withanENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYtothe
CHILD can occur.
Observe thechapter"Childreninthe vehicle".
As at 28.03.2019
Thank youfor purchasingaMercedes-Benz
Beforeyou firstdrive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefullyand familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. Foryour ownsafetyand alonger
operating lifespan of thevehicle, followthe
instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐
tor's Manual. Disregarding them maylead to
damagetothe vehicle or injurytopeople.
Damagetothe vehicle resulting from thedisre‐
gard of theinstructionsisnot coveredbythe
Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.
The standardequipment and productdescription
of your vehicle mayvaryand depends on thefol‐
lowing factors:
R
Model
R
Order
R
National version
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benzreservesthe right to introduce
changes in thefollowing areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technicalfeatures
The equipment in your vehicle maythereforedif‐
ferfromthat shown in thedescriptionsand illus‐
trations.
The following documentsare integralparts of
thevehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in thevehicle at all
times. If yousell thevehicle, alwayspass all of
thedocuments on to thenew owner.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
AMercedes-Benz Company
2225840312
2225840312
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At aglance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Indicatorand warning lamps .........................10
Overhead controlpanel ................................ 12
Doorcontrol panel and seatadjustment ....... 14
Control settingsinthe rear passenger
compartment ................................................ 16
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18
DigitalOperator'sManual ......................... 20
Callingupthe Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20
General notes ............................................. 21
Protection of theenvironment......................21
Mercedes-BenzGenuine Parts......................21
Operator's Manual ........................................22
Service and vehicle operation ......................23
Operating safety........................................... 24
Declaration of conformity forwireless
vehicle components.....................................25
Diagnostics connection ................................ 26
Qualified specialistworkshop ....................... 26
Correct useofthe vehicle ............................. 27
Notesfor persons withelectronic medi‐
cal aids......................................................... 27
Problems withyour vehicle ........................... 27
Reportingsafetydefects ...............................28
Limited Warranty..........................................28
QR codefor rescue card...............................28
Datastorage .................................................28
Copyright ...................................................... 32
Occupant safety ......................................... 33
Restraint system ...........................................33
Seatbelts ..................................................... 35
Airbags......................................................... 40
PRE-SAFE
®
system ....................................... 48
Safelytransporting children in thevehi‐
cle ................................................................49
Notesonpetsinthe vehicle .........................63
Opening and closing .................................. 64
SmartKey ...................................................... 64
Doors ............................................................ 69
Trunk ............................................................ 73
Sidewindows ............................................... 79
Sliding sunroof ............................................. 83
Roller sun blinds ...........................................91
Anti-theftprotection .....................................92
Seats and stowing ..................................... 96
Notesonthe correct driver's seatposi‐
tion ............................................................... 96
Seats ............................................................ 96
Steering wheel ............................................ 117
Easyentryand exit feature......................... 118
Operating thememoryfunction .................. 120
Memoryfunction in therear passenger
compartment .............................................. 121
Stowageareas ............................................ 125
Cup holder .................................................. 135
Ashtray and cigarette lighter .......................138
Sockets ....................................................... 140
Refrigerator box.......................................... 143
Wireless chargingofthe mobile phone
and connection withthe exterior antenna .. 145
Installing and removing thefloor mats ........ 147
Installing/removing thepennant staff........148
2
Contents
Light and visibility ................................... 150
Exteriorlighting .......................................... 150
Interior lighting ........................................... 155
Windshield wiperand windshield washer
system ........................................................ 157
Mirrors ........................................................ 160
Operating thesun visors............................. 162
Area permeable to radio waves on the
windshield .................................................. 163
Infrared-reflectivewindshield function ........ 163
Climatecontrol ......................................... 164
Overviewofclimatecontrolsystems ..........164
Operating theclimatecontrol system ......... 165
Drivingand parking .................................. 172
Driving ........................................................ 172
DYNAMIC SELECT switch........................... 183
Automatic transmission .............................. 184
Functionof4MATIC .................................... 188
Refueling .................................................... 189
Parking ........................................................ 191
Driving and driving safety systems .............200
Vehicle towing instructions .........................262
Instrument Displayand on-board
computer .................................................. 263
Instrument Display overview......................263
Overviewofthe buttons on thesteering
wheel ..........................................................264
Operating theon-boardcomputer .............. 264
Setting thedesign ...................................... 266
Setting theareafor additional values .........266
Overviewofdisplays on themultifunc‐
tion display.................................................267
Adjusting theinstrument lighting ................267
Menus and submenus ................................ 268
Head-up Display.......................................... 274
Voice Control System .............................. 276
Notesonoperating safety........................... 276
Operation ................................................... 277
Using theVoice Control System effec‐
tively ........................................................... 278
Essentialvoice commands .........................279
Multimediasystem .................................. 291
Overviewand operation .............................. 291
System settings .......................................... 300
Fit &Healthy ............................................... 312
Navigation ................................................... 314
Telephone................................................... 339
Online andInternetfunctions ..................... 361
Media.........................................................367
Radio .......................................................... 379
Sound ......................................................... 387
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................389
Maintenance and care ............................. 407
ASSYSTPLUSservice intervaldisplay........407
Engine compartment .................................. 408
Cleaningand care....................................... 415
Breakdown assistance ............................ 425
Emergency .................................................. 425
Flattire....................................................... 425
Battery(vehicle).......................................... 431
Towstartingortowing away ....................... 436
Electricalfuses ........................................... 442
Contents
3
Wheelsand tires ...................................... 446
Notesonnoise or unusualhandling char‐
acteristics................................................... 446
Notesonregularly inspecting wheels and
tires ............................................................ 446
Notesonsnowchains ................................ 447
Tire pressure..............................................448
Loading thevehicle .................................... 454
Tire labeling ................................................ 459
Definition of termsfor tires and loading ..... 464
Changing awheel....................................... 467
Emergency sparewheel.............................. 477
Technical data .......................................... 478
Notesontechnical data.............................. 478
Vehicle electronics ...................................... 478
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview............................480
Operatingfluids .......................................... 482
Vehicle data................................................ 489
Displaymessages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 492
Displaymessages .......................................492
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 541
Index ......................................................... 556
4
Contents
In this Operator's Manual, youwill find thefol‐
lowing symbols:
&
DANGER Dangerdue to notobserving
thewarning notices
Warning notices draw your attentiontohaz‐
ards that mayendanger your healthorlife, or
thehealthorlifeofothers.
#
Observe thewarning notices.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failuretoobserve envi‐
ronmental notes
Environmental notesinclude information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#
Observe environmentalnotes.
*
NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notesonmaterial damage
Notesonmaterial damageinformyou of
riskswhichmay lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
#
Observe notesonmaterial damage.
%
Useful instructions or further information
that couldbehelpful to you.
X
Instruction
(Q page)
Further information on atopic
Display
Information on themultifunction dis‐
play/media display
+
Highestmenu level, whichistobe
selected in themultimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, whichare
to be selected in themultimedia sys‐
tem
*Marks acause
Symbols
5
6
At aglance–Cockpit
1
Steering wheel gearshiftpaddles
186
2
Combination switch
151
3
Instrument Display
263
4
DIRECT SELECT lever
184
5
PASSENGER AIR BAGindicator lamps
45
6
Media display
291
7
Start/stop button
173
8
Climatecontrol systems
165
9
Glove box
128
A
Stowagecompartment
127
B
Cup holder
135
C
Hazard warning lamps
152
D
Extendsthe rear seat head restraints
110
E
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC
237
F
Touchpad
292
G
ActiveParking Assist
245
H
Sets thevehicle level
228
I
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
183
J
ECO start/stop function
181
K
Control panel forthe multimedia system
264
L
Adjusts thesteering wheel
117
Switches thesteering wheel heater on/off
118
M
Control panel for:
On-boardcomputer
264
Cruise control
211
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
214
N
Diagnostics connection
26
O
Opensthe hood
409
P
Electric parking brake
197
Q
Light switch
150
R
Control panel for:
ActiveSteering Assist
220
ActiveLaneKeeping Assist
261
Night View Assist
255
At aglance–Cockpit
7
Head-up Display
275 Rear-windowroller sunblind
91
8
At aglance–Cockpit
Instrument Display
10
At aglance–Indicator and warning lamps
1
Speedometer
263
2
ä Suspension malfunction
550
3
#! Turn signal lights
151
4
Multifunction display
267
5
Tachometer
263
6
å ESP
®
OFF
551
÷ ESP
®
551
7
K High beam
151
L Lowbeam
150
T Parking lamps
150
8
ÿ Coolanttoo hot/cold
545
9
Coolanttemperaturedisplay
263
A
Ð Electricpowersteering malfunction
544
B
L Distance warning
550
C
# Electrical malfunction
545
D
Brakes (red)
548
$ USAonly
J Canada only
E
ü Seat belt notfastened
543
F
Fuel levelindicator
G
8 Fuel reserve withfuel filler cap location
indicator
545
H
R Rear foglight
151
I
6 Restraint system
543
J
; CheckEngine
545
K
Electric parking brakeapplied (red)
548
F USAonly
! Canada only
L
h Tire pressuremonitor
554
M
! ABSmalfunction
551
N
! Electricparkingbrake (yellow)
548
At aglance–Indicator and warning lamps
11
12
At aglance–Overhead control panel
1
Sun visors
162
2
p Switches theleft-hand readinglamp
on/off
155
3
| Switches automatic lightcontrol on/off
155
4
G SOS button
355
5
c Switches thefront interior lighting
on/off
155
6
u Switches therear interior lighting
on/off
155
7
p Switches theright-hand readinglamp
on/off
155
8
; me button
355
9
Eyeglasses compartment
128
A
3 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with
powertilt/sliding panel
83
3 Opens/closes thefront roller sunblind
83
B
Opens/closes therear roller sunblind
83
OperatesMAGIC SKY CONTROL
87
C
Inside rearviewmirror
161
At aglance–Overhead control panel
13
14
At aglance–Door control paneland seat adjustment
1
Adjusts theseats electrically
96
2
Switches theseat heating on/off
114
3
Switches theseat ventilation on/off
116
4
Adjusts thefront passenger seat from the
driver's seat
99
5
Sets thememoryfunction
120
6
W Opens/closes therear leftside window
79
7
W Opens/closes theleftside window
79
8
Adjusts and folds theoutside mirrors out/in
electrically
160
9
Opens/closes thetrunk lid
73
A
W Opens/closes theright side window
79
B
W Opens/closes therear right side win‐
dow
79
C
Child safetylockfor therear passenger com‐
partment side windows
63
D
Opens thedoor
69
E
& Locks thevehicle
69
F
% Unlocks thevehicle
69
G
Seat adjustment using themultimedia system
113
H
Adjusts thehead restraints
108
At aglance–Door control paneland seat adjustment
15
Vehicles withareclining rear seat
16
At aglance–Control settingsinthe rear passenger compartment
1
Blu-ray/DVD drive
395
2
Cigarettelighter
139
12 Vsocket
140
3
Cup holder
136
4
Stowagecompartment in therear armrest
129
5
Stowagebox in theseat backrest
129
Refrigerator box
143
6
Selects thefront passenger seat
99
7
Switches therear seat heating on/off
114
8
Switches therear seat ventilation on/off
116
9
Sets thefore-and-aftposition of thehead
restraint
102
A
Adjusts theheight of thehead restraint
102
B
Adjusts theseat backrestinclination
102
C
Sets thecombined seat cushion inclination
and length
102
D
Sets thecombined seat cushion inclination
and length
102
E
Adjusts theangle of theleg rest
102
F
Adjusts thefore-and-aftposition of theleg
rest
102
G
Memoryfunction in therear passenger com‐
partment
121
H
Sets thefullyreclinedposition
102
At aglance–Control settingsinthe rear passenger compartment
17
18
At aglance–Emergenciesand breakdowns
1
QR code foraccessing therescue card
28
2
Safetyvests
425
3
me button and SOS button
355
4
Checking and adding operating fluids
482
5
Tow-startingand towing away
438
6
Flat tire
425
7
Startingassistance
435
8
Hazard warning lights
152
9
Fuel filler flap withinstruction labels fortire
pressure,fuel type and QR code foraccessing
therescue card
189
A
Tow-startingand towing away
438
B
TIREFIT kit
427
At aglance–Emergencies andbreakdowns
19
Callingupthe DigitalOperator'sManual
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
Õ Operator's Manual
#
Select amenu item.
In addition, youcan also call up theOperator's
Manual within amain function (e.g. via Media
Info).
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the
function and operation of thevehicle and the
multimedia system.
Forsafetyreasons, theDigital Operator's Man‐
ual is deactivated while driving.
The Digital Operator's Manual contains thefol‐
lowing menu items:
R
Search:allows youtosearch preciselyfor
keywords.
R
Quickstart:providesyou withimportant
information so that youcan startusingyour
vehicle immediately.
R
Tips:providestips on howtouse your vehicle
in certain situations.
R
Messages:providesyou withfurther informa‐
tion about themessages in theinstrument
cluster.
R
Bookmarks:providesyou withalistofall the
bookmarks youhavestoredyourself.
1
Picture
2
Menu
3
Navigation window
Some sections of theDigital Operator's Manual,
suchaswarnings, can be made visible by high‐
lighting and pressing them.
%
The Operator's Manual can also be found in
theMercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐
mon app stores.
20
Digital Operator's Manual
Protection of theenvironment
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of thevehicle is
directlyrelated to theway youoperatethe
vehicle.
Operateyour vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner to help protect theenvi‐
ronment. Please observe thefollowing rec‐
ommendations on operating conditions and
personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#
Makesurethat thetirepressureiscor‐
rect.
#
Do notcarry anyunnecessaryweight
(e.g. roof luggageracks once youno
longerneed them).
#
Adheretothe service intervals.
Aregularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
utetoenvironmentalprotection.
#
Alwayshave maintenance work carried
out at aqualified specialistworkshop.
Personal driving style:
#
Do notdepress theacceleratorpedal
when startingthe engine.
#
Do notwarmupthe engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
#
Drivecarefully and maintainasuitable
distancefromthe vehicle in front.
#
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
#
Changegear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#
Switchoff theengine in stationarytraf‐
fic, e.g. by usingthe ECOstart/stop
function.
#
Drivefuel-efficiently.Observe theECO
displayfor afuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations
It is recommended that youre-use or recycle
materials instead of justdisposingofthem.
The relevant environmental guidelinesand regu‐
lations serve to protect theenvironmentand
mustbestrictlyobserved.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by notusing recycled
reconditionedcomponents
Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycledrecondi‐
tioned components and parts withthe same
qualityasnew parts.The same entitlement
from theLimited Warrantyisvalid as fornew
parts.
#
Recycledreconditioned components
and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.
Generalnotes
21
*
NOTE Impairment of theoperating effi‐
ciency of therestraint systems from
installing accessoryparts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices,
as well as control unitsand sensorsfor the
restraint systems, maybeinstalled in thefol‐
lowing areas of your vehicle:
R
Doors
R
Door pillars
R
Doorsills
R
Seats
R
Cockpit
R
Instrument cluster
R
Centerconsole
R
Lateral roof frame
#
Do notinstall accessoryparts suchas
audio systems in these areas.
#
Do notcarry out repairsorwelding.
#
Have aftermarketinstallation of acces‐
sories carried out at aqualified special‐
istworkshop.
Youcould jeopardizethe operating safetyofyour
vehicle if youuse parts,tires and wheelsaswell
as accessories relevant to safetywhichhave not
been approvedbyMercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. thebrake system, maymal‐
function.Onlyuse Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
or parts of equal quality. Onlyuse tires, wheels
and accessories that have been specifically
approvedfor your vehicle model.
Mercedes-BenzGenuine Partsare subject to
strict qualitycontrol. Eachparthas been spe‐
ciallydeveloped, manufactured or selectedfor
Mercedes-Benzvehicles and fine-tuned forthem.
Therefore, onlyMercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
should be used.
Morethan 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz
Genuine Partsare available forMercedes-Benz
models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain
asupply of Mercedes-Benz Genuine Partsfor
necessaryservice and repair work.Inaddition,
strategically located parts deliverycenterspro‐
vide forquickand reliable parts service.
Alwaysspecify thevehicle identification number
(VIN) (/ page480) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts.
Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual describes all models and
all standardand optional equipment available for
your vehicle at thetime of this Operator's Man‐
ualgoing to press. Country-specific differences
arepossible. Note that your vehicle maynot be
equipped withall features described. This is also
thecase forsystems and functionsrelevant to
safety. Therefore, theequipment on your vehicle
maydifferfromthat in thedescriptionsand illus‐
trations.
The original purchase agreement foryour vehicle
contains alistofall of thesystems in your vehi‐
cle.
Should youhaveany questionsconcerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
22
General notes
The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet
areimportant documents and shouldbekeptin
thevehicle.
Service and vehicleoperation
Vehicleoperation outside theUSA or Canada
When youare abroad withyour vehicle, observe
thefollowing points:
R
service points or replacementparts maynot
be available immediately.
R
unleaded fuel maynot be available forvehi‐
cles withacatalytic converter.Leaded fuel
maycause damagetothe catalytic converter.
R
thefuel mayhaveanextremely lowoctane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models areavailable in
Europe through our European DeliveryProgram.
Formoreinformation, please consult an author‐
ized Mercedes‑Benz service center,orwrite to
one of thefollowing address:
in theUSA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
EuropeanDeliveryDepartment
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
in Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
EuropeanDeliveryDepartment
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms theservice in
theservice report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐
gram offers technicalhelpinthe case of a
breakdown. Your calls to thetoll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline areansweredbyour agents
24 hoursaday,365 days ayear.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA)
1-800-387-0100(Canada)
Youcan find further information in the
Mercedes-BenzRoadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the"Roadside Assistance"
section in theService and Warrantybooklet
(Canada). Youwill find both in thevehicle docu‐
ment wallet.
Changeofaddress or changeofownership
In theevent of achangeofaddress, please send
us the"Notification of address change" in the
Service and Guarantee bookletorsimply callthe
Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center
(USA) on thehotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)orCus‐
tomer Service (Canada)on1-800-387-0100. We
can then reachyou in atimelyfashion, if neces‐
sary.
If yousell your Mercedes, pleaseleave all litera‐
tureinthe vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.Ifyou have purchased aused vehi‐
cle, please send us the"Notice of Purchase of
Used Car" in theService and Guarantee booklet
or simplycall theMercedes-Benz Customer
General notes
23
AssistanceCenter (USA) at thehotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)orCus‐
tomer Service (Canada)at1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard‐
ous to health
In compliance withProposition 65 ("Prop65"),
thefollowing detachable label has been added to
eachvehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
&
WARNING Risk of accident duetomal‐
functions or system failures
If youdonot have theprescribed service/
maintenanceworkorany required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.
#
Alwayshave theprescribed service/
maintenanceworkaswell anyrequired
repairscarried out at aqualified spe‐
cialistworkshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
aresult of incorrect modifications to
electronic componentparts
Modification to electronic components, their
softwareorwiring could impair their function
and/or thefunction of other networkedcom‐
ponentparts. In particular,systems relevant
to safetycould also be affected.
As aresult, they maynolonger function as
intended and/or endanger theoperating
safetyofthe vehicle.
#
Nevertamper withthe wiring and elec‐
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware.
#
Youshould have all work on electrical
and electronic componentscarried out
at aqualified specialistworkshop.
Observe the"On-boardelectronics"section in
"Technical data".
&
WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hotparts of theexhaust
system
Flammable material suchasleaves, grass or
twigs mayigniteiftheycome intocontact
with hotparts of theexhaust system.
24
Generalnotes
#
When driving on unpavedroads or off-
road, regularly checkthe vehicle under‐
side.
#
Remove trappedplants or other flam‐
mable material.
#
If thereisdamage, consult aqualified
specialistworkshop immediately.
*
NOTE Damage to thevehicle
In thefollowing situations, in particular,there
is arisk of damage to thevehicle:
R
The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpavedroad
R
The vehicle is driven toofastoveran
obstacle,e.g. acurb,speed bump or pot‐
hole
R
Aheavy object strikesthe underbody or
chassis components
In situations suchasthis, thebody,the
underbody,chassiscomponents, wheels or
tires couldbedamaged without thedamage
being visible. Components damaged in this
waycan unexpectedly fail or,inthe case of
an accident, maynot absorb theloads that
arise as intended.
If theunderbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials suchasleaves, grass or
twigs can collect between theunderbody and
theunderbody paneling. These materials may
igniteiftheycome intocontact with hot
parts on theexhaust system.
#
Have thevehicle checkedand repaired
immediatelyataqualified specialist
workshop.
or
#
If driving safetyisimpaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
thevehicle immediatelyinaccordance
withthe trafficconditions,and contact
aqualified specialistworkshop.
Declaration of conformity forwirelessvehi‐
cle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐
ply withPart15ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to thefollowing twoconditions: 1) These
devicesmay notcause harmful interference, and
2) These devicesmustacceptany interference
received, includinginterference that maycause
undesired operation.Changesormodifications
notexpressly approvedbythe party responsible
forcompliance could void theuser's authority to
operatethe equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
complywithIndustryCanada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operationissubject to thefol‐
lowing twoconditions: (1) These devicesmay
notcause interference, and (2) These devices
must acceptany interference, including interfer‐
ence that maycauseundesired operationofthe
device."
USA: "Wireless chargingsystemfor mobile devi‐
ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): this device complies
withPart18ofthe FCC Rules."
The name and address of theresponsibleparty
is:
Continental AutomotiveSystems US Inc.
2400 ExecutiveHillsDrive
AuburnHills, MI 48326-2980
General notes
25
UnitedStatesofAmerica
Diagnostics connection
The diagnosticsconnectionisonly intendedfor
theconnection of diagnostic devices at aquali‐
fied specialistworkshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident duetocon‐
necting devicestothe diagnostics con‐
nection
If youconnectequipment to adiagnostics
connectioninthe vehicle, it mayaffect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As aresult, theoperating safetyofthe vehi‐
cle could be affected.
#
Onlyconnect thevehicle diagnostics
connection to devices whichhavebeen
tested withregardtotheir use and are
considered safe.
&
WARNING Risk of accident dueto
objectsinthe driver's footwell
Objectsinthe driver's footwell mayimpede
pedal travel or blockadepressed pedal.
This jeopardizes theoperating and road
safetyofthe vehicle.
#
Stow all objectsinthe vehicle securely
so that they cannotget intothe driver's
footwell.
#
Alwaysinstall thefloor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that thereisalwayssufficient room for
thepedals.
#
Do notuse loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on topofone another.
*
NOTE Batterydischarging from using
devicesconnected to thediagnostics
connection
Using devices at thediagnostics connection
drains thebattery.
#
Checkthe charge levelofthe battery.
#
If thecharge levelislow,chargethe
battery, e.g. by driving aconsiderable
distance.
Connecting equipment to thediagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, forexample. This maylead
to thevehicle failing to meetthe requirements of
thenextemissions inspection during themain
inspection.
Qualified specialistworkshop
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aquali‐
fied specialistworkshop. It has thenecessary
special skills, tools and qualificationstocor‐
rectly carry out theworkrequired on your vehi‐
cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant
works.
26
General notes
Alwayshave thefollowing work carried out on
your vehicle at aqualified specialistworkshop:
R
Safety-relevant works
R
Service and maintenance work
R
Repair work
R
Modifications as well as installationsand
conversions
R
Work on electronic components
Mercedes‑Benz recommends aMercedes‑Benz
service center.
Correct use of thevehicle
If youremove anywarning stickers,you or others
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe thefollowing information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
R
thesafetynotes in this manual
R
technicaldatafor thevehicle
R
trafficrules and regulations
R
laws and safetystandards pertainingto
motorvehicles
Notesfor personswithelectronicmedical
aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out
theinteraction of vehicle systems withelectronic
medical aids suchascardiac pacemakers.
Forthis reason,the following can occur in isola‐
tedcases, dependingonthe aids used:
R
Aids malfunctioning
R
Adversehealtheffects
Observe thenotes and warnings of themanufac‐
turer of theaids; if in doubt, contact thedevice
manufacturer and your doctor. Mercedes-
Benz AG recommends using only fewelectrical
vehicle systems if thereiscontinuinguncertainty
concerningthe possibilityofaids malfunction‐
ing.
Have repairsand maintenanceworkinthe area
of vehicle componentscarrying livevoltageand
transmission antennas carried out by aqualified
specialistworkshop.
Problems with your vehicle
If youshould experience aproblem withyour
vehicle, particularly one that youbelieve may
affect its safeoperation, we urge youtocontact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐
atelytohave theproblem diagnosed and recti‐
fied. If theproblem is notresolved to your satis‐
faction, please discuss theproblem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or,ifnec‐
essary, contact us at one of thefollowing
addresses:
In theUSA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
SandySprings, GA 30328
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer RelationsDepartment
General notes
27
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safetydefects
USAonly:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturersunder Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the
"National Trafficand MotorVehicle SafetyAct of
1966".
If youbelieve that your vehicle has adefect
whichcould cause acrash or could cause injury
or death, youshould immediatelyinformthe
National Highway TrafficSafetyAdministration
(NHTSA)inaddition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may
open an investigation,and if it finds that asafety
defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it mayorder
arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannotbecome involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer,orMercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA,you maycall theVehicle
SafetyHotline toll-freeat1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);gotohttps://
www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator,
NHTSA,400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington,
DC 20590, USA.
Youcan also obtain other information about
motorvehicle safetyfrom: https://
www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
*
NOTE Damage to thevehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damagetothe vehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damageisnot coveredeither by the
Mercedes-Benzimplied warrantyorbythe
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#
Followthe instructions in these operat‐
ing instructionsonproper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR code forrescue card
The QR code is secured in thefuel filler flap and
on theoppositeside on theB-pillar.Inthe event
of an accident, rescue services can use theQR
code to quicklyfind theappropriaterescue card
foryour vehicle. The current rescue cardcon‐
tains themostimportant informationabout your
vehicle in acompact form,e.g. therouting of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at https://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Electronic control units
Electronic control units areinstalled in your vehi‐
cle. Some of these arenecessaryfor thesafe
operation of your vehicle, while some assistyou
when driving (driver assistance systems). In
addition, your vehicle provides comfort and
28
Generalnotes
entertainment functions, whichare also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units containdatamemories
whichcan temporarily or permanently store
technicalinformationabout thevehicle's operat‐
ing state, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technicalevents or malfunc‐
tions.
In general,this information documents thestate
of acomponent part, amodule, asystemorthe
surroundingssuchas:
R
Operatingstatus of system components (e.g.
fill levels, batterystatus,tirepressure)
R
Status messages concerningthe vehicle or
its individualcomponents(e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐
eration,lateral acceleration,displayoffas‐
tened seatbelts)
R
Malfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
R
Information on events leading to vehicle
damage
R
System reactionsinspecial drivingsituations
(e.g. airbag deployment, interventionofsta‐
bilitycontrol systems)
R
Ambientconditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing theactual control unit
function,this dataassists themanufacturer in
detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐
mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
dataistemporaryand is onlyprocessed in the
vehicle itself. Onlyasmall portion of thedatais
stored in theevent or fault memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technicaldata
from thevehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐
ers) or thirdparties (e.g. breakdown services).
Servicesinclude repair services, maintenance
processes,warrantyclaimsand qualityassur‐
ancemeasures, forexample. The read out is per‐
formed via thelegally prescribed portfor the
diagnostics connection in thevehicle. The
respectiveservice networklocations or third
parties collect, processand use thedata. They
documenttechnical statuses of thevehicle,
assistinfinding malfunctions andimproving
qualityand aretransmittedtothe manufacturer,
if necessary. Furthermore, themanufacturer is
subject to product liability.For this, themanu‐
facturer requires technicaldata from vehicles.
Fault memories in thevehicle can be resetbya
service outletaspartofrepair or maintenance
work.
Depending on theselected equipment, youcan
importdataintovehicle convenience and info‐
tainment functionsyourself.
This includes, forexample:
R
Multimedia datasuchasmusic,films or pho‐
tosfor playbackinanintegrated multimedia
system
R
Address book datafor use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
R
Enterednavigation destinations
R
Dataabout theuse of Internetservices
This datacan be savedlocallyinthe vehicle or it
is located on adevice whichyou have connected
to thevehicle (e.g. asmartphone, USB flash
Generalnotes
29
driveorMP3 player). If this dataisstoredinthe
vehicle, youcan delete it at anytime. This data
is senttothirdparties onlyatyour request, par‐
ticularly when youuse onlineservices in accord‐
ancewiththe settings that youhaveselected.
Youcan storeorchangeconvenience settings/
individualizationinthe vehicle at anytime.
Depending on theequipment, this includes, for
example:
R
Settingsfor theseat and steering wheel posi‐
tions
R
Suspension and climatecontrol settings
R
Customizations suchasinterior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped,you can
connect your smartphoneoranother mobile end
device to thevehicle. Youcan controlthis by
means of thecontrol elementsintegrated in the
vehicle. Images and audiofromthe smartphone
can be output via themultimedia system. Cer‐
tain informationissimultaneouslytransferredto
your smartphone.
Dependingonthe type of integration, this can
include:
R
General vehicle data
R
Position data
This allows youtouse selected apps on your
smartphone, suchasnavigationormusicplay‐
back. Thereisnofurther interaction between the
smartphone and thevehicle; in particular,vehi‐
cle dataisnot directlyaccessible. Whichtype of
further dataprocessingoccursisdetermined by
theproviderofthe specific app used. Whichset‐
tingsyou can make, if any, depends on thespe‐
cific app and theoperating system of your
smartphone.
Onlineservices
Wireless networkconnection
If your vehicle has awireless networkconnec‐
tion, it enables datatobeexchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less networkconnection is enabled via thevehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unitorvia con‐
nected mobileend devices(e.g.smartphones).
Onlinefunctionscan be used via thewireless
networkconnection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/apps provided by theman‐
ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding onlineservicesofthe manufacturer,
theindividual functionsare described by the
manufacturer in asuitable place (e.g. Operator's
Manual, websiteofthe manufacturer) along with
therelevant data protection information.Per‐
sonaldatamay be used forthe provision of
onlineservices. Dataisexchanged via asecure
connection, e.g. themanufacturer's designated
IT systems. Personal dataiscollected, pro‐
cessed and used via theprovision of services
exclusivelyonthe basis of legal permissions or
withprior consent.
The services and functions(sometimes subject
to afee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to theentire
vehicle's dataconnection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular,legally prescribed functionsand services.
30
General notes
Thirdparty services
If it is possible to use onlineservices from other
providers, these services arethe responsibility
of theproviderinquestion and subject to that
provider's dataprotection conditions and terms
of use. The manufacturer has no influence on
thecontent exchanged.
Forthis reason,please ask theservice provider
forinformation about thetype, extent and pur‐
pose of thecollection and use of personal data
when services areprovidedbythirdparties.
Multimedia system/Mercedes me connect
If thevehicle is equipped withthe multimedia
system or Mercedes me connect,additional data
about thevehicle's operation, theuse of the
vehicle in certain situations,and thelocation of
thevehicle maybecompiled by themultimedia
system or Mercedes me connect.
Foradditional information please refertothe
chapter"Multimedia system" and/or the
Mercedes me connect Termsand Conditions.
Event data recorders
USAonly:
This vehicle is equipped withanevent data
recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDRis
to record, in certain crash or near crash-likesit‐
uations, suchasanairbag deployment or hitting
aroad obstacle,datathat will assist in under‐
standing howavehicle's systems performed.
The EDRisdesigned to recorddatarelated to
vehicle dynamics and safetysystems forashort
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such dataas:
R
Howvarious systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or notthe driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened
R
Howfar (ifatall)the driver wasdepressing
theacceleratorand/or brakepedaland
R
Howfastthe vehicle wastraveling
This datacan help provide abetterunderstand‐
ing of thecircumstances in whichaccidents and
injuries occur.NOTE: EDRdataisrecorded by
your vehicle onlyifanon-trivial crash situation
occurs; no dataisrecorded by theEDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, ageand accidentlocation) is
recorded.However, other parties, suchaslaw
enforcement,could combine EDR datawiththe
type of personally identifying dataroutinely
acquired during acrash investigation.
To read datarecorded by an EDR, special equip‐
mentisrequired, and access to thevehicle or
theEDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle
manufacturer,other parties that have thespecial
equipment, suchaslaw enforcement, can read
theinformation by accessing thevehicle or the
EDR.
EDR data maybeused in civil and criminalmat‐
ters as atool in accident reconstruction, acci‐
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since theCrash
DataRetrieval(CDR) tool that is used to extract
data from theEDR is commerciallyavailable,
Mercedes-BenzUSA,LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims anyand all liability arising from the
extraction of this informationbyunauthorized
Mercedes-Benzpersonnel.
General notes
31
MBUSAwill notshareEDR datawithotherswith‐
out theconsent of thevehicle owner or,ifthe
vehicle is leased, without theconsent of theles‐
see. Exceptionstothis representation include
responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement;by
federal, stateorlocal government;inconnection
withorarising out of litigation involvingMBUSA
or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,asrequired
by law.
Warning: The EDRisacomponent of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
ing, modifying or removing theEDR component
mayresult in amalfunction of theRestraint Sys‐
temModule and other systems.
Statelaws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict withfederal regulation arepre-empted.
This means that in theevent of suchconflict,the
federal regulation governs. As of December
2016,17stateshaveenacted laws relatingto
EDRs.
Copyright
Free and open-source software
Informationonlicensefor free and open-source
softwareused in your vehicle can be found on
thedatacarrier in your vehicle document wallet
and withupdates on thefollowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registeredtrademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is aregisteredtrademarkofBlue‐
toothSIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is aregisteredtrademarkofDTS,Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™are registeredtrademarks
of DOLBYLaboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
arereg‐
isteredtrademarks of Mercedes-Benz AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is aregisteredtrademarkof
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
areregisteredtrademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is aregisteredtrademarkof
BurmesterAudiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows Media
®
areregis‐
teredtrademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is aregisteredtrademarkofSirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is aregisteredtrademarkofiBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is aregisteredtrademarkof
Gracenote,Inc.
R
ZAGATSurvey
®
and related brands areregis‐
teredtrademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
32
General notes
Restraint system
Protection provided by therestraint system
The restraint system includes thefollowing com‐
ponents:
R
Seat belt system
R
Airbags
R
Child restraint system
R
Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent thevehi‐
cle occupants from coming intocontact with
parts of thevehicle interior in theevent of an
accident. In theevent of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce theforces to
whichthe vehicle occupants aresubjected.
Aseat belt can onlyprovide thebestlevelofpro
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐
ing Devicesand/or airbags supplement thepro‐
tection offeredbyacorrectlywornseat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devicesand/or airbags
arenot deployed in every accident.
In order forthe restraint system to provide the
intended levelofprotection, eachvehicle occu‐
pant mustobserve thefollowing information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly.
R
Sit in an almostupright seat position with
their backagainstthe seat backrest.
R
Sit withtheir feet resting on thefloor,ifpos‐
sible.
R
Alwayssecurepersons under 5ft(1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable
forMercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available todaycan com‐
pletely eliminateinjuries and fatalities in every
accidentsituation. In particular,the seat belt
and airbag generally do notprotect against
objects penetrating thevehicle from theoutside.
It is also notpossible to completelyrule out the
risk of injurycaused by theairbag deploying.
Reducedrestraint system protection
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathfrom
modifications to therestraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly afteralterations have been made.
The restraint system maythen notprotect
thevehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly,for
example
#
Neveralter theparts of therestraint
system.
#
Nevertamper withthe wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
If it is necessarytomodify thevehicle to accom‐
modateaperson withdisabilities, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails.
USAonly: fordetails, contact ourCustomer
Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Occupant safety
33
Restraint system functionality
When theignition is switched on, aself-testis
performed, during whichthe 6 restraint sys‐
temwarning lamplightsup. It goes out no later
than afew secondsafter thevehicle is started.
The components of therestraint system arethen
functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
Amalfunction has occurredinthe restraint sys‐
temif:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does notlight up when theignition is
switched on
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lightsupcontinuouslyorrepeatedly during a
journey
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components maybetrig‐
geredunintentionallyormay notdeployas
intended during an accident. This mayaffect
theEmergency Tensioning Devicesorair‐
bags, forexample.
#
Have therestraint system checkedand
repaired immediatelyataqualified spe‐
cialistworkshop.
Function of therestraint system in an acci‐
dent
Howthe restraint system worksisdetermined by
theseverity of theimpact detected and thetype
of accidentanticipated:
R
Frontal impact
R
Rear impact
R
Sideimpact
R
Rollover
The activation thresholds forthe components of
therestraint system aredetermined based on
theevaluationofthe sensor values measured at
various points in thevehicle. This process is pre-
emptiveinnature. The triggering/deployment of
thecomponents of therestraint system must
take place in good time at thestart of thecolli‐
sion.
Factorswhich can only be seenand measured
afteracollision has occurreddonot playadeci‐
siverole in thedeployment of an airbag. Nordo
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle maybedeformed significantlywith‐
out an airbag being deployed. This is thecase if
onlyparts whichare relativelyeasilydeformed
areaffected and therateofvehicle deceleration
is nothigh. Conversely,anairbag maybe
deployedeventhough thevehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
suchaslongitudinal membersare hit, forexam‐
ple, this mayresult in sufficiently highlevels of
vehicle deceleration.
34
Occupant safety
The componentsofthe restraint system can
be activated or deployedindependentlyof
eachother:
Component Detected deploy‐
mentsituation
Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices
Frontal impact, rear
impact,side impact,
rollover
Driver'sairbag, front
passenger airbag
Frontal impact
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Side airbag Side impact
Windowcurtain air‐
bag
Side impact,rollover,
frontal impact
Belt airbag Frontal impact
Cushionbag Frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can onlybedeployed
in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF
indicator lampisoff.Ifthe front passenger seat
is occupied, makesure, both beforeand during
thejourney, that thestatus of thefront
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot air bag
components
The air bag parts arehot afteranair bag has
been deployed.
#
Do nottouchthe air bag parts.
#
Have adeployedair bag replaced at a
qualified specialistworkshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that youhavethe
vehicle towedtoaqualified specialistworkshop
afteranaccident. Take this intoaccount,partic‐
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐
geredoranairbag deployed.
If theEmergency Tensioning Devicesare trig‐
geredoranairbag is deployed, youwill hear a
bang, and asmallamountofpowder mayalso be
released:
R
The bang will notgenerallyaffect your hear‐
ing.
R
In general,the powder released is nothaz‐
ardous to healthbut maycause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonaryconditions.
Provided it is safetodoso, leave thevehicle
immediately or open thewindowinorder to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbagsand pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devicescontainperchloratematerial, whichmay
requirespecial handlingorenvironmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelinesregarding
wastedisposal mustbeobserved. In California,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts
Protection provided by theseat belt
Alwaysfastenyour seat belt correctly before
startingajourney.Aseatbeltcan only provide
thebestlevel of protection if it is worn correctly.
Occupant safety
35
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrectlyfastened seat belt
If theseat belt is notworncorrectly,itcan‐
notperform its intended protectivefunction.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, forexample, in the
event of an accidentorwhen braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Alwaysensurethat all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctlyand aresitting properly.
Alwaysobserve theinstructionsabout thecor‐
rect driver's seatposition and adjusting theseat
(/ page96).
In order forthe correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide theintended levelofprotection, eachvehi‐
cle occupant mustobserve thefollowing infor‐
mation:
R
The seat belt mustnot be twistedand must
fittightly and snuglyacross thebody.
R
The seat belt mustberouted across thecen‐
terofthe shoulder and as lowdownacross
thehips as possible.
R
The shoulder section of theseat belt should
nottouchyour necknor be routed under
your armorbehindyour back.
R
Avoid wearing bulkyclothing, e.g. awinter
coat.
R
Push thelap belt down as faraspossible
across your hips and pull tight withthe shoul‐
der section of thebelt. Neverroutethe lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women mustalsotakeparticular
carewiththis.
R
Neverroutethe seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasiveorfragile objects.
R
Onlyone person should use eachseat belt at
anyone time. Neverallow babies and chil‐
dren to travelsitting on thelap of another
vehicle occupant.
R
Neversecureobjects withaseat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants. Alwaysobserve the
instructions forloading thevehicle when
securing objects, luggageorloads
(/ page125).
Also ensurethat no objects, e.g. acushion,
areeverplaced between aperson and the
seat.
The seat belts on thefollowing seats areequip‐
ped withaspecial seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
Activateordeactivate thespecial seatbelt
retractor (/ page 55).
If children aretraveling in thevehicle, be sureto
observe theinstructionsand safetynotes on
"Children in thevehicle" (/ page50).
36
Occupant safety
Limitations of theprotection provided by the
seat belt
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrect seatposition
The seatbeltdoesnot offerthe intended
levelofprotection if youhave notmovedthe
seat backresttoanalmostvertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
youcould slide underneaththe seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neckinjuries, forexam‐
ple.
#
Adjustthe seat properly beforebegin‐
ning your journey.
#
Alwaysensurethat theseat backrestis
in an almostvertical position and that
theshoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across thecenter of your shoul‐
der.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathwhen
additional restraint systems arenot used
forpersons withasmaller build
Persons under 5ft(1.50 m) tall cannotwear
theseat belt correctly without asuitable
additional restraint system.
If theseat belt is notworncorrectly,itcan‐
notperform its intended protectivefunction.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, forexample, in the
event of an accidentorwhen braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Alwayssecurepersons under 5ft
(1.50 m) tallinasuitable restraint sys‐
tem.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
blockedseat belt buckle or seat belt
anchorage
Objects next to thefront seat that blockthe
seat belt buckle or themoving seat belt
anchorageonthe front seat impair thefunc‐
tion of theEmergency Tensioning Devices.
The Emergency Tensioning Devicescan,
then, notfunction as intended and theseat
belt can no longer provide theintended pro‐
tection.
#
Beforestarting thejourney, makesure
that thereare no objects around the
seat belt buckle or between thefront
seat and door.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
R
The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R
The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
Modificationshavebeen made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device,seatbelt
anchorageorseatbeltretractor
Seatbelts maysustain non-visible damagein
an accident, e.g.due to glass splinters.
Occupant safety
37
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in theevent of an accident, forexample.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay
be deployed unintentionallyornot function
as intended.
#
Nevermodify theseat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seatbeltancho‐
ragesorseat belt retractors.
#
Make surethat theseat belts arenot
damaged, arenot worn and areclean.
#
Alwayshave theseat belts checked
immediatelyafter an accident at a
qualified specialistworkshop.
Onlyuse seat belts that areapprovedfor your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathfrom
deployedpyrotechnicEmergency Ten‐
sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployedare no longer opera‐
tional and areunable to perform their inten‐
ded protectivefunction.
#
Therefore, have deployedpyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devicesimmedi‐
ately replaced at aqualified specialist
workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that youhavethe
vehicle towedtoaqualified specialistworkshop
afteranaccident.
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is notfully retracted,it
maybecome trappedinthe door or in the
seat mechanism.
#
Alwaysensurethat an unused seat belt
is fullyretracted.
Information on thebelt airbag in therear
seat belt
TheBELTBAG identification indicates that arear
seat belt is equippedwithabelt airbag.
When activated, thebelt airbag increases the
protected area of thevehicle occupant's ribcage.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death
through theuse of anon-approvedchild
restraint system
In an accident, thebelt air bag maydamage
anon-approvedornon-authorized child
restraint system.
As aresult, thechild restraint system may
notbeable to provide theintended levelof
protection.
#
Therefore, alwaysuse LATCHorLATCH-
type (ISOFIX)tofastenachild seat
equippedwithanintegrated restraint
system.
#
Forvehicles equipped withthe optional
rear seat-belt air bags ("beltbag"), only
use aMercedes-Benzapproved booster
seat withintegrated backrest.
#
Neveruse an air bag equipped seat belt
to fasten afront or rear-facingchild
seat or anon-approvedboosterseat.
#
Please contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center forinformation
on approvedchild restraint systems.
38
Occupant safety
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
If theseat belt is pulled quicklyorsharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strapcan‐
notbepulled out anyfurther.
#
Alwaysengageseat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt intoseat belt buckle 1 of thecor‐
responding seat.
#
Press and hold theseat belt outletrelease
and slide seat belt outlet 3 intothe desired
position.
#
Letgoofthe seat belt outletrelease and
ensurethat seat belt outlet 3 locks into
position.
Vehicles with automatic front passengerair‐
bag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of theEmergency
Tensioning Device and side airbag when
thefront passenger seat is unoccupied
If theseat belt tongueisengaged in theseat
belt buckle of theunoccupied front
passenger seat, theEmergency Tensioning
Device and theside air bag mayalso deploy
in theevent of an accidentalong withother
systems.
#
Onlyone person should use eachseat
belt at anyone time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of theEmergency
Tensioning Device when thefront-
passenger seat is unoccupied
If theseat belt tongueisengaged in theseat
belt buckle of theunoccupied front-
passenger seat, theEmergency Tensioning
Device mayalsodeployinthe event of an
accidentalong withother systems.
#
Onlyone person should use eachseat
belt at anyone time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: If thefront seat belt
is notpulled tightly across your body,the seat
belt adjustment mayautomaticallyapply acer‐
tain tightening force. Do nothold theseat belt
tightly while it is adjusting.
Youcan activateand deactivatethe seat belt
adjustment function using themultimedia sys‐
tem(/page40).
Occupant safety
39
Function of therear seat belt buckle
extender
The seat belt buckle extenderfor theouter rear
seatsmakes it easier to fasten theseat belt.
Alwaysensurethat theseat belt buckle can be
extendedand retracted freely.
Afterthe seat belt is fastened, theseat belt
buckle returns to its normal position. The seat
belt then lies tightly across thelap and thorax
areas.
Releasing seat belts
#
Press therelease button in theseat belt
buckle and guide theseat belt backwiththe
seat belt tongue.
Activating/deactivatingseatbeltadjustment
viathe multimediasystem
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Belt Adjustment
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Seat belt warning function forthe driver and
frontpassenger
The ü seat belt warning lampinthe Instru‐
ment Displayisareminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants mustwear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seatbeltwarning lamplightsupfor six
seconds every timethe vehicle is started.
In addition, awarning tone maysound.
Whenthe driver's and front passenger's doors
areclosed and thedriverand front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, theseat belt
warning goes out.
In thefollowing cases, theseat belt warning
lightsupduring ajourneyif:
R
The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and thedriver's or front
passenger seat belt is notfastened.
R
The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while thevehicle is in motion.
Airbags
Overviewofairbags
1
Knee airbag
2
Driver's airbag
3
Front passenger airbag
4
Windowcurtain airbag
5
Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by theAIRBAG symbol.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection forthe respectivevehicle occupant.
40
Occupant safety
Potentialprotection from eachairbag:
AIRBAG Potentialprotection for:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lowerleg
Driver's airbag,
front passenger
airbag
Head and ribcage
Windowcurtain
airbag
Head
Side airbag Ribcage, also pelvis for
front seatoccupants
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatalinjuries
if thefront-passengerairbag is enabled
If thefront-passengerfront airbag is enabled,
achild on thefront-passengerseat maybe
struck by thefront-passengerairbag during
an accident.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat withanENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG,DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYtothe
CHILD can occur.
When installing achild restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observethe vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page60). Also, always
observe thenotes on rearward-facing or
forward-facingchild restraint systems on the
front passenger seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passengerair‐
bag shutoff:
The front passenger airbagcan only be deployed
in an accidentifthe PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF
indicator lampisoff.Ifthe front passenger seat
is occupied, makesure, both beforeand during
thejourney, that thestatus of thefront
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
*
NOTE Important points to remember if
thefront passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, thecomponents of the
restraint system maydeployunnecessarily
on thefront passenger side if:
R
Thereare heavy objects on thefront
passenger seat.
R
The seat belt tongueisengaged in the
seat belt buckle of thefront passenger
seat and thefront passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#
Stow objectsinasuitable place.
#
Onlyone person should use eachseat
belt at anyone time.
Depending on thedetected accident situation,
thewindowcurtain airbag on thefront
passenger side maydeploy. The airbag is
deployedregardless of whether thefront
passenger seat is occupied.
Cushionbag in thereclining rear seat
The cushionbag offers additional occupant pro‐
tection in theevent of frontal impacts. When
activated, thecushionbag deploys under the
seat cushion. This helps prevent thevehicle
occupant from slipping offthe seat cushion.
If youinstall achild restraint system on the
reclining rear seat,alwaysobserve theadditional
notes(/page50).
Occupant safety
41
Protection by theairbags
Depending on theaccidentsituation,anairbag
maysupplement theprotection offeredbyacor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrect seatposition
If youdeviatefromthe correct seatposition,
theairbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tectivefunction and deployment mayeven
cause further injuries.
In order to avoid risks, eachvehicle occupant
mustalwaysmakesureofthe following:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly.Pregnant
women musttakeparticular careto
ensurethat thelap belt neverliesacross
theabdomen.
R
Adoptthe correct seatposition and keep
as farawayaspossible from theairbags.
R
Observe thefollowing information.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat thereare no
objects between theairbag and vehicle
occupant.
To avoid therisksresulting from thedeployment
of an airbag, eachvehicle occupant must
observe thefollowing information in particular:
R
Beforestartingyour journey, adjustyour seat
correctly;the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be movedasfar back
as possible.
When doing so, alwaysobserve theinforma‐
tion on thecorrect driver's seatposition
(/ page 96).
R
Only hold thesteering wheel by thesteering
wheel rim. This allows theairbag to be fully
deployed.
R
Alwayslean againstthe seat backrestwhen
thevehicle is in motion. Do notlean forwards
or againstthe door or side window. Youmay
otherwise be in thedeployment area of the
airbags.
R
Alwayskeep your feet on thefloor.Donot
put your feet on thecockpit, forexample.
Your feet mayotherwise be in thedeploy‐
ment area of theairbag.
R
If children aretraveling in thevehicle,
observe theadditional notes(/page50).
R
Alwaysstowand secureobjectscorrectly.
Objects in thevehicle interior mayprevent an
airbagfromfunctioning correctly.Eachvehicle
occupant mustalwaysmakesureofthe follow‐
ing in particular:
R
Thereare no people, animals or objects
between thevehicle occupants and an air‐
bag.
R
Thereare no objectsbetween theseat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
R
Thereare no hardobjects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on thegrabhandles or coat hooks.
R
Thereare no accessoryparts, suchasmobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
holders, attached to thevehicle within the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on thedoor,onthe side windowor
on theside wall trim.
42
Occupant safety
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retainingstrapsmustberouted or
attached to thevehicle within thedeploy‐
ment area of an airbag. Alwayscomply with
theaccessorymanufacturer's installation
instructions and, in particular,the noteson
suitable places forinstallation.
R
Thereare no heavy,sharp-edged or fragile
objectsinthe pockets of your clothing. Store
suchobjectsinasuitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to theairbag cover
If youmodify thecover of an airbag or affix
objectssuchasstickers to it, theairbag may
no longer function correctly.
#
Nevermodify thecover of an airbag and
do notaffix objectstoit.
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by theAIRBAG symbol (/ page40).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
theuse of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent thedeployment of air bags integrated
intothe seats.
Consequently, theair bags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to
do. In addition, operation of theautomatic
front passenger air bag shutoffmay be
restricted.
#
Youshould only use seat covers that
have been approved forthe correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of thesensorsinthe door paneling
Sensorstocontrol theairbags arelocated in
thedoors. Modificationsorworknot per‐
formed correctlytothe doorsordoor panel‐
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
thefunction of thesensorsbeing impaired.
The airbags might thereforenot function
properly anymore.
Consequently,the airbags cannotprotect
vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to
do.
#
Nevermodify thedoorsorparts of the
doors.
#
Alwayshave work on thedoorsordoor
paneling carried out at aqualified spe‐
cialistworkshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
Adeployedairbag no longer has aprotective
function and cannot protect as intended in
theevent of an accident.
#
Have thevehicle towedtoaqualified
specialistworkshop in order to have the
deployedairbag replaced.
Have deployedairbags replaced immediately.
Occupant safety
43
Status of thefront passenger front airbag
Function of theautomatic front passenger
airbag shutoff
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoffis
able to detect whether thefront passenger seat
is occupied by aperson or achild restraint sys‐
tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or
disabled accordingly.
When installing achild restraint system on the
front passenger seat, alwaysmakesureofthe
following:
R
Ensurethat thechild restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly(/page49).
R
Alwaysobserve thechild restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
R
Neverplace objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind thechild restraint system.
R
Fully retract theseat cushion lengthadjust‐
ment.
R
The entirebase of thechild restraint system
mustalwaysrestonthe sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
R
The backrestofthe forward-facingchild
restraint system must, as faraspossible, be
resting on theseat backrestofthe front
passenger seat.
R
The child restraint system mustnot touchthe
roof or be put under strain by thehead
restraints. Adjustthe seat backrestinclina‐
tion and thehead restraint setting accord‐
ingly.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
objectsbetween thesitting surface and
thechild restraint system
Objects between thesitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect thefunc‐
tion of theautomatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
This could result in thefront passenger air‐
bag notfunctioning as intended during an
accident.
#
Do notplace anyobjects between the
sitting surface and thechild restraint
system.
#
The entirebase of thechild restraint
system mustalwaysrestonthe sitting
surface of thefront passenger seat.
#
The backrestofthe forward-facingchild
restraint system must, as faraspossi‐
ble, be resting on theseat backrestof
thefront passenger seat.
#
Alwayscomplywiththe child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Aperson on thefront passenger seat must
observe thefollowing information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly(/page35).
R
Sit in an almostupright seatposition with
their backagainstthe seat backrest.
R
Sit withtheir feet resting on thefloor,ifpos‐
sible.
The front passenger airbag mayotherwise be
disabledbymistake,for example in thefollowing
situations:
R
The front passenger transferstheir weight by
supporting themselves on avehicle armrest.
44
Occupant safety
R
The front passenger sits in suchaway that
their weight is raised from thesitting sur‐
face.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampislit,the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will notbedeployedinthe event of
an accidentand cannot perform its intended
protectivefunction.
Aperson in thefront passenger seat could
then, forexample, comeintocontact with
thevehicle interior,especially if theperson is
sitting tooclose to thecockpit.
If thefront passenger seat is occupied,
alwaysensurethat:
R
The classification of theperson in the
front passenger seatiscorrect and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bledinaccordance withthe person in the
front passenger seat.
R
The front passenger seathas been moved
as farbackaspossible.
R
The person is seated correctly.
#
Ensure,bothbeforeand during thejour‐
ney, that thestatus of thefront
passenger airbag is correct.
If thefront passenger seat is occupied, theclas‐
sification of theperson or child restraint system
on thefront passenger seat takesplace afterthe
front passenger airbag shutoffself-test. The
PASSENGER AIR BAGindicator lamps displaythe
status of thefront passenger airbag.
Alwaysobserve thenotes on thefunction of the
PASSENGER AIR BAGindicator lamps
(/ page45).
Function of thePASSENGER AIR BAGindica‐
torlamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
When theignition is switched on, aself-testis
performed during whichthe twoPASSENGER
AIR BAGONand OFFindicator lamps light up
simultaneously.
Occupant safety
45
The status of thefront passenger front airbag is
displayedafter theself-test:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAGONlightsupfor
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps areoff (PASSENGER AIRBAG ON and
OFF): thefront passenger front airbag is able
to deployinthe event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lightsupcontinu‐
ously: thefront passenger front airbag is dis‐
abled. It will then notbedeployedinthe
event of an accident.
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator lampis
off, only thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampshows thestatus of thefront passenger
front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi‐
cator lampmay be lit continuouslyorbeoff.
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, thefront passenger seat
maynot be used. Also in this case, do notinstall
achild restraint system on thefront passenger
seat. Have automatic frontpassenger frontair‐
bag shutoffcheckedand repaired immediately at
aqualified specialistworkshop.
Status display
If thefront passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both beforeand during thejourney, that thesta‐
tus of thefront passenger front airbag is correct
forthe current situation.
Afterinstalling arearward-facing child
restraint system on thefront passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF mustbelit con‐
tinuously.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathfrom
using arearward-facing child restraint
system when thefront passenger front
airbag is enabled
If yousecureachild in arearward-facing
child restraint system on thefront passenger
seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi‐
cator lampisoff,the front passenger airbag
can deployinthe event of an accident.
The child could be struck by theairbag.
Alwaysensurethat thefront passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lampmustbelit.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATHorSERI‐
OUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.
When installing achild restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observethe vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page60).
Depending on thechild restraint system and the
statureofthe child, thePASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lampmay be off. In this case, do
notinstall therearward-facing child restraint
system on thefront passenger seat.
Instead, install therearward-facingchild
restraint system on asuitable rear seat.
Afterinstalling aforward-facingchild
restraint system on thefront passenger
seat: depending on thechild restraint system
and thestatureofthe child, PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF maybelit continuouslyorbeoff.
Alwaysobserve thefollowing information.
46
Occupant safety
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrect positioning of theforward-
facing child restraint system
If yousecureachild in aforward-facingchild
restraint system on thefront passenger seat
and youpositionthe front passenger seat too
closetothe cockpit, in theevent of an acci‐
dent, thechild could:
R
Come intocontact with thevehicle inte‐
rior if thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi‐
cator lampislit,for example.
R
Be struck by theair bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp
is off.
#
Alwaysmove thefront passenger seat
as farbackaspossible and fully retract
theseat cushion lengthadjustment.
Alwaysmakesurethat theshoulder belt
strapiscorrectly routed from theseat
belt outletonthe vehicle to theshoul‐
der belt guide on thechild restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strapmustbe
routed forwards and downwardsfrom
thevehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
adjustthe seat belt outletand thefront
passenger seat accordingly.
#
Alwaysobserve thechild restraint sys‐
temmanufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.
When installing achild restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observethe vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page60).
If aperson is sitting on thefront passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF maybelit con‐
tinuouslyorbeoff,dependingonthe person's
stature.
Aperson on thefront passenger seat must
alwaysobserve thefollowing information:
R
If thefront passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or aperson withastaturecorrespond‐
ing to that of an adult,the PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF indicator lampmustbeoff.This
indicates that thefront passenger front air‐
bag is enabled.
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampislit continuously, an adult or person
withabuild corresponding to that of an adult
shouldnot use thefront passenger seat.
Instead, they should use arear seat.
R
If thefront passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature(e.g. ateenager or
small adult), thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF
indicator lampeither lightsupcontinuously
or remains off, depending on theresult of the
classification.
-
If thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lampisoff:move thefront passenger
seat as farbackaspossible or theperson
of smaller statureshoulduse arear seat.
-
If thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lampislit continuously: theperson of
smaller statureshouldnot use thefront
passenger seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathwhen
thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampislit
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampremainslit afterthe system self-test,
thefront passenger air bag is deactivated. It
will notbedeployedinthe event of an acci‐
Occupant safety
47
dent.Inthis case, thefront passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protectivefunc‐
tion,e.g. when aperson is seated in thefront
passenger seat.
That person could, forexample, comeinto
contact with thevehicle interior,especially if
theperson is sitting tooclose to thecockpit.
If thefront passenger seat is occupied,
alwaysensurethat:
R
The classification of theperson in the
front passenger seatiscorrect and the
front passenger air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance withthe per‐
son in thefront passenger seat.
R
The person is seated properly withacor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as farbackaspossible.
Be suretoalso observe thefollowing further
related subjects:
R
Child restraint system on thefront passenger
seat (/ page60).
PRE-SAFE
®
system
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant protec‐
tion)
PRE-SAFE
®
is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implementpre-emptivemeas‐
ures to protect thevehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can implement thefollowing meas‐
ures independentlyofeachother:
R
Tightening theseat belts on thedriver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Closing theside windows.
R
Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof.
R
Vehicles with memoryfunction: Move the
front passenger seattoamorefavorable
seat position.
R
Vehicles with memoryfunction in the
rear passenger compartment: move the
outer rear seatstoamorefavorable seat
position.
R
Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase
theair pressureinthe seat side bolsters of
theseat backrest.
R
Vehicles with rear seat beltbuckle
extenders: tighten seat belts on theouter
rear seats.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound:providedthat themulti‐
media system is switched on, generates a
briefnoise signaltostimulatethe innatepro‐
tectivemechanism of aperson's hearing.
*
NOTE Damage caused by objectsinthe
footwell or behindthe seat
The automatic adjustment of theseat posi‐
tion mayresult in damagetothe seat and/or
theobject.
#
Stow objectsinasuitable place.
Reversing thePRE-SAFE
®
system measures
If an accidentdid notoccur,the pre-emptive
measures that were taken arereversed.
48
Occupant safety
Youwill need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
#
If theseat belt pre-tensioning is notreduced,
move theseat backrestbackslightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can detect certain impacts,
particularly an imminent rear impact,and take
pre-emptivemeasures to protect thevehicle
occupants. These measures cannotnecessarily
prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can implement thefollowing
measures independentlyofeachother:
R
Tightening theseat belts on thedriver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Vehicles with electric rear seats: tighten
theseat belts on theouter rear seats.
R
Increasingbrake pressurewhen thevehicle
is stationary. This brakeapplication is can‐
celed automaticallywhen thevehicle pulls
away.
If an accident did notoccur,the pre-emptive
measures that were takenare reversed.
System limits
The system will notinitiateany action in thefol‐
lowing situations:
R
when backing up
The system will notinitiateany braking applica‐
tion in thefollowing situations:
R
whilstdriving
or
R
when entering or exitingaparkingspace
while using ActiveParking Assist
Safelytransporting children in thevehicle
Alwaysobserve when children aretraveling
in thevehicle
%
Alsostrictlyobserve thesafetynotes forthe
specific situation. In this wayyou can recog‐
nize potentialrisksand avoid dangersifchil‐
dren aretraveling in thevehicle
(/ page50).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that neglectingtosecureachild in
thechild restraint system mayhave serious con‐
sequences. Alwaysbediligent in securing achild
carefullybeforeevery journey.
To improve protection forchildren younger than
12 yearsold or under5ft (1.50 m) in height,
Mercedes-Benzrecommends youobservethe
following information:
R
Alwayssecurethe child in achild restraint
system suitable forthis Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cle.
R
The child restraint system mustbeappropri‐
atetothe age, weight and size of thechild.
R
The vehicle seat mustbesuitable forinstal‐
ling achild restraint system.
Accident statisticsshowthat children secured
on therear seats aregenerallysafer than chil‐
dren secured on thefront seats. Forthis reason,
Mercedes-Benzstrongly advises that youinstall
achild restraint system on arear seat.
Occupantsafety
49
Genericterm"child restraint system"
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Operator's Manual. Achild restraint sys‐
temis, forexample:
R
Ababycar seat
R
Arearward-facing child seat
R
Aforward-facingchild seat
R
Achild boosterseat withabackrestand seat
belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using achild
boosterseat withabackrest.
The child restraint system mustbeappropriate
to theage,weight and size of thechild.
Observing laws and legal requirements
Alwaysobserve thelegal requirements when
using achild restraint system in thevehicle.
Observing standards forchild restraint sys‐
tems
All child restraint systems mustmeetthe follow‐
ing standards:
R
U.S. Federal MotorVehicle SafetyStandards
213and 225
R
Canadian MotorVehicle SafetyStandards
213and 210.2
Confirmationthat thechild restraint system
complies withthe standards can be found on an
instruction label on thechild restraint system.
This confirmationcan also be found in theinstal‐
lation instructions that areincluded withthe
child restraint system.
Detectingrisks, avoiding danger
Securing systems forchild restraint systems
in thevehicle
Onlyuse thefollowing securing systems forchild
restraint systems:
R
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX)mounting brackets
R
The vehicle's seat belt system
R
The TopTether anchorages
Installing aLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint
system is preferred.
Simplyattaching to thesecuring rings on the
vehicle can reduce therisk of installing thechild
restraint system incorrectly.
When securing achild withthe integrated seat
belt of theLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint
system, alwayscomply withthe permissible
gross weight forthe child and child restraint sys‐
tem(/page55).
Aboosterseat maybenecessarytoachieve
proper seat belt positioning forchildren over
40 lbs (18kg) in weight or until they reacha
heightwhereathree-point seat belt can be fitted
properly without aboosterseat.
Mercedes-Benz recommends asuitablechild
boosterseat withabackrestand seat belt guide.
Advantageofarearward-facing child
restraint system
It is preferable to transport ababyorasmall
child in asuitable rearward-facing child restraint
system. In this case, thechild sits in theoppo‐
50
Occupant safety
sitedirection to thedirection of traveland faces
backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neckmuscles in relation to thesize and
weight of their head. The risk of injurytothe cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
arearward-facing child restraint system.
Alwayssecureachild restraint system cor‐
rectly
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathcaused
by incorrect installation of thechild
restraint system
If thechild restraint system is incorrectly
installed on asuitable seatingposition, it
cannotperform its intended protectivefunc‐
tion.
The child cannotberestrained in theevent of
an accident, heavy braking or asudden
changeofdirection.
#
Alwayscomplywiththe manufacturer's
installation instructions forthe child
restraint system and its correct use.
#
Make surethat theentirebase of the
child restraint system alwaysrests on
thesitting surface of theseat.
#
Neverplace objects under or behind
thechild restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
#
Alwaysuse child restraint systems with
theoriginal coverdesigned forthem.
#
Alwaysreplace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathfrom
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If thechild restraint system is notcorrectly
installed or secured, it could release in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden changeindirection.
The child restraint system could be flung
aroundand hit vehicle occupants.
#
Alwaysinstall child restraint systems
correctly, evenwhennot in use.
#
Alwayscomplywiththe child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
Alwaysobserve thechild restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as thevehicle-specific
information:
-
Install theLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child
restraint system on therear seat
(/ page55).
-
Securethe child restraint system withthe
seat belt on therear seat (/ page59).
-
Securethe child restraint system withthe
seat belt on thefront passenger seat
(/ page60). Observe thespecific
instructionsfor therearward-facing and
forward-facingchild restraint systems
(/ page60).
If thefront passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both beforeand during thejour‐
ney, that thestatus of thefront
passenger airbag is correct forthe cur‐
rent situation(/page 45).
Occupant safety
51
R
Observe thewarning labels in thevehicle
interior and on thechild restraint system.
R
Also secureTop Tether if present.
Notesfor vehicles with areclining rear seat
When installing achild restraint system, move
thereclining rear seat backresttoanalmost
upright position.The reclining rear seat backrest
mustbeincontact with thechild restraint sys‐
tem. Observe thenotes on thecushionbag
(/ page40).
If youinstall achild restraint system on the
reclining rear seat,besuretoobserve thechild
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Do notmodify thechild restraint system
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to thechild restraint system
The child restraint system maynolonger
function as it is supposed to if youmake
modificationsorattachobjectstoit, e.g. toys
or unsuitable accessories. This poses an
increased risk of injury!
Nevermodify thechild restraint system. Only
attachaccessories whichthe manufacturer
of thechild restraint system has authorized
especiallyfor this child restraint system.
Onlyuse child restraint systems whichare in
proper working condition
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathcaused
by theuse of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retainingsys
tems that have been subjectedtoaload in
an accidentmay then notbeable to perform
their intended protectivefunction.
The child cannotberestrained in theevent of
an accident, heavy braking or asudden
changeofdirection.
#
Alwaysreplace child restraint systems
immediatelythat have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
#
Have thesecuring systems forthe child
restraint systems checkedataqualified
specialistworkshop beforeinstalling a
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
&
WARNING Risk of burnswhen thechild
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If thechild restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could sufferburns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of thechild
restraint system.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat thechild
restraint system is notexposedto
direct sunlight.
#
Protect it withablanket,for example.
#
If thechild restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight,allowitto
cool beforesecuring achild intoit.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
52
Occupant safety
Observe when stopping or parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children areleftunattendedinthe vehicle,
they could:
R
Opendoors,therebyendangering other
persons or road users.
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition,the children could also setthe
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
R
Releasing theparking brake.
R
Changing thetransmission position.
R
Startingthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
#
Keep thevehicle keyout of reachof
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatalinjurydue to
exposuretoextreme heat or coldinthe
vehicle
If people –particularly children –are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extendedperiodoftime, thereisarisk of
serious or evenfatal injury.
#
Neverleave anyone –particularly chil‐
dren –unattendedinthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
Occupant safety
53
Overviewofsuitable seats in thevehicle forinstalling achild restraint system
Securing systems forchild restraint systems
Vehicleseat
Left/right rear seat
Preferredsecuring system:
®
LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child seat securing sys‐
tem
¯
AlsosecureTop Tether if present
(/ page57)
Alternative securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Be suretoobserve:
R
If thefront passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both beforeand during thejourney, that thesta‐
tus of thefront passenger airbag is correct forthe
current situation(/page 45).
R
Notesonautomatic front passenger airbag shut‐
off(/page44).
Centerrear seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
¯
Also secureTop Tether if present
(/ page57)
54
Occupant safety
Activating/deactivatingthe seat belt's spe‐
cial seatbelt retractor
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathifa
seat belt is unfastened whilethe vehicle
is in motion
If theseat belt is released while thevehicle is
in motion, thechild restraint system is no
longer correctlysecured. The child seat
safetyfeatureisdeactivated and theseat
belt is drawninabitbythe inertia reel.
It is thereforenot possible to engagethe seat
belt again.
#
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to
road and trafficconditions.
#
Activatethe child seat safetyfeature
again and correctlysecure thechild
restraint system.
When enabled, thespecial seatbelt retractor
ensures that theseat belts of thefront
passenger seat and rear seatsdonot slacken
once thechild restraint system is secured.
The seat belts on thefollowing seats areequip‐
ped withaspecial seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
#
To install achild restraint system: when
installing achild restraint system, always
observe themanufacturer's installation and
operatinginstructions as well as theinforma‐
tion in this Operator's Manual.
#
Pull theseat belt smoothly from theseat belt
outlet.
#
Engage theseat belt tongueinthe seat belt
buckle.
#
To activatethe special seatbelt retractor:
pull theseat belt out fully and letthe inertia
reel retract it again.
When thespecial seatbelt retractor is activa‐
ted, youshould hear aratcheting sound.
#
Pushthe child restraint system down until
theseat belt sits tightly.
#
To deactivatethe special seatbelt retrac‐
tor: press therelease button of theseat belt
buckle.
#
Hold theseat belt tongueand guidebackto
theseat belt outlet.
Installing theLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on therear seat
InstallingaLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on therear seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathifthe
permissible gross mass of thechild and
child restraint system is exceeded
ForLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint sys‐
tems in whichthe child is secured using the
integrated seat belt in thechild restraint sys‐
tem, thepermissible gross mass of thechild
and child restraint system is 73 lb (33 kg).
If thechild and thechild restraint system
together weigh morethan 73 lb (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system
withintegrated seat belt does notoffer suffi‐
cient protection. An excessiveload maybe
placed on theLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child seat
attachments and thechild maynot be
Occupant safety
55
restrained in theevent of an accident, for
example.
#
If thechild and thechild restraint sys‐
temtogether weigh morethan 73 lb
(33 kg), useonlyaLATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system that secures the
child withthe vehicle seat belt.
#
Also securethe child restraint system
withthe TopTether belt, if available.
Alwayscomplywiththe information about the
mass of thechild restraint system:
R
In themanufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions forthe child restraint system
used
R
On alabel on thechild restraint system, if
present
Regularly checkthat thepermissible gross mass
of thechild and child restraint system is still
complied with.
When installing achild restraint system, observe
thefollowing:
O
Alwaysobserve thecorrect useofthe seats
and consider their suitability forattaching a
child restraint system.
O
Alwayscomply withthe manufacturer's
installation and operatinginstructions for
thechild restraint system used.
O
Makesurethat thechild's feet do nottouch
thefront seat. If necessary, move thefront
seat slightlyforwards.
® When installing aLATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system, also observe thefollow‐
ing:
O
When using aGroup 0/0+ babycar seat
and aGroup Irearward-facing child
restraint system on arear seat: adjust
thefront seat so that theseat does not
touchthe child restraint system.
O
When using aGroup Iforward-facing
child restraint system: remove thehead
restraint from therespectiveseat, if possi‐
ble. In addition, thebackrestofthe child
restraint system must, as faraspossible, lie
flat againstthe backrestofthe vehicle seat.
Afterthe child restraint system has been
removed, replace thehead restraintsimme‐
diatelyand adjustthem correctly.
O
Forcertain child restraint systems in weight
group II or III,theremay be restrictions on
themaximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with theroof.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be put
under strain between theroof and theseat
cushion and/or be installed facing the
wrong direction. Wherepossible, adjustthe
seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be put
under strain by thehead restraint.Adjust
thehead restraintsaccordingly.
56
Occupant safety
Beforeevery journey, makesurethat theLATCH-
type (ISOFIX)child restraint system is engaged
correctlyinbothmounting brackets in thevehi‐
cle.
*
NOTE Be carefulnot to damagethe seat
belt forthe center seat when installing
thechild restraint system
#
Makesurethat theseat belt is nottrap‐
ped.
#
Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Tilt the
reclining rear seat backrestbackslightly
beforethe LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child
restraint system is installed.
#
Remove upholstered lining 1.
#
Vehicles without reclining rear seats: Fold
upholsteredlining 1 upwards.
#
Turn thesupportonthe rear side of uphol‐
stered lining 1 by 90°.
Upholsteredlining 1 will remain folded
upwards.
#
Attach theLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child
restraint system to both mounting brackets
2 in thevehicle.
#
Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Return
thereclining rear seat backresttoanupright
position.
The reclining rear seat backrestmustbein
contact with thechild restraint system.
Securing aTop Tether
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathwhen
adjusting theseat afterinstalling achild
restraint system
Vehicles withelectrically adjustable rear
seats:
If youadjustthe seat afterinstalling achild
restraint system, thefollowing mayoccur:
R
theseat belt mayeither sit tooloose or
tootight
R
thechild restraint system can become
loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged
As aresult, thechild restraint system may
notbeable to provide theintended levelof
protection.
Occupant safety
57
#
Neveradjust theseat afterinstalling
thechild restraint system.
¯
If thechild restraint system is equipped
withaTop Tether belt:
The risk of injurycan be reduced by aTop
Tether.The TopTether belt facilitates an
additionalconnection between thechild
restraint system attached withLATCH-
type (ISOFIX)and thevehicle.
#
If necessary, slide thehead restraint 1
upwards (/ page111 ).
#
Fold up cover 2 of TopTether anchorage
3.
#
Install theLATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint
system withTop Tether.Complywiththe
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
Guide TopTether belt 4 under head
restraint 1 between thetwo head restraint
bars.
#
Hook TopTether hook 5 of TopTether belt
4 intoTop Tether anchorage 3 without
twisting.
#
Tension TopTether belt 4.Complywiththe
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
Fold down cover 2 of TopTether anchorage
3.
#
If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐
wards(/page111 ). Makesurethat youdo
58
Occupantsafety
notinterfere withthe correct routingofTop
Tether belt 4.
Securing thechild restraint system withthe
seat belt
Securing thechild restraint system withthe
seat belt on therear seat
When installing abelt-secured child restraint
system, observe thefollowing:
O
Alwayscomplywiththe manufacturer's
installation and operatinginstructions for
thechild restraint system used.
O
When using acategory0/0+ babycar
seat and acategoryIrearward-facing
child restraint system on arear seat:
adjustthe front seat so that theseat does
nottouchthe child restraint system.
O
When using acategoryIforward-facing
child restraint system: remove thehead
restraint from therespectiveseat, if possi‐
ble.
Afterthe child restraint system has been
removed, replace thehead restraintsimme‐
diatelyand adjustthem correctly.
O
The backrest of theforward-facingchild
restraint system must, as faraspossible, be
resting on theseat backrestofthe rear
seat.
O
Forcertain child restraint systems in weight
categoryIIorIII,theremay be restrictions
on themaximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with theroof.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be put
under strain between theroof and theseat
cushion and/or be installed facing the
wrong direction. Wherepossible, adjustthe
seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be put
under strain by thehead restraint.Adjust
thehead restraintsaccordingly.
O
Makesurethat thechild's feet do nottouch
thefront seat. If necessary, move thefront
seat slightlyforwards.
The seat beltsonthe following seats areequip‐
ped withachild seat safetyfeature:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
Vehicles with seat beltbuckle extenders:
when securing achild in achild restraint system
on arear seat, observe thefollowing notes:
R
Makesurethat theseat belt is fastened on
thechild restraint system according to the
manufacturer's installation instructions for
thechild restraint system.
R
Forchild restraint systems withabelt clamp:
engagethe seat belt tongueintothe seat belt
buckle beforeyou tighten theseat belt using
thebelt clamp.
When enabled, thechild seat safetyfeature
ensures that theseat belts of thefront
passenger seat and rear seatsdonot slacken
once thechild restraint system is secured
(/ page55).
Occupant safety
59
#
Install thechild restraint system.
The entirebase of thechild restraint system
mustalwaysrestonthe sitting surface of the
rear seat.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat theshoulder belt
strapiscorrectly routed from theseat belt
outletofthe vehicle to theshoulder belt
guide on thechild restraint system.
The shoulder belt strapmustberouted for‐
wardsand downwardsfromthe seat belt out‐
let.
Notesonrearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on thefront
passenger seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathfrom
using arearward-facing child restraint
system when thefront passenger front
airbag is enabled
If yousecureachild in arearward-facing
child restraint system on thefront passenger
seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi‐
cator lampisoff,the front passenger airbag
can deployinthe event of an accident.
The child could be struck by theairbag.
Alwaysensurethat thefront passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lampmustbelit.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATHorSERI‐
OUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.
Observe thespecific instructionsfor therear‐
ward-facing and forward-facingchild restraint
systems (/ page60).
Alwaysobserve thestatus of thefront passenger
airbag on thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indica‐
torlamp:
R
When using arearward-facing child restraint
system on thefront passenger seat, thefront
passenger airbag mustalwaysbedisabled.
This is onlythe case if thePASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF indicator lampislit continuously
(/ page45).
R
If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lampisoff,the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled. The front passenger airbag maydeploy
during an accident.
Securing thechild restraint system withthe
seat belt on thefront passenger seat
When installing abelt-secured child restraint
system on thefront passenger seat, always
observe thefollowing:
O
Observe thechild restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation and operatinginstruc‐
tions.
O
When using aforward-facingchild restraint
system in categoryI:remove thehead
restraint from therespectiveseat, if possi‐
ble.
Afterthe child restraint system has been
removed, replace thehead restraintsimme‐
diatelyand adjustthem correctly.
O
The backrestofthe forward-facingchild
restraint system must, as faraspossible, be
resting on theseat backrestofthe front
passenger seat.
O
Forcertain child restraint systems in weight
categoryIIorIII,theremay be restrictions
60
Occupant safety
on themaximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with theroof.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be ten‐
sioned betweenthe roof and theseat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing thewrong
direction.
O
The child restraint system mustnot be put
under strain by thehead restraints. Adjust
thehead restraintsaccordingly.
O
Neverplace objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
The seat belt on thefront passenger side is
equipped withaspecial seat belt retractor.
When enabled,the special seat belt retractor
functionensures that theseat belt does not
slackenonce thechild restraint system is
secured (/ page55).
#
Setthe front passenger seat as farbackas
possible and move theseat intothe highest
position if possible.
#
Fullyretract theseat cushion lengthadjust‐
ment.
#
Adjustthe seat cushion inclination so that
thefront edgeofthe seat cushion is in the
highestposition and therear edgeofthe
seat cushion is in thelowest position.
#
Setthe seat backresttothe mostvertical
position possible.
#
Install thechild restraint system.
The entirebase of thechild restraint system
mustalwaysrestonthe sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat theshoulder belt
strapiscorrectly routed from theseat belt
outletofthe vehicle to theshoulder belt
guide on thechild restraint system.
The shoulder belt strapmustberouted for‐
wardsand downwardsfromthe seat belt out‐
let.
#
If necessary, adjustthe seat belt outletand
thefront passenger seat accordingly.
Child safetylocks
Activating/deactivatingthe child safetylock
forthe rear doors
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children areleftunattendedinthe vehicle,
they could:
R
Opendoors,therebyendangering other
persons or road users.
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition,the children could also setthe
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
R
Releasing theparking brake.
R
Changing thetransmission position.
R
Startingthe vehicle.
Occupant safety
61
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
#
Keep thevehicle keyout of reachof
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatalinjurydue to
exposuretoextreme heat or coldinthe
vehicle
If people –particularly children –are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extendedperiodoftime, thereisarisk of
serious or evenfatal injury.
#
Neverleave anyone –particularly chil‐
dren –unattendedinthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children aretraveling in thevehicle, they
could,inparticular:
R
Open doors, therebyendangering other
persons or road users
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
Operatevehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample
#
Alwaysactivatethe child safetylocks
installed if children aretraveling in the
vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
Thereare child safetylocks forthe rear doors
and therear side windows.
The child safetylockonthe rear doorssecures
eachdoor separately. The doorscan no longer
be opened from theinside.
#
Press theleverindirection 1 (activate) or
2 (deactivate).
#
Makesurethat thechild safetylocks are
working properly.
62
Occupant safety
Activating/deactivatingthe child safetylock
forthe rear side windows
#
To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
Opening/closing theside windowinthe rear
passenger compartment is possible:
R
With indicator lamp 1 lit:via theswitch
on thedriver's door.
R
With indicator lamp 1 off: via theswitch
on thecorresponding rear door or driv‐
er'sdoor.
When thechild safetylockisactivated, thecon‐
trols in therear compartment aredisabledfor:
R
The rear side windows
R
The adjustmentofthe front passenger seat
from therear compartment
R
The roller sunblinds:
-
of therear side windows
-
of therear window
-
in theroof
Notesonpetsinthe vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals leftunsecured or unat‐
tendedinthe vehicle
If youleave animals in thevehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Thereby an animal may:
R
activatevehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample
R
switch systems on or offand endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals maybethrownaroundin
thevehicle in theevent of an accidentor
sudden steering and braking maneuver and
injurevehicle occupants in theprocess.
#
Neverleave animals in thevehicle unat‐
tended.
#
Alwayscorrectly secure animals while
driving, forexample usingasuitable
animal carrier.
Occupant safety
63
SmartKey
OverviewofSmartKey functions
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children areleftunattendedinthe vehicle,
they could:
R
Opendoors,therebyendangering other
persons or road users.
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition,the children could also setthe
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
R
Releasing theparking brake.
R
Changing thetransmission position.
R
Startingthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
#
Keep thevehicle keyout of reachof
children.
*
NOTE Damage to thekey caused by
magnetic fields
#
Keep thekey away from strong mag‐
netic fields.
%
The SmartKey mayvaryfromthe one shown
in thediagram, depending on thevehicle
equipment.
1
Locks
2
Indicator lamp
3
Unlocks
4
Opens/closes thetrunk lid
5
Panic alarm
%
If checklamp 2 does notlight up after
pressing the Ü or ß button, thebat‐
tery is weak or possiblydischarged. Replace
thebatteryassoon as possible.
Replace theSmartKey battery(/page66).
The SmartKey locks and unlocksthe following
components:
R
Doors
64
Opening and closing
R
Fuel filler flap
R
Trunk lid
If thevehicle is notopened within approximately
40 seconds afterunlocking, it locks again. Anti-
theftprotection is activated again.
Do notkeep theSmartKey together withelec‐
tronic devices or metalobjects. This can affect
theSmartKey's functionality.
Do notkeep theSmartKey in thetemperature-
controlled cup holder.Otherwise, theSmartKey
will notbereliably detected.
Activating/deactivatingthe acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Acoustic Lock
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Activating/deactivatingthe panicalarm
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched off.
%
The panic alarmfunction is onlyavailable in
certain countries.
#
To activate: press button 1 forapprox‐
imately one second.
Avisual and audiblealarmistriggered.
#
To deactivate: brieflypress button 1 again.
or
#
Press thestart/stopbutton on thecockpit
(the SmartKey is inside thevehicle).
Changing theunlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of theSmartKey:
R
Central unlocking
R
Unlockingthe driver's door and fuel filler flap
#
To switchbetween settings: press the
Ü and ß buttonssimultaneouslyfor
approximatelysix seconds until theindicator
lampflashes twice.
Options if theunlocking function forthe driver's
door and fuel filler flap has been selected:
R
To unlock thevehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
R
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if youtouch
theinner surface of thedoor handle on the
driver's door,onlythe driver's door and fuel
filler flap areunlocked.
Deactivating theSmartKeyfunctions
If youdonot use thevehicle or aSmartKey for
an extendedperiodoftime, youcan reduce the
energy consumption of therespectiveSmartKey.
To do so, deactivatethe SmartKey functions.
Opening and closing
65
#
To deactivate: press the ß button on the
SmartKey twice in quicksuccession.
The SmartKey indicator lampflashes twice
briefly and lightsuponce.
#
To activate: press anybutton on theSmart‐
Key.
%
When thevehicle is startedwiththe Smart‐
Keyinthe markedspace of thecenter con‐
sole, theSmartKey functions areautomati‐
cally activated (/ page173).
Removing/insertingthe emergency key
#
To remove: press release knob 1.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
#
Pull out emergency key 2 until it engagesin
theintermediateposition.
#
Press release knob 1 again and fully
remove emergency key 2.
#
To insert: press release knob 1.
#
Insertemergency key 2 to theintermediate
position or fullyuntil it engages.
%
Youcan use theintermediateposition of
emergency key 2 to attachthe SmartKey to
akey ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
&
DANGER Serious damagetohealth
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosivesub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries maycause
serious damagetohealth.
Thereisarisk of fatalinjury.
#
Keep batteries out of thereachofchil‐
dren.
#
If batteries areswallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTALNOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them withthe household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentallyresponsiblemanner.
Take dischargedbatteries to aqualified
specialistworkshop or to acollection
pointfor used batteries.
Requirements:
66
Openingand closing
R
YourequireaCR20323Vcell battery.
Mercedes-Benzrecommends that youhave the
batteryreplaced at aqualified specialistwork‐
shop.
#
Remove theemergency key(/page66).
#
Press release knob 2 down fullyand slide
cover 1 in thedirection of thearrow.
#
Fold out cover 1 in thedirection of the
arrow and remove.
#
Remove batterycompartment 3 and take
out thedischargedbattery.
#
Insertthe newbatteryintobatterycompart‐
ment 3.Observe thepositivepole marking
in thebatterycompartmentand on thebat‐
tery when doingthis.
#
Push in batterycompartment 3.
#
Re-attachcover 1 and push it until it
engages.
Opening and closing
67
Doors
Unlocking and opening doorsfromthe inside
#
To unlock and open afront door: pulldoor
handle 2.
Locking pin 1 pops up whenthe door is
unlocked.
#
To unlock arear door: pull therear door
handle.
The locking pin pops up when therear door
is unlocked.
#
To open arear door: pull therear door han‐
dle again.
Locking/unlocking thevehicle centrallyfrom
theinside
#
To unlock: press button 1.
#
To lock: press button 2.
This does notlockorunlockthe fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is notunlocked:
R
If youhave lockedthe vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R
If youhavelockedthe vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking thevehicle withKEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is outside thevehicle.
R
The distance betweenthe SmartKey and the
vehicle does notexceed 3ft(1m).
R
The driver's door and thedoor at whichthe
door handle is used areclosed.
Openingand closing
69
#
To unlock thevehicle: touchthe inner sur‐
face of thedoor handle.
#
To lockthe vehicle: touchsensor surface
1 or 2.
#
Convenience closing: touchrecessed sen‐
sor surface 2 foranextendedperiod.
%
Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 81).
If youopen thetrunk lid from outside, thetrunk
lid is automaticallyunlocked.
70
Openingand closing
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Youcan no longerlockorunlockthe
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Possible causes:
R
The SmartKey functions have been deactivated (/ page65).
R
The SmartKey batteryisweak or discharged.
R
Thereisinterference from apowerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Activatethe SmartKey functions (/ page65).
#
Check thebatteryusing theindicator lampand replace if necessary(/page66).
#
Use theemergency keytounlock or lockthe vehicle (/ page66).
#
Have thevehicle and SmartKey checkedataqualified specialistworkshop.
Switching theautomatic locking feature
on/off
The vehicle is lockedautomatically when the
ignition is switched on and thewheels areturn‐
ing faster than walkingpace.
Opening and closing
71
#
To deactivate: press and holdbutton 1 for
approximatelyfiveseconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#
To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximatelyfiveseconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
In thefollowing situations, thereisadanger of
being lockedout when thefunction is activated:
R
The vehicle is being towed/pushed.
R
The vehicle is being tested on adynamome‐
ter.
Powerclosing function
If youpush thedoor intothe locktothe first
detent position, thepowerclosing function will
automatically pullthe door intothe lock.
Locking/unlocking thedriver'sdoor withthe
emergency key
%
If youwish to lockthe vehicle entirely using
theemergency key, firstpress thebutton for
lockingfromthe inside while thedriver's
door is open. Then proceed to lockthe driv‐
er's door using theemergency key.
#
Insertthe emergency keyasfar as it will go
into opening 1 in thecover.
#
Pull and hold thedoor handle.
#
Pull thecover on theemergency keyas
straight as possible away from thevehicle
until it releases.
#
Release thedoor handle.
72
Opening and closing
#
Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1.
#
Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey.
#
Foratrunk lid stopped in an intermediate
position, pull it upwards and release it as
soon as it starts to open.
With thetrunk lid opening height restriction
activated, manuallypull thestopped trunk lid
upwards.
If an object obstructs thetrunk lid during the
automatic opening process, obstruction detec‐
tion will stop thetrunk lid. The obstruction
detection function is only an aidand is nota
substitute foryour attentiveness.
Closing thetrunk lid
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in thevehicle
If objects, luggageorloads arenot secured
or notsecured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip overorbethrownaroundand therebyhit
vehicle occupants.
Thereisarisk of injury,particularly in the
event of sudden braking or asudden change
in direction.
#
Alwaysstowobjectsinsuchaway that
they cannotbethrownaround.
#
Beforethe journey, secureobjects, lug‐
gage or loads againstslipping or tipping
over.
Observe thenotes on loading thevehicle.
Youhave thefollowing options forclosing
the trunk lid:
#
Pull thetrunk lid downwardsusing thehan‐
dle recess and push it closed.
%
If youlightly push thetrunk lid closed, the
powerclosing function willautomatically pull
thetrunk lid intothe lock.
Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during automatic closing of thetrunk lid
Partsofthe body could become trapped dur‐
ing automatic closing of thetrunk lid. More‐
over, people, e.g. children, maybestanding
in theclosing area or mayenter theclosing
area during theclosing process.
#
Makesurethat nobody is in thevicinity
of theclosing area during theclosing
process.
#
Use one of thefollowing options to stop
theclosing process:
R
Press the p button on the
SmartKey.
R
Press or pull theremote operating
switchonthe driver's door.
R
Press theclosing or locking button
on thetrunk lid.
R
Pull thetrunk lid handle.
#
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is
also possible to stop theclosing process by
74
Opening and closing
(withthe SmartKey in thevicinityofthe vehi‐
cle).
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
#
With thetrunk lid completely opened,makea
kicking movement withyour foot belowthe
bumper (/ page76).
Trunk lid automatic reversing function
If an objectobstructsthe trunk lid during the
automatic closingprocess, thetrunk lid will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing function is onlyanaid and is notasubstitute
foryour attentiveness.
#
During theclosing process, makesurethat
no body parts areinthe closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite thereversing function
The reversing function does notreact:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
R
overthe last Ó in (8 mm) of theclosing
path.
In these situationsinparticular,the reversing
function cannotprevent someone being trap‐
ped.
#
Whenclosing, make surethat no body
parts areinthe closing area.
#
If someone is trapped, use one of the
following options:
R
Press the p button on the
SmartKey.
R
Press theremote operating switch
on thedriver's door.
R
Press theclosing or locking button
on thetrunk lid.
R
Pull thetrunk lid handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESSyou can open, close
or interrupt trunk lidmovement by performing a
kickingmovement underthe rear bumper.
The kickingmovement triggersthe opening or
closing process alternately.
Observe thenotes when opening (/ page73)
and closing(/page74) thetrunk lid.
76
Opening and closing
%
Awarning tone sounds whilethe trunk lid is
opening or closing.
&
WARNING Risk of burnscaused by ahot
exhaustsystem
The vehicle exhaustsystemcan become very
hot. If youuse HANDS-FREEACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touchingthe exhaust
system.
#
Alwaysensurethat youonly make a
kicking movement within thedetection
rangeofthe sensors.
*
NOTE Damage to thevehicle caused by
unintentionally opening thetrunk lid
R
When using an automatic car wash
R
When using ahigh pressurecleaner
#
DeactivateKEYLESS-GO or makesure
that theSmartKey located is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from thevehicle in
suchsituations.
When making thekicking movement, makesure
that your feet arefirmlyonthe ground, other‐
wise youcould lose your balance, e.g.onice.
Observe thefollowing notes:
R
The SmartKey is behindthe vehicle.
R
Stand at least12in(30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing thekicking move‐
ment.
R
Do notcome intocontact withthe bumper
while making thekicking movement.
R
Do notcarry out thekicking movement too
slowly.
R
The kicking movement mustbetowards the
vehicle and backagain.
1
Detection rangeofthe sensors
If severalconsecutivekickingmovements are
notsuccessful, wait tenseconds.
System limits
The system maybeimpaired or maynot function
in thefollowing cases:
R
The area around thesensor is dirty,e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
R
The kicking movement is made using apros‐
thetic leg.
Opening and closing
77
The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten‐
tionally, in thefollowing situations:
R
If aperson's arms or legs aremovinginthe
sensor detection range, e.g.whenpolishing
thevehicle or picking up objects.
R
If objectsare movedorplaced behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
R
If clamping straps, tarpsorother coverings
arepulledoverthe bumper.
R
If aprotectivemat withalengthreaching
overthe trunk sill down intothe detection
rangeofthe sensorsisused.
R
If theprotectivemat is notsecured correctly.
R
Whenworking on thetrailer coupling, trailers
or rear bicycle racks.
DeactivateKEYLESS-GO (/ page65) or do not
carry theSmartKey about your person in such
situations.
Switching separatetrunk locking on/off
If youcentrallyunlock thevehicle while separate
locking is activated, thetrunk will remain locked.
#
To switchon: slide theswitchtoposition
2.
#
To switchoff: slide theswitchtoposition
1.
%
If an accidenthas been detected, thetrunk
will unlockevenifseparatelockingis
switched on.
Unlocking thetrunk from insidewiththe
emergency release
Requirements:
R
The 12 Vvehicle batteryisconnected and
charged.
#
Press emergency release button 1 briefly.
The trunk lid will unlockand open.
78
Opening and closing
Unlocking thetrunk lid using theemergency
key
#
Take theemergency keyout of theSmartKey
(/ page66).
#
Insertthe emergency keyintothe trunk lock
as farasitwillgo.
#
Turn theemergency keycounter-clockwise
from position 1 to position 2.
#
Turn theemergency keybacktoposition 1
and remove it.
%
If youuse theemergency keytounlock and
open thetrunk lid, theanti-theftalarmsys
temwillbetriggered.
Activating/deactivatingthe trunk lidopening
height restriction
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Trunk Lid Restriction
This function allows youtoavoid bumping the
trunk lidonalow garage ceiling, forexample.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Side windows
Opening and closing theside windows
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening asidewindow
Whenopening asidewindow, parts of the
body could be drawninorbecome trapped
betweenthe side windowand windowframe.
#
When opening,makesurethat nobody
is touchingthe side window.
#
If someone is trapped, release thebut‐
tonimmediately or pull it in orderto
closethe side windowagain.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
whenclosing asidewindow
Whenclosing asidewindow, body parts
could be trapped in theclosing area in the
process.
#
When closing, makesurethat no body
parts areinthe closing area.
Opening and closing
79
#
If someone is trapped, release thebut‐
tonimmediately or pressthe button in
order to reopen theside window.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
whenchildren operate theside windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
atethe side windows,particularly when unat‐
tended.
#
Activatethe child safetylockfor the
rear side windows.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The powersupply or theignition is switched
on.
1
Closes
2
Opens
The buttons on thedriver's door take prece‐
dence.
#
To startautomatic operation: press the
W button beyond thepoint of resistance
or pull and release it.
#
To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pullthe W button again.
When thevehicle is switched off, theside win‐
dows can continuebeing operated.
This function is available foraround four minutes
or until afront door is opened.
%
Vehicles with electric roller sunblindson
rear doorsonthe leftand right: The but‐
tons forthe rear side windows also open and
close theroller sunblinds(/page91).
Automatic reversing function of theside win‐
dows
If an object blocks aside window during the
closing process, theside windowwill open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is onlyanaid and is notasubstitutefor your
attentiveness.
#
During theclosing process, makesurethat
no body parts areinthe closing area.
80
Opening and closing
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite therebeing reversing protection
on theside window
The reversing function does notreact:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
During resetting
This means that thereversefunction cannot
prevent someonefrombecomingtrapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, makesurethat no body
parts areinthe closing area.
#
If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open theside window
again.
Convenience opening (ventilating thevehicle
beforestarting ajourney)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening asidewindow
Whenopening asidewindow, parts of the
body could be drawninorbecome trapped
betweenthe side windowand windowframe.
#
When opening,makesurethat nobody
is touchingthe side window.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyif
somebody becomes trapped.
#
Press and hold the Ü button on the
SmartKey.
The following functionsare performed:
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
The side windows areopened.
R
The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.
R
The seat ventilation of thedriver's seat is
switched on.
%
If theroller sunblindsofthe panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof areclosed, theroller sunblinds
areopened first.
%
If theroller sunblindsofthe rear doorsare
closed, theroller sunblindsare opened first.
#
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the Ü button.
#
To continue convenience opening: press
and hold the Ü button again.
Convenience closing (closing thevehicle
from outside)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
Whenthe convenience closing featureis
operating, parts of thebody could become
trapped in theclosing area of theside win‐
dowand thesliding sunroof.
#
Observe thecomplete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
#
Whenclosing, make surethat no body
parts areinthe closing area.
Opening and closing
81
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
If theside windowisobstructed again and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediatelyafter this, pull thecorresponding button again until theside windowhas closed, and hold
thebutton foratleast one moresecond (follow-up adjustment).
The side window is closed without theautomatic reversing function.
The side windows cannotbeopened or
closed using theconvenience opening
feature.
The SmartKey batteryisweak or discharged.
#
Checkthe batteryusing theindicator lampand replace it if necessary(/page66).
Sliding sunroof
Opening/closing thesliding sunroof
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing thesliding
sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the
body could get caught in thesweep of the
sliding sunroof.
#
When opening or closing, makesure
that no body parts areinthe sweep.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyif
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press thebutton in anydirection during
theautomatic opening/closingprocess.
The opening/closingprocess is stop‐
ped.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
thesliding sunroof is operated by chil‐
dren
Children operatingthe sliding sunroof could
get caught in themoving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
Opening and closing
83
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing theroller sun
blind
When opening or closing, makesurethat no
body parts become trapped between the
roller sun blind and frame or thesliding sun‐
roof.
#
When opening or closing, makesure
that no body parts areinthe sweep of
theroller sun blind.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyif
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press thebutton in anydirection during
theautomatic opening/closingprocess.
The opening/closingprocess is stop‐
ped.
*
NOTE Malfunctioncaused by snowand
ice
Snowand ice maylead to amalfunctionof
thesliding sunroof.
#
Onlyopen thesliding sunroof if it is free
of snowand ice.
*
NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from thesliding sun‐
roof maydamagethe sealing strips.
#
Do notallowanything to protrude from
thesliding sunroof.
Requirements:
R
The sliding sunroof can be operated only
when theroller sunblind is open
R
The roller sunblindcan be operatedonly
when thesliding sunroof is closed
%
The term "slidingsunroof" refers to thepan‐
oramic sliding sunroof.
1
Raises
2
Opens
3
Closes/lowers
Use the 3 button to operatethe sliding sun‐
roof and thefront roller sunblind.
#
To startautomatic operation: press/pull
the 3 button beyond thepoint of resist‐
ance.
84
Opening and closing
#
To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pullthe 3 button again.
Restriction: automatic operation forraising is
available only when thesliding sunroof is closed
or raised.
Operating therear roller sunblind from the
front
#
To open or close: press button 1.
#
To stop: press button 1 again.
Youmustfirst open or close therear roller sun‐
blind fullybeforeyou can move it in theother
direction.
Operating therear roller sunblind from the
rear passenger compartment
#
To open/closemanually: push or pull but‐
ton 1 to thepoint of resistance and holdit
untilthe roller sunblindhas reached the
desired position.
#
To open/closefully: push or pull button 1
beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.
Automatic reversing featureofthe sliding
sunroof
If an object is obstructing thesliding sunroof
during theclosing process, thesliding sunroof
will open again automatically. The automatic
reversing featureisonly an aid and is notasub‐
stitutefor your attentiveness.
#
During theclosing process, makesurethat
no body parts areinthe closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
The reversefunction does notreact:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
during thelast1/6 in (4 mm) of travel
during closing
Openingand closing
85
R
during resetting
R
when thesliding sunroof is closed again
manuallyimmediately afterautomatic
reversing
This meansthat thereversefunction cannot
prevent someonefrombecomingtrapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, makesurethat no body
parts areinthe closing area.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyif
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press thebutton in anydirection during
theautomatic closing process.
The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing featureofthe roller sun‐
blind
If an objectisobstructing theroller sunblind dur‐
ing theclosing process, theroller sunblind will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing featureisonly an aid and is notasubstitute
foryour attentiveness.
#
When closing theroller sunblind,makesure
that no body parts areinthe rangeofmove‐
ment.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing feature
In particular,the reversing featuredoes not
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
This means that thereversing featurecannot
prevent entrapment in these situations.
#
When closing theroller sunblind,make
surethat no body parts areinthe range
of movement.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyif
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press thebutton in anydirection during
theautomatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
Automatic functionsofthe sliding sunroof
%
The term "slidingsunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the 3 button, youcan
interrupt theautomatic functions: "Rain closing
function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐
ing".
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with apanoramic sliding sunroof: If
it starts to rain, theraised slidingsunroof is
automaticallyloweredwhile thevehicle is in
motion.
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with apanoramic sliding sunroof: If
thesliding sunroof is raised at therear,itis
automaticallyloweredslightlyathigher speeds.
At lowspeeds, it is raised again automatically.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
matic lowering of thesliding sunroof
At high speeds theraised slidingsunroof
automaticallylowersslightlyatthe rear.
This couldtrapyou or other persons.
86
Opening and closing
#
Makesurethat nobody reaches intothe
sweep of thesliding sunroof whilstthe
vehicle is in motion.
#
If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
push thesliding sunroof button for‐
wardsorbackwards.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
MAGIC SKY CONTROL function
MAGIC SKY CONTROL is afunction withwhich
youcan changethe transparency of thepanor‐
amic sliding sunroof. Youcan choose to have the
front and rear elementsofthe panoramic sliding
sunroof darkened or transparent.
&
DANGER Risk of fatalinjurycaused by
touchingelectrical component parts of
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If theroof lining is damaged or
removed, electriccomponent partswill be
exposed.
If youtouchthese component parts, you
could get an electric shock.
#
Neverremove theroof lining.
#
If theroof lining is damaged, never
touchthe electrical component parts
behind it.
#
Alwayshave work on MAGIC SKY CON‐
TROL carried out at aqualified special‐
istworkshop.
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
Operating thefront and rear elements from
thefront
#
Press button 1.
If therear element is in adifferent statefrom
thefront element:the transparency of the
front element willchange.
Opening and closing
87
If both elementsare in thesame state: the
transparency of both elementswill change.
%
When youswitch offthe powersupply,both
elementswill darkenautomatically.
When youswitch on thepower supply or the
ignition, both elementswill returntothe
statetheywereinbeforethe powersupply
wasswitched off.
Operating therear element from therear
passenger compartment
#
If theroller sunblind is fullyclosed: pull but‐
ton 1.
The roller sunblindwill open.The transpar‐
encyofthe rear element will then change.
#
If theroller sunblind is fullyopened: press
button 1.
The transparencyofthe rear element will
change.
%
The rear element will darkenautomatically if
youclose therear roller sunblind.
Problems withthe sliding sunroof
%
The term "slidingsunroof" refers to thepan‐
orama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed
and youcannotsee thecause.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatalinjurybyclosing thesliding sunroof again
If youclose thesliding sunroof again immediatelyafter it has been blockedorreset, thesliding sunroof
closes withincreased or maximum force.
88
Openingand closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
The reversing featureisthen notactive. Partsofthe body could become trapped in theclosing area in
theprocess.
#
Makesurethat no parts of thebody areinthe closing area.
#
Release thebutton immediatelyifsomebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press thebutton in anydirection during theautomatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
If thesliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
#
Immediatelyafter automaticreversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to thepoint of resist‐
ance until thesliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed withincreased force.
If thesliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
#
Repeat thepreviousstep.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again withincreased force.
The sliding sunroof or thefront roller
sunblinddoes notmove smoothly.
#
Pull the 3 button down repeatedly to thepoint of resistance untilthe sliding sunroof is fully closed.
#
Pull the 3 button foranother second.
#
Pull and hold the 3 button down until thefront roller sunblindisfullyclosed.
#
Pull the 3 button foranother second.
Openingand closing
89
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
#
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close thesliding sunroof.
The rear roller sunblinddoes notmove
smoothly.
#
Pull and hold button 1 down repeatedlyuntil therear roller sunblindisfullyclosed.
#
Pull button 1 foranother second.
#
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close therear roller sunblind.
90
Opening and closing
Roller sun blinds
Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds
on therear passenger compartment side
windows
The roller sunblinds forthe rear passenger com‐
partment side windows can be operatedwiththe
buttons forthe side windows.
1
Rear leftside window/roller sunblind
2
Rear right side window/roller sunblind
#
To close fully: pull thecorresponding button
when theside windowisclosed or is in the
process of closing.
#
To open fully: press thecorresponding but‐
ton.
Extending or retracting the rear-window
roller sunblind
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
extending or retracting theroller sun
blind
Body parts could become entrapped in the
sweep of theroller sun blind when it is being
extendedorretracted.
#
Make surethat no body parts areinthe
sweep of theroller sun blind when it is
being extendedorretracted.
#
If someone becomestrapped,briefly
pressthe button again.
The opening or closing process is
briefly stopped. The roller sun blind
then returns to its startingposition.
Extending or retracting from the driver's
seat
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects
#
Makesurethat theroller sun blind can
move freely.
Opening and closing
91
#
Press button 1.
%
Dependingonthe model, button 1 is loca‐
tedonthe door control panel on thedriver's
side.
Extending or retracting from the rear
passenger compartment
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects
#
Makesurethat theroller sun blind can
move freely.
#
To extend: pull switch 1.
#
To retract: press switch 1.
Whenthe child safetylockfor therear passenger
compartment side windows is activated, switch
1 cannotbeoperated.
Anti-theftprotection
Function of theimmobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being
startedwithout thecorrect SmartKey.
The immobilizer is automaticallyactivated when
theignition is switched offand deactivated when
theignition is switched on.
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystakethe Smart‐
Keywithyou and lockthe vehicle. Anyone can
startthe engine if avalid SmartKey has been left
inside thevehicle.
%
In theevent theengine cannot be started
(yet thevehicle’s batteryischarged), the
system is notoperational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA)or
1-800-387-0100(in Canada).
92
Openingand closing
ATA (anti-theftalarm system)
Function of theATA system
If theATA system is armed, avisual and audible
alarmistriggered in thefollowing situations:
R
When adoor is opened
R
When thetrunk lid is opened
R
When thehood is opened
R
When theinterior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page94)
R
When thetow-awayalarmistriggered
(/ page94)
TheATA system is armed automaticallyafter
approximatelyten seconds in thefollowing situa‐
tions:
R
Afterlocking thevehicle withthe SmartKey
R
Afterlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when theATA system
is armed.
The ATAsystem is deactivated automaticallyin
thefollowing situations:
R
Afterunlocking thevehicle withthe Smart‐
Key
R
Afterunlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
Afterpressing thestart/stopbutton withthe
SmartKeyinthe stowagecompartment
(/ page173)
%
When theMercedes‑Benz emergency call
system is activeand thealarmstays on for
morethan 30 seconds, amessageisauto‐
maticallysenttothe Customer Assistance
Center (/ page 360).
%
In thecase of severe batterydischarging,
theanti-theftalarmsystemisautomatically
deactivated to facilitatethe next engine
start.
Deactivating theATA
#
Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
SmartKey.
or
#
Press thestart/stopbutton withthe Smart‐
Keyinthe markedspace (/ page173)
Deactivating thealarm using KEYLESS-GO
#
Grasp theoutside door handle withthe
SmartKeyoutside thevehicle.
Opening and closing
93
Function of thetow-awayalarm
%
This function maynot be available in all
countries.
An audible and visual alarmistriggered if an
alterationtoyourvehicle's angle of inclinationis
detected while thetow-awayalarmisarmed.
The tow-away alarmisautomaticallyarmed after
approximately60seconds:
R
Afterlocking thevehicle withthe SmartKey
R
Afterlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarmisonly armed when thefol‐
lowing componentsare closed:
R
The doors
R
The trunk lid
The tow-away alarmisautomaticallydeactiva‐
ted:
R
Afterpressing the Ü or p button on
theSmartKey
R
Afterpressing thestart/stopbutton withthe
SmartKeyinthe markedspace (/ page173)
R
Afterunlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Informationondetecting damageonaparked
vehicle (/ page199).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Multimediasystem:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Tow-away Protection
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
The tow-away alarmisarmed again in thefollow‐
ing cases:
R
The vehicle is unlockedagain.
R
Adoor is opened.
R
The vehicle is lockedagain.
Function of theinterior motion sensor
%
This function maynot be available in all
countries.
When theinterior motion sensor is armed, avis‐
ual and audible alarmistriggered if movement is
detected in thevehicle interior.
The interior motion sensor is armed automati‐
cally afterapproximately tenseconds:
R
Afterlocking thevehicle withthe SmartKey
R
Afterlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is onlyarmed when
thefollowing componentsare closed:
R
The doors
R
The trunk lid
The interior motion sensor is automaticallydeac‐
tivated:
R
Afterpressing the Ü or p button on
theSmartKey
R
Afterpressing thestart/stopbutton withthe
SmartKeyinthe stowagecompartment
(/ page173)
R
Afterunlocking thevehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
94
Opening and closing
The following situations can lead to afalse
alarm:
R
Movingobjectssuchasmascotsinthe vehi‐
cle interior
R
When theside windowisopen
R
When thepanoramic sliding sunroof is open
Activating/deactivatingthe interior motion
sensor
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Interior Motion Sensor
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
The interior motion sensor is activated again in
thefollowing cases:
R
The vehicle is unlockedagain.
R
Adoor is opened.
R
The vehicle is lockedagain.
Openingand closing
95
Notesonthe correct driver'sseat position
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
thevehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if youadjustthe driver's seat, thehead
restraint,the steering wheel or themirror
while thevehicle is in motion
R
if youfastenyour seat belt whilethe vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Beforestarting theengine: adjustthe
driver's seat, thehead restraint,the
steering wheel or themirrorand fasten
your seat belt.
Ensurethe following when adjustingsteering
wheel 1,seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R
Youare sittingasfar away from thedriver's
airbag as possible, taking thefollowing
points intoconsideration.
R
Youare sittinginanupright position
R
Your thighs areslightly supportedbythe seat
cushion
R
Your legs arenot fullyextendedand youcan
depress thepedals properly
R
The backofyour head is supportedateye
levelbythe center of thehead restraint
R
Youcan hold thesteering wheel withyour
arms slightly bent
R
Youcan move your legs freely
R
Youcan see all thedisplays on theinstru‐
ment clusterclearly
R
Youhave agood overviewofthe traffic con‐
ditions
R
Your seat belt sitssnuglyagainstyour body
and passes across thecenter of your shoul‐
der and across your hips in thepelvic area
Seats
Adjustingthe frontseatelectrically
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
theseats areadjustedbychildren
Childrencould becometrapped if they adjust
theseats, particularly when unattended.
96
Seats and stowing
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
The seats can be adjustedwhen theignition is
switched off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
whenadjusting theseats
When youadjustaseat,you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#
When adjustingaseat, makesurethat
no one has anybody parts in thesweep
of theseat.
Observe thesafetynotes on "Airbags"and "Chil‐
dren in thevehicle".
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
thevehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if youadjustthe driver's seat, thehead
restraint,the steering wheel or themirror
while thevehicle is in motion
R
if youfastenyour seat belt whilethe vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Beforestarting theengine: adjustthe
driver's seat, thehead restraint,the
steering wheel or themirrorand fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
theseat height is adjustedcarelessly
If youadjustthe seat height carelessly,you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and therebyinjured.
Children in particular could accidentally
press theelectrical seat adjustmentbuttons
and become trapped.
#
While moving theseats, makesurethat
hands or other body parts do notget
under theleverassembly of theseat
adjustmentsystem.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraintswhichare notinstalled or are
adjustedincorrectly
If headrestraints arenot installed or are
adjustedincorrectly,the head restraintscan‐
notprovide protection as intended.
Thereisanincreased risk of injuryinthe
head and neckarea, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#
Alwaysdrive withthe head restraints
installed.
#
Beforedrivingoff,makesurefor every
vehicle occupant that thecenter of the
head restraint supports thebackofthe
head at about eyelevel.
Seatsand stowing
97
Do notinterchangethe head restraintsofthe
front and rear seats. Otherwise, youwill notbe
able to adjustthe height and angle of thehead
restraintscorrectly.
Adjustthe head restraint fore-and-aftposition so
that it is as close as possible to thebackofyour
head.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrect seatposition
The seatbeltdoesnot offerthe intended
levelofprotection if youhave notmovedthe
seat backresttoanalmostvertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
youcould slide underneaththe seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neckinjuries, forexam‐
ple.
#
Adjustthe seat properly beforebegin‐
ning your journey.
#
Alwaysensurethat theseat backrestis
in an almostvertical position and that
theshoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across thecenter of your shoul‐
der.
*
NOTE Damage to theseats when moving
theseats back
The seats maybedamaged by objectswhen
moving theseats back.
#
When moving theseats back, make
surethat thereare no objects in the
footwell, under or behindthe seats.
1
Head restraint height/fore-and-aftposition
(vehicleswithanEASYADJUSTluxuryhead
restraint)
2
Head restraint height
3
Seat height
4
Seat cushioninclination
5
Seat cushionlength
98
Seatsand stowing
6
Seatfore-and-aftposition
7
Seatbackrestinclination
#
Save thesettings withthe memoryfunction
(/ page120).
%
The headrestraint height will be adjusted
automaticallywhen youadjustthe seat
height or theseat fore-and-aftposition.
%
Vehicles with EASY ADJUSTluxuryhead
restraints: The fore-and-aftposition of the
head restraint will be pre-adjustedautomati‐
cally when youadjustthe backrestangle.
Adjustingthe frontpassengerseatelectri
callyfromthe driver'sseat
Requirements:
R
Forselecting thefront passenger seat:the
powersupply is switched on
Youcan call up thefollowing functionsfor the
front passenger seat:
R
Seatadjustment
R
Seatheating
R
Seatventilation
R
Memoryfunction
#
To select thefront passenger seat: press
button 1.
When theindicator lamplights up, thefront
passenger seat is selected.
#
Adjustthe front passenger seat using the
buttons on thedriver's side door control
panel.
Adjustingthe frontpassengerseatelectri
callyfromthe rear passengercompartment
Requirements:
R
Forselecting thefront passenger seat:the
powersupply is switched on
Seats and stowing
99
Vehicles withelectrically adjustable outer seats
1
Selectsthe front passenger seat
2
Head restraint height
3
Seat backrestinclination
4
Seat height
5
Seat fore-and-aftposition
Vehicles withanEASYADJUSTluxuryhead restraint
1
Selects thefront passenger seat
2
Head restraint fore-and-aftposition
3
Headrestraint height
4
Seat backrestinclination
5
Seat height
6
Seat fore-and-aftposition
Vehicles withseat forchauffeur modeand long
wheelbase
1
Selectsthe front passenger seat
2
Head restraint fore-and-aftposition
3
Headrestraint height
4
Seat backrestinclination
5
Seat height
6
Footrest
7
Seatfore-and-aftposition
100
Seats and stowing
The footrest can be adjustedonlywhen one of
thefollowing conditionshas been fulfilled:
R
The front passengerseat has been moved
fully forward
R
The frontpassenger seat is in theposition for
chauffeur mode
#
Adjustthe rear seat (/ page101).
#
Adjustthe reclining rear seat (/ page102).
#
To select thefront passenger seat: press
button 1.
When theindicator lamplights up, thefront
passenger seat is selected.
#
Adjustthe front passenger seat using the
buttons on thedoor control panel in therear
passenger compartment.
%
Mercedes-Maybachvehicles: it is suffi‐
cient to adjustthe footrest if thefront
passenger seat is movedintothe center set‐
ting area.
%
Youcan use therear-compartment child
safetylocktodisable this function
(/ page63).
Adjustingthe rear seats electrically
&
WARNING Risk of injury or deathdue to
incorrect seatposition
The seatbeltdoesnot offerthe intended
levelofprotection if youhave notmovedthe
seat backresttoanalmostvertical position.
When braking or in theevent of an accident,
youcould slide underneaththe seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neckinjuries, forexam‐
ple.
#
Adjustthe seat properly beforebegin‐
ning your journey.
#
Alwaysensurethat theseat backrestis
in an almostvertical position and that
theshoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across thecenter of your shoul‐
der.
Youcan electricallyadjustonly theouter seats in
therear passenger compartment.
1
Height/fore-and-aftposition of thehead
restraint (vehicleswithactivemulticontour
seat)
2
Head restraint height
3
Seat backrestinclination
4
Combined seat cushioninclination and
length
Seatsand stowing
101
#
Save thesettings withthe memoryfunction
(/ page121).
Adjustingareclining rear seat electrically
The reclining rear seat is available in long-wheel‐
base vehicles equipped with"Executiveseats".
On vehicles without areclining rear seat,the
button forsetting theangle and fore-and-aft
position of theleg rest has no function.
Long-wheelbase vehicles: thereclining rear
seat is on thefront passenger side.
Mercedes-Maybachvehicles: thereclining rear
seatsare on thedriver's and front passenger
sides.
1
Height/fore-and-aftposition of thehead
restraint (vehicleswithactivemulticontour
seat)
2
Head restraint height
3
Seat backrestinclination
4
Combined seat cushioninclination and
length
5
Combined seat cushioninclination and
length
6
Angleofthe leg rest
7
Fore-and-aftposition of theleg rest
#
Save thesettings withthe memoryfunction
(/ page121).
%
The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If
this is thecase, fold up theleg rest and
engageit.
%
Vehicles withalong wheelbase and arear
compartment Chauffeur/Rear Seat Memory
Packagealso have afootrest. This is located
on thelowerpartofthe front passenger seat
backrest(/page99).
Setting thefullyreclined position
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
This function is available in long-wheelbase vehi‐
cles.
102
Seats and stowing
#
To setthe fully reclined position: press
button 1.
R
The rear seat will move intothe reclined
position
R
The front passenger seatwillmove into
theposition forchauffeur mode
R
The footrest will move out from under the
front passenger seat
R
If available, theleg rest will rise
#
To setthe uprightposition: manually
adjustthe seat to thedesired position.
or
#
Call up thesettings withthe memoryfunc‐
tion (/ page121).
%
Youcan use therear-compartment child
safetylocktodisable this function
(/ page63).
%
The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If
this is thecase, fold up theleg rest and
engageit.
Chauffeur mode
Information on chauffeur mode
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraintswhichare notinstalled or are
adjustedincorrectly
If headrestraints arenot installed or are
adjustedincorrectly,the head restraintscan‐
notprovide protection as intended.
Thereisanincreased risk of injuryinthe
head and neckarea, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#
Alwaysdrive withthe head restraints
installed.
#
Beforedrivingoff,makesurefor every
vehicle occupant that thecenter of the
head restraint supports thebackofthe
head at about eyelevel.
Do notinterchangethe head restraintsofthe
front and rear seats. Otherwise, youwill notbe
able to adjustthe height and angle of thehead
restraintscorrectly.
Adjustthe head restraint fore-and-aftposition so
that it is as close as possible to thebackofyour
head.
&
WARNING Risk of accident with the
front passenger headrestraint folded
down
If thefront passenger seat is in thechauffeur
modepositionand thefront passenger head
Seats and stowing
103
restraint is folded down, theviewofthe pas‐
senger's outside mirrorcan be impaired.
#
To have afreeviewofthe outside mir‐
ror, remove thefront passenger head
restraint beforebeginningajourney.
*
NOTE Damage to objectsinthe luggage
netofthe front passenger footwell when
adjustingthe front passenger seat to the
chauffeur position
Objectsinthe luggagenet in thefront
passenger footwell can becomedamaged
when thefront passenger seat is adjustedto
thechauffeur position.
#
Remove theobjects from theluggage
net.
*
NOTE Damage to theseats when moving
theseats back
The seats maybedamaged by objectswhen
moving theseats back.
#
When moving theseats back, make
surethat thereare no objects in the
footwell, under or behindthe seats.
Observe thefollowing:
R
Adjustthe front passenger seat forchauffeur
modebeforethe journey
R
Do notremove thefront passenger seat head
restraint during thejourney
Forchauffeur mode, thefollowing settings are
made forthe front passenger seat:
R
The seat is movedforwards
R
The backrestistiltedforwards
R
The head restraint is folded forwards
The frontpassenger seat will automaticallymove
from thechauffeur positionbackintothe normal
position in thefollowing situations:
R
The front passenger seat is adjustedusing
thebuttons on thedoor control panel on the
front passenger side
R
The front passenger seatbeltisfastened
R
An occupant is detected on thefront
passenger seat
R
The front passenger head restraint is inser‐
tedand thepowersupply is switched on
R
The front passenger backrestisadjusted
rearwards
R
The front passenger seat is movedinthe
fore-and-aftdirection outofthe chauffeur
area
Positioning thefront passenger seat for
chauffeur mode
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
R
The front passengerseat is notoccupied.
R
The front passenger seat belt is notinserted
intothe buckle.
104
Seats and stowing
#
To select thefront passenger seat: press
button 1.
When theindicator lamplights up, thefront
passenger seat is selected.
Setting thechauffeur position
#
Press button 2 forwards and hold it in this
position.
The front passengerseat willmove forward
and stop at thethreshold of theareafor
chauffeur mode.
#
Release button 2.
#
Press forwardand hold button 2 again until
thefront passenger seat is in position for
chauffeur mode.
The frontpassengerhead restraint will fold
forwards. The frontpassenger seat will move
forward.
The To view theext.mirror,adjustfront-
passenger seat or remove thehead restraint.
displaymessagewill appear on themulti‐
function display.
%
If thefront passenger seat is already at the
threshold to theareafor chauffeur mode,
theposition forchauffeur modewill be set
immediately.
#
Save thesettings withthe memoryfunction
(/ page121).
Seats and stowing
105
%
Youcan use therear-compartment child
safetylocktodisable this function
(/ page63).
Removing or installing thefront passenger
head restraints (chauffeur mode)
Requirements:
R
The front passengerhead restraint is folded
completely forward
Removing the head restraint
#
Fold head restraint bar covers 2 towards
therear.
#
Hold front passenger head restraint 1
tightly.
#
Pull adjusterlever 3 towardsthe rear and
hold it in this position.
#
Remove front passenger headrestraint 1.
#
Release adjusterlever 3.
Redpin 4 protrudes from theadjusterlever.
#
Press down redpin 4.
#
Fold covers 2 forwards and close them.
Inserting thehead restraint
#
Fold head restraint bar covers 2 towards
therear.
106
Seats and stowing
#
Pull handle 3 towardsthe rear.
Redpin 4 protrudes from theadjusterlever.
#
Insertfront passenger head restraint 1 into
thebrackets.
The front passenger head restraint must
engageonbothsides.
#
Press down redpin 4.
If pin 4 can be pressed down and is then no
longer visible, thefront passenger head
restraint has engaged correctly.
#
Fold covers 2 forwards and close them.
The front passenger head restraint folds into
position automatically.
Moving thefront passenger seat intothe
normal position (chauffeur mode)
Requirements:
R
Forselecting thefront passenger seat:the
powersupply is switched on
R
The front passenger head restraint is instal‐
led
#
To select thefront passenger seat: press
button 1.
When theindicator lamplights up, thefront
passenger seat is selected.
Setting thenormalposition
#
Press button 3 towardsthe rear and hold it
in this position.
The front passengerseat willmove to the
threshold of theareafor chauffeur mode.
Seats and stowing
107
The front passenger head restraint will fold
intoposition.
The front passengerseat willthen move fur‐
ther towardsthe rear.
or
#
Briefly press button 2 towardsthe rear.
The frontpassenger seat will move automati‐
callytothe threshold of theareafor chauf‐
feur mode. The frontpassengerhead
restraint will fold intoposition.
%
Youcan also setthe normal position from
thefront passenger seat. To do so, press any
button on thedoor control panel on thefront
passenger side.
#
Call up thesettings withthe memoryfunc‐
tion (/ page121).
%
Youcan use therear-compartment child
safetylocktodisable this function
(/ page63).
Setting thefullyreclined position of thefront
passenger seat (chauffeur mode)
Setting thereclined position
This function is available in vehicles withthe fol‐
lowing equipment:
R
Electrically adjustable rear seats
R
Individual rear seat without aleg rest
Youcan move thefront passenger seat intoa
fully reclined position. The rear seat and front
passenger seat will then provide acontinuous
surface.
#
Putthe seat cushion of therear seat all the
waybackinthe fore-and-aftposition
(/ page 101).
#
Move thefront passenger seat intoposition
forchauffeur mode(/page104).
#
Remove thefront passenger head restraint
(/ page106).
#
Move thefront passenger seat so that the
backrestisinafullyreclinedposition
(/ page 96).
Leaving thereclined position
#
Fold thefront passenger seat backrest
upright to asuitable position.
#
Install thefront passenger head restraint
(/ page106).
Head restraints
Adjustingthe frontseatheadrestraints
mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
thevehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if youadjustthe driver's seat, thehead
restraint,the steering wheel or themirror
while thevehicle is in motion
R
if youfastenyour seat belt whilethe vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Beforestarting theengine: adjustthe
driver's seat, thehead restraint,the
108
Seats and stowing
steering wheel or themirrorand fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraintswhichare notinstalled or are
adjustedincorrectly
If head restraintsare notinstalled or are
adjustedincorrectly,the head restraintscan‐
notprovide protection as intended.
Thereisanincreased risk of injuryinthe
head and neckarea, e.g. in theevent of an
accident or when braking.
#
Alwaysdrive withthe head restraints
installed.
#
Beforedrivingoff,makesurefor every
vehicle occupant that thecenter of the
head restraint supports thebackofthe
head at about eyelevel.
Do notinterchangethe head restraintsofthe
front and rear seats. Otherwise, youwill notbe
able to adjustthe height and angle of thehead
restraintscorrectly.
Adjustthe head restraint fore-and-aftposition so
that it is as close as possible to thebackofyour
head.
#
To move forwards: pullthe head restraint
forwards.
#
To move backwards: press release knob 1
and push thehead restraint backwards.
Adjustingthe front-seat luxuryhead
restraints mechanically
#
To adjustthe sidebolsters of thehead
restraint: pull or push right or left-handside
bolster 2.
#
To move forwards: pullthe head restraint
forwards.
Seatsand stowing
109
#
To move backwards: press release knob 1
and push thehead restraint backwards.
Adjustingthe EASY ADJUSTluxuryhead
restraints on thefront seatsmechanically
#
To adjustthe sidebolsters of thehead
restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side
bolster 1.
%
The fore-and-aftposition of thehead
restraint will be adjustedautomatically when
youadjustthe backrestusing thebuttons on
thedoor control panel.
Lowering therear seat head restraints elec‐
tricallyfromthe front compartment
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
#
Press ü button 1.
%
Depending on themodel, the ü button is
located on thedoor control panel on the
driver's side.
%
If all therear seat head restraintsare low‐
ered and button 1 is pressed again, the
outer rear head restraintswill move intothe
laststoredposition (/ page111 ).
Extending the outer rear seat head restraints
electricallyfromthe front
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
This function is available on vehicles withelectri‐
cally adjustable rear seats.
110
Seats and stowing
#
Press and hold ü button 1 until the
head restraintshaveextendedupwards.
%
Dependingonthe model, the ü button is
located on thedoor control panel on the
driver's side.
Extending theouter rear seat head restraints
to thelaststoredposition
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
This function is available on vehicles withelectri‐
cally adjustable rear seats.
#
Briefly press ü button 1.
The head restraintslower.
#
Briefly press ü button 1 again.
The head restraintswill move to thelast
stored position.
%
Depending on themodel, the ü button is
located on thedoor control panel on the
driver's side.
Adjustingthe rear seat outer head restraints
mechanically
#
To move forwards: pullthe head restraint
forwards.
Seatsand stowing
111
#
To move backwards: press release knob 1
and push thehead restraint backwards.
Adjustingthe outerluxuryheadrestraints of
therear seatsmechanically
#
To adjustthe sidebolsters: push or pull
right and/or left-hand side bolster 1 into
thedesired position.
#
To adjustthe angle of thehead restraint:
pull or push thehead restraint in thedirec‐
tion of arrow 2.
Attachingand removing the supplementary
cushion of theluxury head restraint in the
rear passenger compartment
The supplementarycushion is available on vehi‐
cles withelectrically adjustable rear seats.
Use thesupplementarycushion onlywhen the
vehicle is stationary. The supplementarycushion
is in thevehicle.
#
Position thehead restraint as farforwardsas
possible.
#
To attachthe supplementary cushion:
hold supplementarycushion 1 againstthe
head restraint and push press studs 2 into
thecounterpieces.
#
To remove thesupplementarycushion:
release press studs 2 and remove supple‐
mentarycushion 1.
112
Seats and stowing
Extendingorretracting the rear seat center
head restraint electrically
#
Press and hold button 1 until thehead
restraint has extendedorretracted.
Settingthe center head restraint intoposi‐
tion mechanically
#
Pull thehead restraint up until it engages.
Configuring theseat settings
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat.
Adjustingthe backrestsidebolsters
#
Select SideBolsters.
#
Select thesetting.
Adjustingthe seat contourinthe lumbar
region of theseat backrest(lumbar)
#
Select Lumbar.
#
Adjustthe air cushion.
Setting theshoulder section
#
Select Shoulders.
#
Select thesettings.
Setting theseat heating balance
#
Select Seat Heating Balance.
#
Select thesettings.
Memoryfunction
#
Save theseat adjustments withthe memory
function (/ page120).
Seats and stowing
113
Setting automatic adjustment of thelateral
support(activemulticontour seat)
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
With this function,the lateral supportofthe
activemulticontour seat is automaticallyadjus‐
tedtothe driving and cornering dynamics of the
vehicle.
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat.
#
Select Dynamic Seat.
#
Selectsetting: Off, Level 1 or Level 2.
Overviewofmassageand workout programs
Massageprograms
The following programs can be selected:
R
Hot Relaxing Back
R
Hot Relaxing Shoulder
R
Activating Massage
R
Classic Massage
R
Mobilizing Massage
ActiveWorkout
The Act. Workout Back program requires your
activecooperation.Alternating between tensing
and releasing helps to improveblood flow to
your muscles. Press againstapressurepointas
soonasyou feel it.
Selecting themassageprogram forthe front
seats
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat.
#
Select Massage.
#
Select amassageprogram.
The massageprogram runs forapproximately
8to18minutes, depending on thesetting.
#
To setthe massageintensity: switch High
Intensity on O or off ª.
Resetting theseat and massagesettings
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
5
Reset
#
Select Yes or No.
%
Onlythe currentlyselected seatisreset.
Switching theseat heating on/off
&
WARNING Risk of burnsdue to repeat‐
edlyswitching on theseat heating
Repeatedly switching on theseat heating can
cause theseat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The healthofpersons withlimited tempera‐
turesensitivity or alimited ability to react to
high temperatures maybeaffected or they
mayevensufferburn-likeinjuries.
#
Do notrepeatedlyswitchonthe seat
heating.
To protect againstoverheating, theseat heating
maybetemporarilydeactivated afteritis
switched on repeatedly.
114
Seats and stowing
*
NOTE Damage to theseats caused by
objectsordocumentswhen theseat
heating is switched on
When theseat heating is switched on, over‐
heating mayoccur due to objectsordocu‐
mentsplaced on theseats, e.g. seat cush‐
ions or child seats.This could cause damage
to theseat surface.
#
Make surethat no objects or docu‐
ments areonthe seats when theseat
heating is switched on.
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
#
To switchon/increase thelevel: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until thedesired heating
levelisset.
Dependingonthe heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up.
Seatsand stowing
115
#
To switchoff/reduce thelevel: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until thedesired heating
levelisset.
If all indicator lamps areoff,the seat heating
is switched off.
%
The seat heating will automaticallyswitch
down from thethree heating levels after8,
10 and 20 minutes until theseat heating
switches off.
%
If youswitch thepower supply offand on
again within 20 minutes, theprevioussetting
of theseat heating forthe driver's seat will
remain active.
%
Youcan setthe distribution of theheated
sections of theseat cushions and seat
backrests on thefront and rear seatsusing
themultimedia system (/ page116).
%
Vehicles withthe Warmth ComfortPackage:
youcan adjustthe heating of thecenter con‐
sole and thedoor armrests using themulti‐
media system (/ page116).
Settingthe panelheating
Requirements:
R
The seat heatingisswitched on
(/ page114).
Multimediasystem:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Panel Heating
#
Select one or moreseats.
The armrests of theselected seats and the
center console areheated.
Switching theseat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
R
The powersupply is switched on.
116
Seats and stowing
#
To switchon/increase thelevel: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until thedesired ventila‐
tionlevelisset.
Dependingonthe ventilation level, up to
threeindicator lamps will light up.
#
To switchoff/reduce thelevel: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until thedesired ventila‐
tionlevelisset.
If all indicator lamps areoff,the seat ventila‐
tionisswitched off.
%
If youswitch thepower supply offand on
again within 20 minutes, thepreviousseat
ventilation setting forthe driver's seat will
remain active.
Steering wheel
Adjustingthe steering wheel electrically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
thevehicle settings while thevehicle is in
motion
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if youadjustthe driver's seat, thehead
restraint,the steering wheel or themirror
while thevehicle is in motion
R
if youfastenyour seat belt whilethe vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Beforestarting theengine: adjustthe
driver's seat, thehead restraint,the
steering wheel or themirrorand fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment forchil‐
dren when adjusting thesteering wheel
Children could injurethemselves if they
adjustthe steering wheel.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
The steering wheel can be adjustedwhen the
powersupply is disconnected.
Seatsand stowing
117
1
To adjustthe distance to thesteering wheel
2
To adjustthe height
#
Save thesettings withthe memoryfunction
(/ page120).
Switching thesteering wheel heater on/off
Requirements:
R
The powersupply or theignition is switched
on.
#
Turn theleverinthe direction of arrow 1 or
2.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, thesteering
wheel heater is switched on.
When youswitch theignition off, thesteering
wheel heater will switchoff.
Easy entryand exit feature
Using theeasy entryand exit feature
&
WARNING Risk of accident whendriving
offwhile adjusting theeasy exit feature
‑Ifyou driveoff while theeasy entry and exit
featureismaking adjustments, youcould
lose controlofthe vehicle.
#
Alwayswait until theadjustmentproc‐
ess is complete beforedriving off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while adjusting theeasy entry and exit
feature
When theeasy entry and exit featureadjusts
thesteering wheel and thedriver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants –particularly
children –could becometrapped.
#
During theadjustmentprocess of the
easy entry and exit feature, makesure
that no onehas anybody parts in the
sweep of theseat or thesteering wheel.
118
Seats and stowing
If thereisarisk of becoming trappedbythe
steering wheel:
#
Move theadjustmentleverofthe steer‐
ing wheel.
The adjustmentprocess is stopped.
If thereisarisk of becoming trappedbythe
driver's seat:
#
Press theseat adjustmentswitch.
The adjustmentprocess is stopped.
Vehicles with memoryfunction: Youcan stop
theadjustmentprocess by pressing one of the
memoryfunction position switches.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during activationofthe easy entryand
exit featurebychildren
If children activatethe easy entryand exit
feature, they can become trapped,particu‐
larlywhen unattended.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
If theeasy entry and exit featureisactive, the
steering wheel will move upwards and thedriv‐
er's seat will move backinthe following situa‐
tions:
R
Youswitch theignition offwiththe driver's
door open
R
Youopen thedriver's door withthe ignition
switched off
%
The steering wheel will move upwards only if
it is notalready as high as it will go. The driv‐
er's seat will move backwards onlyifitisnot
already in therearmostposition.
The steering wheel and thedriver's seat will
move backtothe lastdrive position in thefol‐
lowing cases:
R
Youswitch thepowersupply or theignition
on when thedriver's door is closed
R
Youclose thedriver's door withthe ignition
switched on.
The lastdrive position will be stored when:
R
Youswitch theignition off.
R
Vehicles with memoryfunction: Youcall
up theseat settings via thememoryfunction.
R
Vehicles with memoryfunction: Yousave
theseat settings via thememoryfunction.
Vehicles with memoryfunction: Press one of
thememoryfunction savedposition buttons to
stop theadjustmentprocess.
Setting theeasy entryand exit feature
Multimediasystem:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Easy Entry/Exit
#
Select Steering Wheel &Seat, Steering
Wheel Only or Off.
Seats and stowing
119
#
Press button 1.
The rear seat is selectedifthe indicator lamp
in thebutton does notlight up.
#
Adjustthe rear seat usingthe buttons in the
door control panel (/ page101).
Example:vehicles without areclining rear seat
#
Briefly press memorybutton Mand then
press presetposition button 1, 2or3within
threeseconds.
The settings forthe rear seat arestoredin
theselected memoryposition.
%
Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Youcan‐
notstore anysettings on the j button for
adjustingthe reclined position.
Calling up
#
Press button 1.
The rear seat is selectedifthe indicator lamp
in thebutton does notlight up.
122
Seats and stowing
Example: vehicles without areclining rear seat
#
Press and hold thecorresponding memory
position switch1,2or3until therear seat is
in thestoredposition.
%
Seat adjustmentisinterruptedassoon as
yourelease thepresetposition button.
The adjustmentofthe activemulticontour
seat is still carried out.
Operating thefront passenger seat and rear
seats via thememoryfunction in therear
passenger compartment
Requirements:
R
Forselecting thefront passenger seat:the
powersupply is switched on
Storing
Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat
adjustmentsfor up to threepeople can be
stored and called up using thememoryfunction
in therear passenger compartment.
The following settings can be stored forthe front
passenger seat:
R
Position of theseat, backrestand head
restraint
The following settings can be stored forthe rear
seats:
R
Position of theseat, backrestand head
restraint
R
Activemulticontourseats:the seat side bol‐
stersofthe seat backrestaswell as thecon‐
tour of theseat backrestinthe lumbar and
shoulder regions
R
Seat heating: distribution of theheated sec‐
tionsofthe seat cushion and seat backrest
The following settings arealso stored to amem‐
oryposition,ifthe indicator lampinthe v
button lights up:
R
Position of thefootrestofthe front
passenger seat, if available
R
Position of thescreen, if available
Usingthe presetposition buttons, youalways
storethe current setting of each seat.
Seats and stowing
123
Callingup
#
Press button 1.
When theindicator lamplights up, thefront
passenger seat is selected.
Example: vehicles without areclining rear seat
#
Press and hold therelevant presetposition
button 1, 2or3until both seats areinthe
stored position.
%
The presetpositions in theareafor the
chauffeur modecan only be setwhenthe
conditions forthe chauffeur modeare fulfil‐
led .
%
Seatadjustmentisinterruptedassoon as
yourelease thepresetposition button.
The adjustmentofthe activemulticontour
seat is still carried out.
%
Youcan use therear-compartment child
safetylocktodisable this function
(/ page63).
Stowageareas
Notesonloading thevehicle
&
DANGER Risk of exhaustgas poisoning
Combustionengines emit poisonous exhaust
gases suchascarbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter thevehicle interior if the
trunk lidisopenwhenthe engine is running,
especially if thevehicle is in motion.
#
Alwaysswitchoff theengine before
opening thetrunk lid.
#
Neverdrive withthe trunk lid open.
Seats and stowing
125
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in thevehicle
If objects, luggageorloads arenot secured
or notsecured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip overorbethrownaroundand therebyhit
vehicle occupants.
Thereisarisk of injury,particularly in the
event of sudden braking or asudden change
in direction.
#
Alwaysstowobjectsinsuchaway that
they cannotbethrownaround.
#
Beforethe journey, secureobjects, lug‐
gage or loads againstslipping or tipping
over.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowedincorrectly
If youdonot adequatelystowobjectsinthe
vehicle interior,theycould sliporbetossed
around and therebystrikevehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phonebracketscannot
alwaysrestrain theobjects they containin
theevent of an accident.
Thereisarisk of injury,particularly in the
event of sudden braking or asudden change
in direction.
#
Alwaysstowobjectsinsuchaway that
they cannotbetossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat objectsdonot
project from stowagespaces, parcel
nets or stowagenets.
#
Close thelockable stowagespaces
beforestarting ajourney.
#
Alwaysstowand secureobjectsthat
areheavy,hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or toolargeinthe trunk.
Observe thenotes on thecup holders.
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromthe tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhausttailpipe and tailpipe trims can
becomeveryhot.Ifyou come intocontact
withthese parts of thevehicle, youcould
burnyourself.
#
Alwaysbeparticularly careful around
thetailpipe and thetailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closelyin
this area.
#
Allowvehicle parts to cool down before
touchingthem.
The driving characteristicsofyour vehicle are
dependent on thedistribution of theload within
thevehicle. Youshould bear thefollowing in
mind when loadingthe vehicle:
R
Neverexceed thepermissible gross mass or
thegross axle weight rating forthe vehicle
(including occupants). The values arespeci‐
fied on thevehicle identification plateonthe
vehicle's B-pillar.
R
The load mustnot protrude above theupper
edgeofthe seat backrests.
R
Alwaysplace theload behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
126
Seats and stowing
R
Secure theload using theparcel nethooks.
Distributethe load on theparcel nethooks
evenly.
Stowagespacesinthe vehicleinterior
Overviewofthe front stowage compart‐
ments
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If youdonot adequatelystowobjectsinthe
vehicle interior,theycould sliporbetossed
around and therebystrikevehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phonebracketscannot
alwaysrestrain theobjects they containin
theevent of an accident.
There is arisk of injury,particularly in the
event of sudden braking or asuddenchange
in direction.
#
Alwaysstowobjectsinsuchaway that
they cannotbetossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat objectsdonot
project from stowagespaces, parcel
nets or stowagenets.
#
Close thelockable stowagespaces
beforestartingajourney.
#
Alwaysstowand secureobjectsthat
areheavy,hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or toolargeinthe trunk.
Observe thenotes on loading thevehicle.
1
Stowagespaceinthe doors
2
Stowage/telephonecompartment in the
armrestwithmultimedia and USBports as
well as stowagespace, e.g.for an MP3
player
3
Stowagecompartment in thefront center
console
4
Glove box
Seats and stowing
127
Locking/unlocking theglove box
#
Turn theemergency keyaquarterturnclock‐
wise 2 (tolock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Opening theeyeglasses compartment
#
Pressbutton 1.
Folding thefolding table out or in
&
WARNING Risk of injury from theopen
folding table
If youare drivingwiththe folding table open,
vehicle occupants could strike againstit, in
particular in theevent of an accident, sudden
braking or an abrupt changeofdirection.
#
Close thefolding table beforeeachjour‐
ney.
*
NOTE Damage to thefolding tables when
moving theseats back
Open folding tables maybedamaged when
theseats aremovedback.
#
Makesurethat thefolding tables are
folded in when movingthe front seats
back.
Folding out
#
Open rear armrest 1 (/ page129).
#
Pull thefolding table forwards and upwards
by recess 2 or 3 and swing outwards.
#
Fold thetable panelsapart.
128
Seats and stowing
#
To fold in: fold thetable panelstogether and
swing in thefolding table.
Opening thestowage compartmentinthe
rear armrest
Vehicles witharear benchseat
#
Fold down therear armrest.
#
To open: press release catch 1 and swing
thecover of thearmrest upwards.
Vehicles withelectrically adjustable outer seats
#
Fold down therear armrest.
#
To open: pull handle 1 and fold thecover of
thearmrest upwards.
Opening thestowage compartmentinthe
rear-compartment center console
Vehicles withindividual rear seats
#
Pull handle 1 and fold thecover of thearm‐
rest upwards.
Opening thestowage boxinthe backrestin
therear passenger compartment
*
NOTE Damage to therear armrestdue to
body weight
When folded out, therear armrestcan be
damaged by body weight.
Seatsand stowing
129
EASY-PACK trunk box
Adjustingthe height of the EASY-PACKtrunk
boxtoany position
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
and injuredwhen moving thefloor up
When thefloor movesup, your hands may
become trapped on theframe of theEASY-
PACK trunkbox andobjectsmay be thrown
up.
#
When thefloor movesup, makesure
that your hands arenot within the
sweep of thefloor.
#
If someonebecomes trapped, carefully
push thecenter of thefloor downward.
#
Remove all objectsfromthe floor
beforemoving it up.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
whenpressing theEASY-PACK trunk box
in
When theEASY-PACK trunk boxispressed
intothe retracted position, your hands may
become trapped. Children,inparticular,may
injurethemselves when doing so.
#
When pressing theEASY-PACK trunk
boxin, makesurethat your hands are
notwithin thesweep of theEASY-PACK
trunk box.
#
When leavingthe vehicle, alwaystake
theSmartKey withyou and lockthe
vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage to theextendedEASY-
PACK trunk box
The EASY-PACKtrunk boxmay be damaged
when it is extended.
#
Do notplace anyobjects on or press
down on theEASY-PACK trunk box
frame.
#
Do notclose thetrunk lid when the
EASY-PACK trunk boxisextended.
*
NOTE Damage to theEASY-PACK trunk
boxbyobjects
Objectsthat aresharp-edged, pointed, frag‐
ile, rounded or heavy and objectsthat roll
can damagethe EASY-PACK trunk boxand be
thrown out.
#
Do nottransportobjectsthat aresharp-
edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and
objectsthat roll in theEASY-PACK trunk
box.
#
Alwaysstowand securesuchobjects
outside of thebox in thetrunk.
#
Alwaysobserve themaximum permitted
load of theEASY-PACK trunk box.
#
Do notuse theEASY-PACK trunk box
when therear seats arefolded for‐
wards.
Seats and stowing
131
The maximum permitted load of theEASY-PACK
trunkbox is 22 lbs(10 kg). To prevent thebox
from being overloaded, thebox floor will lower
ontothe trunk floor when theload reaches
approximately11lbs (5 kg).
#
To remove: pull handle 2 on thebox.
#
To increase theload capacity: press the
center of floor 1 downwardstothe desired
position and boxsize.
#
To reduce the load capacity: press button
3.
#
To stow: press thebox in completely using
handle 2 until it locks in place.
%
Observe thenotes on cleaning theEASY-
PACK trunk box(/page422).
Installingorremovingthe EASY-PACKtrunk
box
Installing
132
Seats and stowing
#
Turn rotating catches 6 outward.
#
Insert retainers 2 of box 1 intoouter
holes 3.
#
Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 intothe
anchoragesofrear shelf 4.
#
Turn rotating catches 6 inward.
Removing
#
Turn rotating catches 6 outward.
#
Lowerbox 1 and pullitout of anchorages in
rear shelf 4.
#
Pull box 1 backout of openings 3.
Opening thestowage space under thetrunk
floor
#
Pull trunk floor 2 upwards using handle 1
until it restsagainstthe trunk partition.
#
Fold out hook 3 on theunderside of the
trunk floor.
Seats and stowing
133
#
Clip hook 3 onto drip rail 4.
Attachingaroof rack
&
WARNING Risk of injury if themaximum
roof load is exceeded
When youload theroof, thecenter of gravity
of thevehicle rises and theusual driving
characteristicsaswell as thesteering and
braking characteristicschange. During cor‐
nering, thevehicle tilts morestronglyand
mayreact moresluggishlytosteering move‐
ments.
If youexceed themaximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as thesteer‐
ing and braking characteristics, will be
greatly impaired.
#
Alwayscomplywiththe maximum roof
load and adjustyour driving style.
Youwill find informationonthe maximum roof
load in the"Technical data" section.
*
NOTE Vehicle damagefromnon-
approvedroof racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks
whichhave notbeentestedand approvedby
Mercedes-Benz.
#
Use onlyroof rackstestedand
approvedfor Mercedes-Benz.
#
Depending on thevehicle equipment,
ensurethat when theroof rack is instal‐
led, thesliding sunroof can be fully
raised.
#
Dependingonthe vehicle equipment,
ensurethat when theroof rack is instal‐
led, thetrunk lid can be fully opened.
#
Position theload on theroof rack in
suchaway that thevehicle will notsus‐
tain damageevenwhen it is in motion.
*
NOTE Damage to thesliding sunroof
when aroof rack is installed
The sliding sunroof maybedamaged by the
roof rack if youattempt to open it when the
roof rack is installed.
#
Do notopen thesliding sunroof when
theroof rack is installed.
In order to allowventilation of thevehicle
interior,you can raise thesliding sunroof.
134
Seats and stowing
#
To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull
out cup holder 1.
#
To install: insertcup holder 1 and slide
backcatch 2.
%
The cup holder rubber mat can be removed
forcleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
%
Observe thenotes on loading thevehicle
(/ page125).
Opening thecup holdersinthe rear armrest
(vehicles with rear bench seat)
*
NOTE Damage to thecup holder
When therear armrestisfolded backthe cup
holder could become damaged.
#
Onlyfold therear armrestbackwhen
thecup holder is closed.
#
To open: press cup holder 1 or 2.
#
Place acontainer in or remove acontainer
from cup holder 1 or 2.
Opening or closing thecup holder in therear
armrest(vehicles with electricallyadjustable
rear seats)
136
Seats and stowing
#
Makesurethat cup holder base 2 is in the
upper position.
#
Placethe cup holder insertintothe recess in
therear armrestsuchthat button 1 is
facing forwards.
#
Press thecup holder insertdown.
#
Press outer ring 3 of thecup holder insert
until thecup holder insertengages audibly.
Switching thecooling or heating function for
thetemperature-controlled cup holder on
and off
When theheating function is used, themetal
insert of thecup holder will be heated. Forthis
reason,you mustnot reachintothe cup holder
insert.
#
To switchon: press button 2 repeatedly
until theblue (keep cool) or red(keep warm)
indicator lamponthe button lights up.
#
To switchoff: press button 2 repeatedly
until theindicator lamponthe button goes
out.
%
Clean theremovable rubber mat onlywith
clear,lukewarm water, and clean cup holder
1 only with asoftcloth.
Ashtrayand cigarette lighter
Using theashtray in thefront center console
#
To open: briefly press themarking 4.
#
To remove theinsert: grip thesides of
insert 1,push it forwardand pull it out
upwards 2.
#
To re-installthe insert: press insert 1 into
thedraweruntil it engages.
#
To close: press stowagecompartment 3
closed until it locks.
138
Seats and stowing
#
Place themobile phone as close to thecen‐
terofmat 1 as possible withthe display
facing upwards.
When thecharging symbol is shown in the
multimedia system, themobile phone is
being charged.
Malfunctions during thecharging process are
shown in themultimedia system display.
%
The mat can be removedfor cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Wireless chargingofamobile phone in the
rear compartment
Requirements:
R
The mobile phonemustbesuitable forwire‐
less charging(Qi-compatible mobile phone).
Youcan find alistofQi-compatible mobile
phones at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Example: vehicles withindividual rear seats
#
Place themobile phone as close to thecen‐
terofmat 1 as possible withthe display
facing upwards.
When theindicator lampatthe front of the
mobilephone system lights up, themobile
phone is being charged.
%
The mat can be removedfor cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
%
Observe thenotes on loading thevehicle
(/ page125).
Installingand removing the floor mats
&
WARNING Risk of accident dueto
objectsinthe driver's footwell
Objectsinthe driver's footwell mayimpede
pedal travel or blockadepressed pedal.
This jeopardizes theoperating and road
safetyofthe vehicle.
#
Stow all objectsinthe vehicle securely
so that they cannotget intothe driver's
footwell.
#
Alwaysinstall thefloor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that thereisalwayssufficient room for
thepedals.
#
Do notuse loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on topofone another.
Seats and stowing
147
#
To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2.
#
To remove: pull thefloor mat offholders 2.
Installing/removing the pennantstaff
Installing
The pennant staffisinstalled and removedin
identical fashion on both thedriver's and
front‑passengersides.
#
Press cover 1 and turnitforwardsinthe
direction of travel.
#
Remove thecover.
#
Position pennant staff 2 horizontallyinthe
opening and press it in.
#
Turn pennant staff 2 in theoppositedirec‐
tion to thedirection of traveluntil it is in a
vertical position and engages.
Removing
#
Presspennant staff 2 intothe opening and
turnitforwardsinthe direction of traveluntil
it is in ahorizontalposition.
#
Remove pennant staff 2.
148
Seats and stowing
#
Install cover 1 and turnitbackwards in the
oppositedirection to thedirection of travel.
The pennant staffcan be stowedinthe parcel
nets in thetrunk,for example.
Seatsand stowing
149
Exterior lighting
Information aboutlighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of thevehicle are
onlyaids. The driver of thevehicle is responsible
forcorrect vehicle illumination in accordance
withthe prevailing light and visibilityconditions,
legal requirements and trafficsituation.
Light switch
Operatingthe light switch
1
W Left-hand standing lamps
2
X Right-hand standing lamps
3
T Parking lamps and license platelamp
4
à Automatic driving lights (preferredlight
switchposition)
5
L Lowbeam/high beam
6
R Switches therear foglight on/off
When lowbeam is activated, the T parking
lamps indicator lampisdeactivated and replaced
by the L lowbeam indicator lamp.
#
Alwaysparkyour vehicle safely using suffi‐
cient lighting, in accordancewiththe rele‐
vant legalstipulations.
*
NOTE Batterydischarging by operating
thestanding lights
Operatingthe standing lightsoveraperiod of
hoursputs astrainonthe battery.
#
Wherepossible, switchonthe
right X or left W parking light.
In theevent of severe batterydischarging, the
standing lamps or parkinglamps areautomati‐
callyswitched offtofacilitatethe next engine
start.
The exterior lighting (exceptstanding and park‐
ing lamps) will switch offautomaticallywhen the
driver's door is opened.
150
Light and visibility
R
Observe thenotes on surround lighting
(/ page155).
Automatic drivinglights function
The parking lamps, lowbeam and daytime run‐
ning lampswill be switched on automatically
depending on theignition status and theambi‐
ent light.
&
WARNING Risk of accident whenthe low
beam is switched offinpoor visibility
When thelight switchisset to Ã,the low
beam maynot be switched on automatically
if thereisfog, snoworother causes of poor
visibility suchasspray.
#
In suchcases, turnthe light switchto
L.
The automatic driving lights areonlyanaid. You
areresponsiblefor vehicle lighting.
Switching therear foglights on or off
Requirements:
R
The light switchisinthe L or à posi‐
tion.
#
Press the R button.
Please observe thecountry-specific laws on the
use of rear foglamps.
Operating thecombination switchfor the
lights
1
High beam
2
Turn signal light, right
3
High-beam flasher
4
Turn signal light, left
#
Use thecombination switchtoactivatethe
desired function.
Light and visibility
151
High beam
#
To switchon: turnthe light switchtothe
L or à position.
#
Push thecombination switchbeyond the
point of resistance in thedirection of arrow
1.
When thehigh beam is activated, the L
lowbeam indicator lampwill be deactivated
and replaced by the K high beam indica‐
torlamp.
#
To switchoff: move thecombination switch
backtoits startingposition.
High-beamflasher
#
Pull thecombination switchinthe direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light
#
To indicatebriefly: push thecombination
switchbriefly to thepoint of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turnsignal light will flash
threetimes.
#
To indicatepermanently: push thecombi‐
nation switchbeyond thepoint of resistance
in thedirection of arrow 2 or 4.
Vehicles withActiveLaneChangeAssist:
R
Indicator operation activated by thedriver
can extend forthe duration of thelane
change.
R
If thedriverindicated directly beforehand
but alane changewas notimmediately
possible,the turnsignal indicator may
activateautomatically.
Activating/deactivatingthe hazardwarning
lights
#
Press button 1.
The hazardwarning lightswill switchonauto‐
matically if:
R
The airbag has been deployed.
152
Light and visibility
%
AdaptiveHighbeam Assistisavailable only in
vehicles withLED high performancehead‐
lamps.
The AdaptiveHighbeam Assistautomatically
switches between thefollowing types of light:
R
Low-beam headlamps
R
High-beam headlamps
At speeds greater than 19 mph(30 km/h):
R
If no other road usersare detected, thehigh
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches offautomaticallyinthe
following cases:
R
At speeds below16mph (25 km/h).
R
If other road usersare detected.
R
If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds greater than approximately31mph
(50 km/h):
R
The headlamprangeofthe lowbeam is regu‐
lated automatically based on thedistance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
thewindshield near theoverhead control panel.
Switching AdaptiveHighbeam Assiston/off
#
To switchon: turnthe light switchtothe
à position.
#
Switchonthe high beam using thecombina‐
tion switch.
When thehigh beam is switched on automat‐
icallyinthe dark, the _ indicator lampon
themultifunction displaycomes on.
#
To switchoff: switchoff thehigh beam
using thecombination switch.
Switching thedaytime running lamps on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Daytime Run. Lights
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Setting theexterior lighting switch-offdelay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Ext. Light SwitchOff
#
Setthe switch-offdelaytime.
154
Light and visibility
Setting thesurround lighting
Multimediasystem:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Locator Lighting
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
If thesurround lighting is switched on, theexte‐
rior lighting remains lit for40seconds afterthe
vehicle is unlocked. When youstart thevehicle,
thesurround lighting is deactivated and the
automatic drivinglightsare activated.
Interior lighting
Adjustingthe interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
#
1 p Switches thefront left-hand reading
lampon/off
#
2 | Switches theautomatic interior
lighting control on/off
#
3 c Switches thefront interior lighting
on/off
#
4 u Switches therear interior heating
on/off
#
5 p Switches thefront right-hand read‐
ing lampon/off
Controlpanel inside thegrabhandle (rear
passenger compartment)
Youcan switch thereading and make-up lamps
on or offfor one side or both sides of thevehi‐
cle.
#
Press button 1 until thereading lamp
and/or themake-up lampswitchonoroff on
therespectiveside of thevehicle.
#
Press button 2 until thereading lampand
themake-up lampswitchonoroff on both
sides of thevehicle.
Light and visibility
155
Adjustingthe ambientlighting
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
AmbientLight
Setting thecolor
#
Select Color.
#
Setacolor.
Adjustingthe brightness
#
Select Brightness.
#
Setabrightness value.
Activatingthe brightness forzones
#
Select Brightness Zones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
The Display, Front and Rear zones can be set
separately.
%
Setting brightness zones is notavailable for
theRear Seat Entertainment System.
Activatingmulti-coloredlighting
#
Select Multi-color.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Thereare tenpresetcolor combinations
available.
Activatingmulti-coloredanimation
#
Select Multi-colorAnim..
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
The chosen color combination will changeat
predefinedintervals.
Activatingdependencyonair conditioning
settings
#
Select Climate.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
If changes aremade to thetemperatureset‐
ting in thevehicle, thecolor of theambient
lighting will changebriefly.
Activatingwelcome lighting
#
Select Welcome.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
When thevehicle is unlocked, aspecial inte‐
rior lighting sequence will run.
Settingthe interior lighting switch-offdelay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Int.Light SwitchOff
#
Setthe switch-offdelaytime.
156
Light and visibility
Removing the wiper blades
#
To bring thewiper bladeintoposition to
be removed: holdthe wiper armfirmlyin
one hand.Withthe other hand, turnthe
wiperblade in thedirection of arrow 1
beyond thepoint of resistance.
The wiperblade will engageinthe removal
position withaclick.
#
To remove thewiper blade: press release
button 2,pull thewiper blade in thedirec‐
tion of arrow 3 and remove.
Installingthe wiper blades
#
Pushthe newwiper blade ontothe wiper arm
in thedirection of arrow 1 until release but‐
ton 2 engages.
#
Push thewiper blade beyond thepoint of
resistance in thedirection of arrow 3 on
thewiper arm.
The wiper blade will engagewithanoticeable
clickand move freely again.
#
Fold thewiper armbackontothe windshield.
#
Switchonthe ignition.
#
Press the î button on thecombination
switch(/page157).
Thewiper arms willmoveintothe original
position.
#
Switchthe ignition off.
Light and visibility
159
Adjustingthe outside mirrors
#
Select therequired mirrorusing button 3 or
4.
#
Use button 2 to setthe position of themir‐
roryou have selected.
Engaging theoutside mirrors
#
Press and hold button 1.
Youwill hear aclickand themirrorwillaudi‐
blyengageinposition. The mirrorisset in
thecorrect position.
Automatic anti-glaremirrors function
&
WARNING Risk of acidburns and poi‐
soning due to theanti-glaremirrorelec‐
trolyte
Electrolytemay escapeifthe glass in an
automatic anti-glaremirrorbreaks.
The electrolyteishazardous to healthand
causes irritation. It must notcome intocon‐
tact with your skin, eyes, respiratoryorgans
or clothing or be swallowed.
#
If youcomeintocontact withelectro‐
lyte,observe thefollowing:
R
Immediatelyrinsethe electrolyte
from your skin withwater andseek
medicalattention.
R
If electrolytecomes intocontact
withyour eyes, immediatelyrinse
them thoroughly withclean water
and seek medical attention.
R
If theelectrolyteisswallowed,
immediately rinse your mouthout
thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.
Seek medicalattention immediately.
R
Immediately changeout of clothing
whichhas been contaminated with
electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
The inside rearviewmirrorand theoutside mir‐
roronthe driver's side will automaticallygointo
anti-glaremode if light from aheadlamphitsthe
sensor on theinside rearviewmirror.
System limits
The system will notgointoanti-glaremode if:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
Reversegear is engaged.
R
The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirrorparkingposi‐
tionfunction
%
The parking position is available only in vehi‐
cles withamemoryfunction.
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirrorwillswivel
downwardsinthe direction of therear wheel on
thefront passenger's side when:
R
The parking position is stored (/ page162).
R
The front-passenger mirrorisselected.
R
Reversegear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirrorwillmove
backtoits original position when:
R
Youshiftthe transmission to another trans‐
mission position.
Light and visibility
161
Overviewofclimatecontrol systems
Notesonclimatecontrol
An interior air filter in combination withthe pre‐
filter in theengine compartmentmustalwaysbe
used so that theair conditioningsystem, pollu‐
tion levelmonitoring and theair filtration work
correctly. Makesurethat thefilter is installed
correctlyand thefilter housinginthe engine
compartment is closed correctlyusing thecap
and alwaystightlysealed when in operation. Use
filtersrecommendedand approvedby
Mercedes-Benz. Alwayshave service work car‐
ried out at aqualified specialistworkshop.
Overviewofthe air conditioning control
panel
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
The indicator lamps on thebuttons indicatethat
thecorresponding function is activated.
1
à Sets climatecontroltoautomatic,
left(/ page165)
2
w Sets thetemperature, left
3
H Sets theairflow,left, or switches off
climatecontrol
4
g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page167)
5
¬ Defrosts thewindshield
6
Calls up theair conditioningmenu
7
¤ Switches therear windowheater
on/off
8
Á Switches theA/C function on/
off(/ page165)
Switches residualheat on/off(/page168)
9
H Sets theairflow,right, or switches off
climatecontrol
A
w Sets thetemperature, right
B
à Sets climatecontroltoautomatic, right
Overviewofthe rear operating unit
Example:USA
1
Sets thetemperature, left
2
Sets theair distribution, left
164
Climatecontrol
Setting rear passenger compartment climate
control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, theset temperatureisregu‐
lated by thetemperatureofthe dispensed air
and theairflow.
#
Press button 3.
Climatestyle
Climate stylefunction
In automatic mode, youcan select thefollowing
climatestyle settings forthe driver's and front
passenger areas:
R
FOCUS: high airflow,slightly cooler setting
R
MEDIUM: medium airflow,standardsetting
R
DIFFUSE: lowairflow,slightly warmer and
draft-free setting
Adjustingthe climatemode settings
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Climate Mode
#
Select Driver and/or Passenger.
#
Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
%
To feel theeffect of theclimatestyle,the
à function mustbeactive(/page165).
Overviewofthe air distribution settings
The symbols on thedisplayindicatewhichvents
theairflow is being directed through:
¯
defroster vents
P
center and side airvents
O
footwell vents
S
center,sideand footwell vents
a
defrosterand footwell vents
_
allvents
b
defroster, middleand side air vents
W
automatic air distribution
Setting theair distribution
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Air Distribution
#
Select Driver and/or Passenger.
#
Setthe air distribution.
Setting thefootwell temperature
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Footwell Temperature
#
Select Driver and/or Passenger.
#
Setthe footwell temperature.
166
Climatecontrol
#
If liquid perfume comes intocontact
withyour eyes or skin,rinseyour eyes
withclean water.
#
If symptoms continue, consult adoctor.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full
flacons
Full flaconsmustnot be disposed
of withhousehold waste.
#
Full flaconsmustbetaken to
aharmful substance collectionpoint.
1
Cap
2
Flacon
#
To insert: slide theflacon intothe holder as
farasitwillgo.
#
To remove: pull outthe flacon.
If youdonot use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes,observethe manufacturers' safety
noticesonthe perfume packaging.
Dispose of thegenuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume flacon when it is emptyand do notrefill
it.
Refillable flacon
#
Unscrew thecap of theempty flacon.
#
Fill theflacon withamaximum of 0.5fl. oz.
(15ml).
#
Screw thecap backontothe flacon.
Alwaysrefill theempty refillable flacon withthe
same perfume. Observe theseparateinforma‐
tion sheetwiththe flacon.
Information on thewindshield heater
The windshield heater is switched on automati‐
cally if the ¬ button is activated.
Afterthe vehicle is started, thewindshield
heater is switched on automatically as required.
Climatecontrol
169
Air vents
Adjustingthe frontair vents
&
WARNING ‑Danger of burnsorfrostbite
due to being tooclose to theair vents
Very hotorverycold aircan flow from theair
vents.
Thiscould result in burns or frostbiteinthe
immediatevicinity of theair vents.
#
Make surethat all vehicle occupants
alwaysmaintain asufficient distanceto
theair vents.
#
If necessary,direct theairflow to
another area of thevehicle interior.
To guarantee thefresh air supplythrough theair
vents intothe vehicle interior,complywiththe
following:
R
Alwayskeep theventsand theventilation
grille in thevehicle interior free.
R
Keep theair inletfreeofdeposits
(/ page415).
#
To open or close: turncontroller 1 to the
leftorright as farasitwillgo.
#
To adjustthe air direction: holdair vent 2
in thecenter and move it up or down or to
theleftorright.
Adjustingthe rear air vents
Adjustingthe rear air vents
#
To open or close: turncontroller 2 coun‐
ter-clockwise or clockwise as farasitwillgo.
#
To adjustthe air direction: holdair vent 1
in thecenter and move it up or down or to
theleftorright.
170
Climatecontrol
#
To switchonthe ignition: press button 1
twice.
The indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched offagain if one of the
following conditionsismet:
R
Youdonot startthe vehicle within
15 minutes and thetransmission is in posi‐
tion j or theelectric parking brakeis
applied.
R
Youpress button 1 once.
Starting thevehicle
Starting thevehicle withthe start/stopbut‐
ton
&
DANGER Risk of deathcausedby
exhaustgases
Combustionengines emit poisonous exhaust
gases suchascarbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaustgases is hazardoustohealth
and leads to poisoning.
#
Neverleave theengine or,ifpresent,
theauxiliaryheating running in an
enclosedspace without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
material in theengine compartmentor
theexhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
mals or environmentalinfluences mayignite
if they come intocontact with hotparts of
theengine or exhaustsystem.
#
Therefore, checkregularly that there
arenoflammable materials in the
engine compartmentoronthe exhaust
system.
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is located in thevehicle and
theSmartKey batteryisnot discharged.
#
Shiftthe transmission to position j or i.
#
Depress thebrake pedal and press button
1 once.
#
If thevehicle does notstart:switchoff non-
essential consumersand press button 1
once.
#
If thevehicle still does notstart and the
Place the Key in the Marked Space See
Operator's Manual displaymessagealso
appearsinthe multifunction display: start
thevehicle in emergency operation mode.
%
Youcan switch offthe engine while driving
by pressing button 1 forabout threesec‐
onds or by pressing button 1 threetimes
within threeseconds. Be suretoobserve the
safetynotes under "Driving tips"
(/ page177).
Starting thevehicle withSmartKey in the
marked space (emergency operation mode)
If thevehicle does notstart and the Place the
Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
displaymessageappearsinthe multifunction
display, youcan startthe vehicle in emergency
operation mode.
Driving and parking
173
R
Vehicles traveling in front,oroncomingvehi‐
cles, can createwaves whichmay exceed the
maximumpermissible height of thewater
The brakingeffect of thebrakesisreduced after
fording. Brakecarefullywhile paying attention to
thetraffic conditionsuntil brakingpowerhas
been fully restored.
ECO start/stopfunction
Operationofthe ECOstart/stopfunction
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notesin
theSupplement.Otherwise, youmay fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
Vehicles without a48Von-boardelectrical
system (EQ Boosttechnology)
The engine is switched offautomaticallyinthe
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop aremet:
R
Youbrake thevehicle to astandstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
If youswitch on theHOLD function in transmis‐
sion position h or i,the engine will automati‐
cally stop in thefollowing situations:
R
Youstopbehind avehicle that is pulling
away.
R
Youstopatastopsign when thereisnovehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
Youturnthe steering wheel hardatalow
speed.
%
In transmission position k,the engine is
notswitched offautomaticallyevenwhen
theHOLD function is switched on.
The engine is restartedautomatically if:
R
Yourelease thebrake pedal in transmission
position h when theHOLD function is not
active.
R
Youengagetransmission position h or k.
R
Youdepress theaccelerator pedal.
R
An automatic engine startisrequired by the
vehicle.
ECOstart/stopfunction symbols in themulti‐
function display:
R
The è symbol (green) appearswhen the
vehicle is at astandstill: theengine was
switched offbythe ECOstart/stopfunction.
R
The ç symbol (yellow) appearswhen the
vehicle is at astandstill: notall vehicle condi‐
tions foranengine stop have been met.
R
Neither the è nor ç symbol appears
when thevehicle is at astandstill: an intelli‐
gent stop inhibitor wasdetected, e.g.astop
sign.
If theengine wasswitched offbythe ECOstart/
stop function and youleave thevehicle, awarn‐
ing tone sounds and theengine is notrestarted.
The Vehicle Ready to DriveSwitchthe Ignition
Off BeforeExiting displaymessagealso appears
in themultifunction display. If youdonot switch
offthe ignition, theignition is automatically
switched offafter threeminutes.
180
Driving and parking
Vehicles with a48Von-boardelectrical sys‐
tem(EQ Boost technology)
The engine is switched offautomaticallyinthe
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop aremet:
R
Youbrake thevehicle to astandstillintrans‐
mission position h or i.
R
Youdepress thebrake pedal when traveling
at alow speed.
If youswitch on theHOLD function or select a
different transmission positionthan k,the
engine will automatically stop in thefollowing
situations:
R
Youstopbehind avehicle that is pulling
away.
R
Youstopatastopsign when thereisnovehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
Youturnthe steering wheel hardatalow
speed.
The engine is restartedautomaticallyif:
R
Yourelease thebrake pedal in transmission
position h when theHOLD function is not
activeand one of thefollowing conditionsare
met:
-
Driveprogram A or ; is notselec‐
ted.
-
Driveprogram A or ; is selected
but thevehicle does notstart to move.
-
Driveprogram A or ; is selected,
thevehicle is moving at aspeed of more
that 15 mph(20 km/h) and glide mode is
notactivated.
R
Youengagetransmission position h or k.
R
Yourelease thebrake pedal, thevehicle is
notinglide mode and it starts to move on a
gentle downhillgradientataspeed below
2mph (3 km/h).
R
Youdepress theacceleratorpedal.
R
Youengagedrive program B.
R
An automatic engine startisrequired by the
vehicle.
ECOstart/stopfunction symbols in themulti‐
function display:
R
The è symbol (green) appearswhen the
vehicle is at astandstill: theengine was
switched offbythe ECOstart/stopfunction.
R
The ç symbol (yellow) appearswhen the
vehicle is at astandstill: notall vehicle condi‐
tions foranengine stop have been met.
R
Neither the è nor ç symbol appears
when thevehicle is at astandstill: an intelli‐
gent stop inhibitor wasdetected, e.g.astop
sign.
If theengine wasswitched offbythe ECOstart/
stop function and youleave thevehicle, awarn‐
ing tone sounds and theengine is notrestarted.
The Vehicle Ready to DriveSwitchthe Ignition
Off BeforeExiting displaymessagealso appears
in themultifunction display. If youdonot switch
offthe ignition, theignition is automatically
switched offafter threeminutes.
Deactivating or activating theECO start/
stopfunction
Driving and parking
181
#
Press button 1.
If indicator lamp 2 lights up, theECO start/
stop function is activated.
%
Depending on themodel and thevehicle
equipment, thebutton mayalso be located
at adifferent positioninthe center console.
ECO displayfunction
The ECOdisplaysummarizes your drivingchar‐
acteristics from thestart of thejourneytoits
completion and assists youinachievingthe
mosteconomical driving style.
Youcan influence consumption by doing thefol‐
lowing:
R
driving withparticular care
R
drivingthe vehicle in driveprogram ;
R
observing thegearshiftrecommendations
The inner segment will light up and theouter
segment will fill up when thefollowing driving
styleisadopted:
R
1 Moderateacceleration
R
2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R
3 Consistent speed
The innersegment will notlight up and theouter
segment will emptywhen thefollowing driving
styleisadopted:
R
1 Sporty acceleration
R
2 Heavy braking
R
3 Fluctuations in speed
The ECOdisplaywill showyou when youhave
driven economically:
R
The threeouter segmentsare completely fil‐
led simultaneously
R
The ECOdisplaylightsup
The additional rangeachievedasaresult of your
drivingstyle in comparison withadriverwitha
very sporty driving styleisshown under Bonus
182
Driving and parking
fr. Start.The rangedisplayed does notindicatea
fixedreduction in consumption.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of theDYNAMICSELECT switch
Plug-inhybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observethe notesin
theSupplement.Otherwise, youmay fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
Use theDYNAMICSELECT switchtochange
between thefollowing driveprograms:
R
=(Individual):individualsettings
R
C(Sport): sporty driving style
R
A(Comfort): comfortable and economical
drivingstyle
R
Vehicles with MAGIC BODY CONTROL:
N (CURVE): comfortable drivingwith
curve inclination function
R
;(Eco): particularly economical driving
style
%
The driveprogram selected appearsinthe
multifunction displayofthe on-boardcom‐
puter.
Depending on thedrive program, thefollowing
systems changetheir characteristics:
R
Drive:
-
Engineand transmission management
-
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
R
ESP
®
R
Electric powersteering
Selecting thedrive program
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards.
The driveprogram selected appears in the
multifunction display.
Driving and parking
183
Configuring driveprogram I
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
5
Individual
#
Select theindividual setting.
Switching theoperation feedback fordrive
programon/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Switch Notification for User on O or off ª.
When this function is active, acorresponding
messageisshown in themedia displaywhen
adrive programisselected withthe
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Displaying vehicledata
Multimediasystem:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Vehicle Data.
The vehicle dataisdisplayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Engine Data.
%
The actual (maximum) values that can be
achievedfor engineoutputand engine tor‐
quemay deviatefromthe certified values
within thecountry-specific guidelinesfor
permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No.
85 or country-specific guidelines).
Factorsthat can influence this are, forexam‐
ple:
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
%
The values displayedserve onlyasorienta‐
tion. The values forengine outputand
engine torque showninthe media display
maydeviatefromthe actual values.
Automatic transmission
DIRECTSELECT lever
Function of theDIRECT SELECT lever
&
WARNING Risk of accident duetoincor‐
rect gearshifting
If theengine speed is higher than theidle
speed and youengagethe transmission posi‐
tion h or k,the vehicle mayaccelerate
sharply.
#
If youengagethe transmission position
h or k when thevehicle is at a
standstill, alwaysdepress thebrake
pedal firmly and do notaccelerateat
thesame time.
184
Driving and parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children areleftunattendedinthe vehicle,
they could:
R
Opendoors,therebyendangering other
persons or road users.
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition,the children could also setthe
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
R
Releasing theparking brake.
R
Changing thetransmission position.
R
Startingthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
#
Keep thevehicle keyout of reachof
children.
Use theDIRECT SELECT levertoshiftthe trans‐
mission position. The current transmission posi‐
tionisdisplayed in themultifunction display.
j
Park position
k
Reversegear
i
Neutral
h
Driveposition
Engaging reversegear R
#
Depressthe brakepedal and push the
DIRECT SELECTleverupwards pastthe first
point of resistance.
The transmission positiondisplay k is
shown in themultifunction display.
Engaging neutralN
#
Depress thebrake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECTleverupordowntothe first
point of resistance.
The transmission positiondisplay i is
shown in themultifunction display.
Subsequently releasing thebrake pedal will
allowyou to move thevehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or towitaway.
Proceedasfollows if youwant theautomatic
transmission to remain in neutral i
i evenif
theignition is switched offorthe driver's
doorisopened:
#
Startthe vehicle.
Driving and parking
185
#
Depress thebrake pedal and engageneutral
i when thevehicle is stationary.
#
Release thebrake pedal.
#
Switchthe ignition off.
%
If youthen exit thevehicle leaving the
SmartKey in thevehicle, theautomatic trans‐
mission remains in neutral i.
Engaging parkpositionP
#
Observe thenotes on parking thevehicle
(/ page191).
#
Depress thebrake pedal until thevehicle is
stationary.
#
When thevehicle is stationary, press button
j.
Park position is onlyengaged when the
transmission positiondisplay j is shown in
themultifunction display. If no transmission
positiondisplay j appears, securethe vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position j is engaged automaticallyifone
of thefollowing conditionsismet:
R
Youswitch offthe ignition when thevehicle
is stationaryand thetransmission is in posi‐
tion h or k.
R
Youopen thedriver's door when thevehicle
is stationaryorwhen drivingataverylow
speed and thetransmission is in position h
or k.
%
To maneuverwithanopen driver's door,
open thedriver's door while stationaryand
engagetransmission position h or k
again.
Engagingdrive position D
#
Depress thebrake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECTleverdownpastthe first
point of resistance.
The transmission positiondisplay h is
shown in themultifunction display.
When theautomatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h,itshifts thegearsautomati‐
cally. This depends, among other things,onthe
following factors:
R
The selected driveprogram
R
The position of theacceleratorpedal
R
The driving speed
Manual gearshifting
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident duetoshifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If youshiftdownonslipperyroad surfaces to
increase theengine braking effect, thedrive
wheels maylose traction.
#
Do notshiftdownonslipperyroad sur‐
faces to increase theengine braking
effect.
186
Driving and parking
Neverrefuel using anyofthe following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline withmorethan 10%ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline withmorethan 3% methanolby
volume, e.g. M15, M30,M85,M100
R
Gasoline withadditives containingmetal
If youaccidentally refuel withthe wrong fuel:
#
Do notswitchthe ignition on.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
*
NOTE Do notuse dieseltorefuel vehi‐
cles withagasoline engine
If youhave accidentallyrefueled withthe
wrong fuel:
R
Do notswitch theignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter theengine.
Even small amounts of thewrong fuel
could result in damagetothe fuel system
and theengine. The repair costs arehigh.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Have thefuel tank and fuellines
drained completely.
*
NOTE Damage to thefuel system caused
by overfilled fuel tanks
#
Only fill thefuel tank untilthe pump
nozzle switches off.
*
NOTE Fuel mayspray out when you
remove thefuel pumpnozzle
#
Onlyfill thefuel tank untilthe pump
nozzle switches off.
Requirements
Plug-in-hybrid: forvehicles withagasoline
engine,observe thenotes in theSupplement.
Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dangers.
R
The vehicle is unlocked(/page65).
%
Do notget intothe vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could buildupagain.
Observe thenotes on operating fluids
(/ page482).
1
Fuel filler flap
2
Bracketfor fuel filler cap
3
Tire pressuretable
4
QR code forrescue card
5
Fuel type
190
Driving and parking
#
Press on thebackareaoffuel filler flap 1.
#
Turn thefuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it.
#
Insertthe fuel filler cap from above into
bracket 2.
#
Completely insert thepumpnozzle intothe
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
#
Onlyfill thefuel tank untilthe pumpnozzle
switches off.
#
Replace thecap on thefiller neckand turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#
Close fuel filler flap 1.
%
Close thefuel filler flap beforelockingthe
vehicle.
Parking
Parking thevehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insufficientlysecuredvehi‐
cle rolling away.
If thevehicle is notsecurely parkedsuffi‐
ciently,itcan roll away in an uncontrolled
wayevenataslight downhill gradient.
#
Ensurethat theparkedvehicle is always
properly secured againstrolling away as
follows:
R
On uphillordownhill gradients, turn
thefront wheels so that thevehicle
rolls towardsthe curb if it starts
moving.
R
Apply theparking brake.
R
Switchthe transmission to position
j.
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaustsystemparts
Flammable material suchasleaves, grass or
twigs mayigniteiftheycome intocontact
with hotparts of theexhaust system or
exhaustgas flow.
#
Park thevehicle so that no flammable
material can comeintocontact with hot
vehicle components.
#
In particular,donot parkondry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children leftunattendedinthe
vehicle
If children areleftunattendedinthe vehicle,
they could:
R
Opendoors,therebyendangering other
persons or road users.
R
Getout and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
Driving and parking
191
R
Operatevehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition,the children could also setthe
vehicle in motion, forexample by:
R
Releasing theparking brake.
R
Changing thetransmission position.
R
Startingthe vehicle.
#
Neverleave children unattendedinthe
vehicle.
#
When leaving thevehicle, alwaystake
thekey withyou and lockthe vehicle.
#
Keep thevehicle keyout of reachof
children.
*
NOTE Damage to thevehicle due to it
rolling away
#
Alwayssecurethe vehicle againstroll‐
ing away.
#
Bring thevehicle to astandstillbyapplying
thebrake pedal.
#
On uphill or downhill gradients, turnthe front
wheels so that thevehicle rolls towardsthe
curbifitstartsmoving.
#
Apply theelectric parking brake.
#
Engage transmission position j in astation‐
aryvehicle withthe brakepedal applied
(/ page186).
#
Switchoff theengine and theignition by
pressing button 1.
#
Release theservice brakeslowly.
#
Getout of thevehicle and lockit.
%
When youparkthe vehicle, youcan still
operate theside windows and thepanoramic
sliding sunroof forapproximately five
minutes if thedriver's door is closed.
Garagedoor opener
Programmingbuttonsfor thegaragedoor
opener
&
DANGER Risk of deathcausedby
exhaustgases
Combustionengines emit poisonous exhaust
gases suchascarbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaustgases is hazardoustohealth
and leads to poisoning.
192
Driving and parking
#
Hold remote control 5 at thesame angles
at various distances in front of theinside
rearviewmirror. Youshould test every posi‐
tion foratleast 25 seconds beforetrying
another position.
#
Note that someremote controls transmit
only foralimitedperiod, press button 6 on
remote control 5 againbeforetransmission
ends.
#
Align theantennaline of thedoor opener unit
withthe remote control.
%
Supportand additionalinformation on pro‐
gramming:
R
On thetoll free HomeLink
®
Hotline on
1-800-355-3515.
R
On theInternetathttps://
www.homelink.com/mercedes.
Opening or closing thedoor
Requirements:
R
The corresponding button is programmed to
operatethe door.
#
Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until
thedoor opens or closes.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellowafter
approximately20seconds:press and hold
thepreviously pressed buttonagain until the
door opens or closes.
Clearing thegaragedooropenermemory
#
Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.
The entirememory has been deleted.
Radio equipment approval numbersfor the
garage dooropener
Driving and parking
195
Vehicles with DrivingAssistancePackage:
The settings can be made whenthe ignition is
switched on.
The following settings areavailable:
R
Early
R
Medium
R
Late
#
Select asetting.
%
Your selection is retained when thevehicle is
next started.
Deactivating ActiveBrake Assist
%
It is recommended that youalwaysleave
ActiveBrake Assist activated.
#
Select Off.
The distance warning function and theauton‐
omous braking function aredeactivated.
Vehicles without DrivingAssistancePack‐
age: When thevehicle is next started, the
mediumsetting is automatically selected.
Vehicles with DrivingAssistancePack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assistisnot available.
When theignition is next started, the
mediumsetting is selected automatically and
EvasiveSteering Assistisavailable.
%
If ActiveBrake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in thestatus bar of the
multifunction display.
Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control
Cruise controlregulates thespeed to thevalue
selectedbythe driver.
If youacceleratetoovertake, forexample, the
stored speed is notdeleted. If youremove your
foot from theaccelerator pedal afterovertaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to thestoredspeed.
Cruise controlisoperated using thecorrespond‐
ing steering wheel buttons. Youcan storeany
speed above 15 mph(20 km/h)uptothe maxi‐
mum speed.
If youfail to adaptyour driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce therisk of an accident
nor override thelaws of physics. It cannottake
intoaccount road, weather or trafficconditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is
responsible forthe distance to thevehicle in
front, forvehicle speed, forbraking in good time
and forstaying in lane.
Mercedes‑AMGvehicles: Cruise control is
available up to amaximum speedof155 mph
(250 km/h).
Displays in themultifunction display
The status of cruise control and thestored
speed areshown in themultifunction display.
1
Cruise controlisselected
2
Speedissaved, cruise control is deactivated
3
Speed is saved, cruise control is activated
210
Driving and parking
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (RES).
The laststoredspeed is called up and main‐
tained by thevehicle.
If thelaststoredspeed has previouslybeen
deleted, thecurrently driven speed is stored.
%
When youswitch offthe vehicle, thelast
speed stored is cleared.
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressurepoint.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Pressrockerswitch 2 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond thepressurepoint.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5mph (10km/h).
or
#
Acceleratethe vehicle to thedesired speed.
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+).
If cruise control is activated and TrafficSign
Assist has detected aspeed restriction signwith
amaximum permissible speedand this is dis‐
playedinthe instrument cluster, youcan choose
between thefollowing options:
#
To adoptthe detected speed: press rocker
switch 3 up (RES).
The maximum permissible speed shown by
thetraffic sign is stored and thevehicle
maintains this speed.
#
To deactivatecruisecontrol: press rocker
switch 3 down (CNCL).
#
To switchoff cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 down.
%
If youbrake,deactivateESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
ActiveDistance AssistDISTRONIC
Function of ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICmaintains the
setspeed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in
front aredetected, theset distance is main‐
tained, if necessary, until thevehicle comes to a
halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐
ing on thedistance to thevehicle in front and
theset speed. The speed and distance to the
vehicle in front areset and savedonthe steering
wheel on vehicles without theDriving Assistance
Package, in therangebetween 15 mph
(20 km/h) and 120mph (200 km/h) and, on
212
Driving and parking
Deactivating ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC:
#
Press button 1.
ActivatingActive Distance AssistDISTRONIC
#
To activatewithout astoredspeed: press
rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-),
or press rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove
your foot from theaccelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored and maintained
by thevehicle.
or
#
To activatewithastoredspeed: press
rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot
from theaccelerator pedal.
%
By pressing rocker switch 4 up again, the
speed limitation shown in theinstrument
clusterwillbeadoptedbyActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONICorvariable limiter.
#
To acceptthe displayed speed restriction
when ActiveDistance AssistDISTRONIC
is active: press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The speed limit displayedinthe instrument
clusterisadoptedasthe stored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle
in front, but onlyuptothe stored speed.
Acceptingthe displayed speed restriction
when Distance AssistDISTRONIC is activa‐
ted
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The speed limit displayedinthe instrument
clusterisadoptedasthe stored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle
in front, but onlyuptothe stored speed.
Pulling away withActive Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#
Remove your foot from thebrake pedal and
activateActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC.
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
or
#
Depress theaccelerator pedal briefly and
firmly.
The functions of ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONICcontinue to be carried out.
Driving and parking
215
Deactivating ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC
&
WARNING Risk of accident duetoActive
Distance Assist DISTRONICstillbeing
activated when youleave thedriver's
seat
If youleave thedriver's seat while thevehicle
is being braked by ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIConly,the vehicle can roll away.
#
AlwaysdeactivateActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONICand securethe vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away
beforeyou leave thedriver's seat.
#
Press rocker switch 4 down (CNCL).
%
If youbrake,deactivateESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONICisdeactivated.
Increasing or reducing the speed
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to thepressurepoint.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Pressrockerswitch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to thepressurepoint and hold.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
incrementsof1mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond thepressurepoint.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5mph (10km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) and hold beyond thepressurepoint.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
incrementsof5mph (10km/h).
Reducing or increasingthe specified dis‐
tance from thevehicle in front
#
Press rocker switch 2 up or down.
Function of ActiveSpeed Limit Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and onlyavailable in conjunction withthe
Driving AssistancePackage.
If achangeinthe speed limit is detected and
automatic adoption of speed limits is activated,
thenew speed is automaticallyadoptedasthe
stored speed (/ page253).
216
Driving and parking
The driven speed is adjustedwhen thevehicle is
levelwiththe trafficsignatthe latest. In the
case of signs indicating entryintoanurban area,
thespeed is adaptedaccording to thespeed
permitted within theurban area. The speed limit
displayinthe Instrument Displayisalwaysupda‐
tedwhen thevehicle is levelwiththe traffic sign.
If thereisnospeed restriction on an unlimited
stretchofroad (e.g. on afreeway), therecom‐
mended speed is automaticallyadoptedasthe
stored speed. The system uses thespeed stored
on an unlimited stretchofroad as therecom‐
mended speed. If youdonot alter thestored
speed on an unlimited stretchofroad, therec‐
ommended speed is 80 mph(130km/h).
If ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIChas been
putintopassive mode by pressing theaccelera‐
torpedal, onlyspeed limits which arehigher
than theset speed areadopted.
ActiveSpeed LimitAssist is onlyanaid. The
driver is responsible forkeeping asafedistance
from thevehicle in front, forvehicle speed and
forbraking in good time. The maximumpermissi‐
ble speedalsodepends on factorssuchasthe
road surface and trafficconditions.
System limits
Temporaryspeed restrictions (e.g.for acertain
timeordue to weather conditions) cannotbe
properly detected by thesystem. The maximum
permissible speed applying to avehicle witha
trailer is notdetected by thesystem. In these sit‐
uations youmustadjustyour speed yourself.
&
WARNING Risk of accident duetoActive
Speed LimitAssist adaptingthe vehicle's
speed
The speed adoptedbyActiveSpeed Limit
Assist maybetoo high or incorrect in some
individualcases, such as:
R
In thewet or in fog
R
When towing atrailer
#
Ensurethat thedrivenspeed complies
withtraffic regulations.
#
Adjustthe driving speed to suit current
trafficand weather conditions.
Function of route-basedspeedadaptation
%
The following function is country-dependent
and onlyavailable in conjunction withthe
Driving AssistancePackage.
When ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisacti‐
vated, thevehicle speed will be adjustedaccord‐
ingly to therouteeventsahead. Depending on
thedrive programselected, thevehicle negoti‐
ates arouteevent aheadinafuel-saving, com‐
fortable or dynamic manner.When theroute
event hasbeenpassed, thevehicle accelerates
again to thestoredspeed. The setdistance to
thevehicle in front, vehicles detected aheadand
speed restrictions aheadare takenintoaccount.
Route-based speedadaptationcan be config‐
ured in themultimedia system (/ page218).
Thefollowing routeevents aretaken into
account:
R
Bends
R
T-intersections,traffic circlesand toll sta‐
tions
R
Turnsand exits
Drivingand parking
217
%
When thetoll stationisreached, ActiveDis‐
tance Assist DISTRONICadoptsthe speed as
thestoredspeed.
Also, thespeed is reduced if theturnsignal indi‐
cator to changelanesisswitched on and one of
thefollowing situations is detected:
R
Turning offatintersections
R
Drivingonslowing-down lanes
R
Drivingonlanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible forchoosing theright
speed and observing other road users. This
applies in particular to intersections,trafficcir‐
clesand trafficlights, as route-based speed
adaptationdoesnot brakethe vehicle to astand‐
still.
When routeguidance is active, thefirst speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the
turnsignalindicatorisswitched on, theselected
routeisconfirmed and further speed adjustment
is activated.
Speed adjustmentiscanceled in thefollowing
cases:
R
If theturnsignal indicator is switched off
beforethe routeevent.
R
If thedriverdepresses theaccelerator or
brakepedal during theprocess.
System limits
Route-based speedadaptationdoesnot take
right of wayregulations intoaccount.The driver
is responsible forcomplying withroad traffic
regulations and driving at asuitable speed.
In difficultconditions,for example unclear roads,
lane narrowing, wetroad surfaces, snoworice,
or whendriving with atrailer,the speed adjust‐
ment made by thesystemmay notalwaysbe
suitable. In these situationsthe driver must
intervene accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speedadjustment
Route-based speedadjustmentmightmal‐
function or be temporarilyunavailable in the
following situations:
R
If thedriverdoes notfollowthe calcula‐
tedroute
R
If map dataisnot up to dateoravailable
R
In road construction areas
R
In badweather or road conditions
R
If theacceleratorpedalisdepressed
R
In theevent of electronically displayed
speed limitations
#
Adjustthe speed to thetraffic situation.
Settingroute-based speed adjustment
Requirements:
R
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisactiva
ted.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Speed Adjustment
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
218
Driving and parking
ActiveSteering Assist
Function of ActiveSteering Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and onlyavailable in conjunction withthe
Driving AssistancePackage.
ActiveSteering Assistisonlyavailable up to a
speed of 130mph (210 km/h).The system helps
youtostayinthe center of thelane by means of
moderatesteering interventions. Depending on
thespeed driven, ActiveSteering Assistuses the
vehicles ahead and lane markings as arefer‐
ence.
%
Depending on thecountry,inthe lower
speed rangeActiveSteering Assistcan use
thesurrounding trafficasareference. If nec‐
essary, ActiveSteering Assistcan then also
provide assistance when driving away from
thecenter of thelane to form arescue lane,
forexample.
When thesystemisactively steering, the à
symbol is shown in green in themultifunction
display.
If thedetection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, ActiveSteering Assist
switches to passivemode. The system provides
no supportinthis case. During thetransition
from activetopassivestatus,the à symbol is
shown as enlargedand flashing. Once thesys‐
temispassive, the à symbol is shown as
gray in themultifunction display.
Steering and touchdetection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐
vene at anytime to correct thecourse of the
vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must
expect achangefromactivetopassivemode or
vice versaatany time.
If thesystemdetects that thedriverhas not
steered thevehicle foraconsiderableperiod of
time or has removedtheir hands from thesteer‐
ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐
play 1 appearsinthe multifunction display. If
thedriverstilldoes notsteer thevehicle, or
gives no confirmation to thesystem, awarning
tone sounds in additiontothe visual warning
message.
The warning is notissued, or is stopped, when
thedrivergives confirmationtothe system:
R
The driver steersthe vehicle.
R
The driver presses asteering wheel button or
operates TouchControl.
If ActiveSteering Assistdetects that asystem
limit has been reached, avisual warning is
issued and awarning tone sounds.
ActiveSteering Assistisonlyanaid. The driver is
responsible forthe distance to thevehicle in
front, forvehicle speed, forbraking in good time
and forstaying in lane. Beforechanging lanes,
thedrivermustmakesurethat theneighboring
lane is free (glance overthe shoulder).
Driving and parking
219
System limits
ActiveSteering Assisthas alimited steering tor‐
quefor lateral guidance. In some cases,the
steering interventionisnot sufficienttokeep the
vehicle in thelane or to drivethrough exits.
The system maybeimpaired or maynot function
in thefollowing instances:
R
There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray,greatlyvarying ambient
light or strong shadows on theroadway.
R
Thereisglare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
Insufficient road illumination.
R
The windshield is dirty,fogged up, damaged
or coveredinthe vicinity of thecamera, e.g.
by asticker.
R
No, or severalunclear,lane markings are
presentfor one lane, or themarkingschange
quickly, e.g. in aconstruction area or at inter‐
sections.
R
The lane markings arewornaway, darkor
coveredup, e.g. by dirtorsnow.
R
The distance to thevehicle in front is too
small and thelane markingsthus cannotbe
detected.
R
The road is narrow and winding.
R
Thereare obstaclesonthe lane or projecting
out intothe lane, suchasobjectmarkers.
The system does notprovide assistance in the
following conditions:
R
On tightbends and when turning.
R
When crossingintersections.
R
At trafficcirclesortoll stations.
R
When activelychanging lane without switch‐
ing on theturnsignal indicator.
R
When thetirepressureistoo low.
Depending on theselected vehicle settings,
ActiveSteering Assistmay be unavailable.
Observe thestatus displayofActiveSteering
Assistinthe multifunction display
(/ page223).
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assistunexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If thesystem limits of ActiveSteering Assist
arereached thereisnoguarantee that the
system will remain activeorwillkeep the
vehicle in lane.
#
Alwayskeep your hands on thesteering
wheel and observe thetraffic carefully.
#
Alwayssteer thevehicle paying atten‐
tion to trafficconditions.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assistunexpectedly intervenes
Amalfunctioninthe detection of lane mark‐
ings and objects can occur.
This could cause unexpected steering inter‐
vention.
#
Steer according to trafficconditions.
ActivatingActive Steering Assist
Requirements
220
Driving and parking
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but notintervening.
R
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisactiva
ted.
#
If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2.
Function of ActiveLaneChangeAssist
%
Thefollowing function is country-dependent
and onlyavailable in conjunction withthe
Driving AssistancePackage.
ActiveLaneChangeAssist supports thedriver
when changing lanesbyapplying steering torque
if thedriveroperates aturnsignal indicator.
Assistance when changing lanesisprovidedifall
thefollowing conditionsare met:
R
Youare drivingonafreewayorroad with
multiple lanes in thedirection of travel.
R
The neighboring lane is separated by abro‐
kenlanemarking.
R
No vehicle is detected in theadjacentlane.
R
The driven speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110mph (180 km/h).
R
ActiveLaneChangeAssist is switched on in
themultimedia system.
R
ActiveSteering Assistisswitched on and
active.
If no vehicle is detected in theadjacentlane and
alane changeispermitted, thelane change
beginsafter thedriverhas activated theturnsig‐
nal indicator.This is shown to thedriverwitha
green arrow 2 next to thesteering wheel sym‐
bol. The Lane Change to the Left messagealso
appears, forexample. If ActiveLaneChange
Assist has been activated withthe turnsignal
indicator but alane changeisnot immediately
possible, agrayarrow 1 appearsnexttothe
steering wheel symbol, whichremainsgreen.
When thelane changeassistance starts,the turn
signal indicator is automaticallyactivated along
withthe displayinthe multifunction display.
Driving and parking
221
If alane changeisnot possible, thearrow fades
out afterafew secondsand anew lane change
mustbeinitiated. An immediatelane changeis
only possible on freewaysectionswithout speed
limits.
If thesystemisimpaired, ActiveLaneChange
Assist maybecanceled.Ifitiscanceled,the
Lane Change Canceled messageappearsinthe
multifunction displayand awarning tone sounds.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐
ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
LaneChange Assist cannotalwaysdetect
clearly if theadjacentlane is free.
The lane changemightbeinitiated although
theadjacentlane is notfree.
#
Beforechanging lanes, makesurethat
theneighboring lane is free and thereis
no danger to other road users.
#
Monitor thelane change.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Lane
ChangeAssist unexpectedlystops func‐
tioning
If thesystem limitations forLane Change
Assisthave been reached, thereisnoguar‐
antee that thesystem will remain active.
Lane ChangeAssistcannotthen assistyou
by applying steering torques.
#
Alwaysmonitor thelane changeand
keep your hands on thesteering wheel.
Observe thetraffic conditionsand steer
and/or brakeifnecessary.
System limits
The system limitations of ActiveSteering Assist
apply to ActiveLaneChangeAssist
(/ page219).
Thesystemmay also be impaired or maynot
function in thefollowing situations:
R
The sensorsinthe rear bumper aredirty,
damaged or coveredbyastickerorice and
snow, forexample.
R
The exterior lighting shows afault.
%
The ActiveLaneChangeAssist sensors
adjustautomaticallywhile acertain distance
is being driven afterthe vehicle has been
delivered. ActiveLaneChangeAssist is
unavailable or onlypartiallyavailable during
this teach-in process; no arrowappearsnext
to the Ø ActiveSteering Assistsymbol
when theturnsignal indicator is activated.
Activating/deactivatingActive LaneChange
Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
#
Select Lane Change Assist.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Function of ActiveEmergency Stop Assist
If thedrivercontinuallyignores thevisual or
acoustic warning to put their hands on thesteer‐
ing wheel, the Beginning EmergencyStop mes‐
sageappearsinthe multifunction display. If the
driver still does notrespond, ActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONICreduces thespeed. The vehi‐
cle is decelerated in stages to astandstill.
222
Drivingand parking
Depending on thecountry,atspeeds below
40 mph(60 km/h) thehazardwarning lights
switchonautomatically.
When thevehicle is stationary, thefollowing
actions arecarried out:
R
The vehicle is secured withthe electric park‐
ing brake
R
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisended
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
If possible, an emergency callisplacedto
theMercedes-Benz emergency callcenter
The driver can cancelthe deceleration at any
time by performing one of thefollowing actions:
R
Steering
R
Braking or accelerating
R
Pressing asteering-wheel button
R
Operating TouchControl
R
Activating or deactivating ActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONIC
Overview of ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC displays in theinstrument clus‐
ter
The assistance graphicand thestatus display
showthe status of thefollowing functionsinthe
instrument cluster:
R
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Route-based speedadaptation
R
ActiveSteering Assist
Assistant display
1
Route-based speedadaptation: typeofroute
event
2
Vehicle in front
3
Distance indicator
4
Setspecifieddistance
5
Own vehicle
Driving and parking
223
Setting thevehicle level
&
WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle levelistoo high
If youdrive at ahigher vehicle level, thedriv‐
ing characteristicsmay be impaired due to
thehigher vehicle center of gravity.
The vehicle can driftoutwards, forexample,
when steering or cornering.
#
Alwayschoose avehicle levelwhichis
suited to thedriving styleand theroad
surface conditions.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
Whenlowering thevehicle, people could
become trapped if their limbs arebetween
thevehicle body and thetires or underneath
thevehicle.
#
Makesurenoone is underneaththe
vehicle or in theimmediatevicinityof
thewheel arches when thevehicle is
being lowered.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
Vehicles with AIRMATIC or levelcontrol:
When youunload luggageorleave thevehi‐
cle, thevehicle firstrises slightly and then
returns to theset levelshortlyafterwards.
Youoranyone else in thevicinityofthe
wheelarches or theunderbody could thus
become trapped.
The vehicle can also be loweredafter being
locked.
#
When leaving thevehicle, makesure
that nobody is in thevicinityofthe
wheelarches or theunderbody.
*
NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering
Partsofthe body could be damaged when
thevehicle is lowered.
#
Makesurethat thereare no obstacles
suchascurbs underneathorinthe
immediatevicinity of thebody when the
vehicle is being lowered.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
The vehicle mustnot be moving faster than
50 mph(80 km/h).
Raising thevehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicatorlamp 2 lights up.
228
Driving and parking
The vehicle is settothe high level.
Your selection is saved.
The vehicle is loweredagain in thefollowing sit‐
uations:
R
When driving faster than 75 mph
(120 km/h).
R
When driving between 50 mph(80 km/h)
and 75 mph(120km/h) forapproximately
threeminutes.
R
Afterselecting adrive program using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjustedtothe height of thelast
activedrive program.
Lowering thevehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
adjustedtothe height of thelastactivedrive
program.
MAGIC BODY CONTROL
MAGIC BODY CONTROLfunction
MAGIC BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic
suspension withvariable dampingfor improved
driving comfort. The all-round levelcontrol sys‐
temensures thebestpossible suspension and
constant groundclearance, evenwithaladen
vehicle. When driving at speed, thevehicle is
loweredautomaticallytoimprove driving safety
and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension
tuning is adjusteddependingonthe road sur‐
face, vehicle load and thedrive program selec‐
ted. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects
areasofunevenness in theroad beforeyou drive
overthem by means of amultifunction camera.
This reduces chassis movements. Youalso have
theoption of manually adjusting thevehicle
level.
The damping is tuned individuallyfor eachwheel
and is affected by thefollowing factors:
R
The driving style, e.g. sporty
R
The road condition,e.g.bumps
R
The individual selectionofthe driveprogram:
C (Sport), A (Comfort), N (CURVE)
or ; (Economy)
MAGIC BODY CONTROL includesthe following
componentsand functions:
R
ActiveBodyControl ABC
R
ROAD SURFACE SCAN
R
Curve inclination function CURVE
R
Automatic levelcontrol system
R
Automatic vehicle stabilizationinthe event of
sidewinds
R
Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
R
Manuallyselectable high-levelsetting for
greaterground clearance
R
DYNAMIC SELECT switchand levelbutton
Drivingand parking
229
Available suspension settings
Driveprogram Characteristics
C (Sport)
R
The suspension tuning is firmer.
R
When driving at speeds between 40 mph(65 km/h) and 87 mph(140km/h) thevehicle is loweredsteadily
and remains at this leveluptothe maximum vehicle speed.
R
When returning to speeds between 87 mph(140km/h) and 40 mph(65 km/h) thevehicle is raised again.
R
ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated.
A (Comfort)
R
The suspension tuningiscomfortable.
R
The vehicle is settothe normal level.
R
ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.
N (CURVE)
R
The suspension tuning is comfortable.
R
The vehicle is settothe normal level.
R
The curve inclination function is active.
R
ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.
; (Economy)
R
The suspension tuning is comfortable.
R
The vehicle is settothe normal level.
R
ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated.
230
Drivingand parking
Crosswind Assist
Crosswind stabilizationhas thefollowing charac‐
teristics:
R
The stabilizationoperates by changing wheel
loads through adjustingthe ABC spring
struts.
R
Disruptions when drivingstraightahead are
reduced.
R
Countersteering is supported.
R
Crosswind Assistisactiveatvehicle speeds
between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 130mph
(210 km/h) when driving straight ahead or
cornering slightly.
Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN
%
This function is notavailable in all countries.
The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitorsthe
road in frontofyour vehicle using amultifunc‐
tion camera 1.ROADSURFACE SCAN detects
unevenness in theroad surface, e.g. bumps,
beforethe vehicle drives overthem. Chassis
movements arereduced and driving comfortis
increased.
ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automaticallyactivated
if thefollowing conditionsare met:
R
Driveprogram A (Comfort) or N
(CURVE)isselected.
R
The vehicle is settothe normal level.
R
Youare drivingataspeedbetween 4mph
(7 km/h) and 112mph (180 km/h).
System limits
ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the
following situations or can stop functioning:
R
If theroadway is insufficiently lit, e.g. at
night.
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray,ifthereis
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambientlight.
R
If thewindshield in theareaofmultifunction
camera 1 is dirty,fogged up, damaged or
covered.
R
If theroad surface hasnooptic structureor
reflectslight.
R
If youare drivingtoo close to thevehicle in
front.
Driving and parking
231
R
If sections of theroutehave averysmall
radius of curvature.
R
During abrupt driving maneuvers, e.g. heavy
braking or sudden acceleration.
Observe thenotes on cleaning themultifunction
camera(/page421).
Setting thevehicle level
&
WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle levelistoo high
If youdrive at ahigher vehicle level, thedriv‐
ing characteristicsmay be impaired due to
thehigher vehicle center of gravity.
The vehicle can driftoutwards, forexample,
when steering or cornering.
#
Alwayschoose avehicle levelwhichis
suited to thedriving styleand theroad
surface conditions.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
Whenlowering thevehicle, people could
become trapped if their limbs arebetween
thevehicle body and thetires or underneath
thevehicle.
#
Makesurenoone is underneaththe
vehicle or in theimmediatevicinityof
thewheel arches when thevehicle is
being lowered.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
duetothe vehicle lowering
Vehicles with AIRBODYCONTROLor
levelcontrol system: when youunload lug‐
gage or leave thevehicle, thevehicle first
rises slightly and then returns to theset level
shortlyafterwards.
Youoranyone else in thevicinityofthe
wheelarches or theunderbody could thus
become trapped.
The vehicle can also be loweredafter being
locked.
#
When leaving thevehicle, makesure
that nobody is in thevicinity of the
wheel arches or theunderbody.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
The vehicle mustnot be moving faster than
75 mph(120km/h).
R
Onlylowerthe vehicle: when thevehicle is
stationary, all thedoorshave to be closed.
232
Driving and parking
Raising thevehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
The vehicle is settothe high level.
Your selection is saved.
The vehicle is loweredagain in thefollowing sit‐
uations:
R
When driving faster than 75 mph
(120 km/h).
R
When driving between 50 mph(80 km/h)
and 75 mph(120km/h) forapproximately
threeminutes.
R
Afterselecting adrive program using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjustedtothe height of thelast
activedrive program.
Lowering thevehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicatorlamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
adjustedtothe height of thelastactivedrive
program.
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC
Function of Parking AssistPARKTRONIC
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is an electronic
parkingassistancesystem withultrasound. It
monitorsthe area around your vehicle using mul‐
tiple sensors 1 on thefront bumper and on the
rear bumper.Parking AssistPARKTRONIC shows
youthe distance betweenyour vehicle and a
detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
notasubstitutefor your attentiontothe sur‐
roundings. The responsibility forsafemaneuver‐
ing and parking remains withyou. Makesure
that thereare no persons, animals or objects in
Driving and parking
233
themaneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in/exitingparking spaces.
In thestandardsetting,anintermittent warning
tone sounds from adistanceofapproximately
1.0ft(0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐
imately3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A
continuouswarning tone sounds from adistance
of approximately0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn
Early setting in themultimedia system, thewarn‐
ing tones forfront and side impact protection
can be settosound at agreater distance of
approximately3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m) on thesides (/ page238).
%
The Warn Early setting is alwaysactivefor
therear of thevehicle.
If Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deactivated,
ActiveParking Assistisunavailable.
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC displayinthe
multimedia system
Vehicles withActiveParking Assistwithout a
360°Camera
Vehicles withActiveParking Assistand a360°
Camera
If ActiveParking Assistisdeactivated and an
obstacle is detected in thepathofthe vehicle, a
pop-up windowfor Parking AssistPARKTRONIC
1 appearsinthe multimedia system at speeds
below6mph (10km/h).
The color of theindividual segmentsofthe warn‐
ing displayisbased on thedistance to thedetec‐
tedobstacle:
R
Yellowsegments: obstaclesatadistance
between approx.2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft
(1.0 m)
234
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
bol appearsinthe multifunction dis‐
play.
Rear segments 1 or all-roundseg‐
ments 2 light up red. At thesame
time, awarning tone sounds for
approximatelytwo seconds every time
thevehicle is started. The é symbol
appearsinthe multifunction display.
The sensorsare dirty.
#
Clean thesensorsand observe thenotes on careofvehicle parts (/ page421).
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC hasbeen deactivateddue to amalfunction.
#
Startthe vehicle again.
#
If theproblem persists, consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Function of thepassiveside impact protec‐
tion
Passiveside impact protection is an additional
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC functionwhich
warnsthe driver about obstaclesatthe side of
thevehicle. Awarning is issued when obstacles
aredetected between thefront and rear detec‐
tion range. In orderfor an objectonthe side to
be detected, thesensorsinthe front and rear
bumper mustfirst detect theobjectwhile you
aredrivingpastit.
During theparking procedureormaneuvering,
objects aredetected as thevehicle drives past.
If yousteer in thedirection of adetected obsta‐
cle and thereisarisk of alateral collision, a
warning is issued. The segmentsonthe sides
light up yelloworred, depending on thedistance
to theobstacle.
Segment colordependingondistance
ColorLateral distance
YellowApprox.1.0 -2.0 ft
(30 -60cm)
RedApprox.<1.0ft
(30 cm)
In order forlateral front or rear segmentstobe
displayed, thevehicle mustfirst traveladistance
of at leasthalfofthe vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has traveled thelengthofthe vehicle, all
236
Driving and parking
If indicator lamp 2 is notlit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONICisactive. If theindicator lampislit
and the é symbol appearsinthe multifunc‐
tion display, Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is not
active.
#
Pressbutton 1.
%
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when thevehicle is started.
Adjustingthe warning tones of Parking
AssistPARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera &Parking
5
Set Warning Tones
Adjustingthe volumeofthe warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Volume.
#
Setavalue.
Adjustingthe pitchofthe warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Pitch.
Setavalue.
Specifying thestarting point forthe warning
tones
Youcan specify whether theParking Assist
PARKTRONICwarning tones shouldcommence
when thevehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
#
Select Warn Early.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Activating/deactivatingaudiofadeout
Youcan specify whether thevolume of amedia
source in themultimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking AssistPARKTRONIC gives
an audible warning.
#
Select Audio Fadeout DuringWarning Tones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Reversing camera
Function of therear view camera
238
Driving and parking
When youengagereversegear,the imagefrom
rear viewcamera 1 is shown in themultimedia
system. Dynamic guide lines showthe paththe
vehicle will take withthe steering wheel in its
current position. Thishelps youtoorient your‐
self and to avoid obstacleswhenbackingup.
The rear viewcameraisonly an aid. It is nota
substitutefor your attentiontothe surroundings.
The responsibility forsafemaneuvering and
parking remains withyou. Makesurethat there
arenopersons, animals or objects etc., in the
maneuvering area whilemaneuvering and park‐
ing.
The guide lines in themedia displayshowthe
distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐
played onlyapply to road level.
Youcan select from thefollowing views:
R
Normal view
R
Wide-angle view
The area behind thevehicle is displayedasa
mirrorimage, as in theinside rearviewmirror.
Cameraviews in themultimedia system
Normal view
1
Yellowlane markingthe course thetires will
take at thecurrent steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellowguide line, vehicle width(driven sur‐
face) depending on thecurrent steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Redguide line at adistance of approximately
1.0in(0.3 m) from therear area
4
Yellowwarning indicator of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at adistance
betweenapproximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
Driving and parking
239
5
Redwarning displayofParking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles areveryclose
(approximately1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6
Orangewarning displayofParking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles areamedium dis‐
tance away (between approximately1.0 ft
(0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
%
If theentiresystemfails, theinner segments
of thewarning displayare shown in red. The
indicator lamponthe PARKTRONICbutton
lightsupand the é symbol appearsin
themultifunction display.
If thesystemfails at therear,the rear seg‐
ments areshown in redwhen backingup
and arehidden when driving forwards.
When ActiveParking Assistisactive, the
lane markings aredisplayedingreen.
If Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deactivated,
thewarning displayfades out.
Wide-angle view
System failure
If thereisnooperational readiness, thefollowing
messageappearsinthe multimedia system:
System limits
The rear viewcamerawill notfunction or will
only partiallyfunction in thefollowing situations:
R
The trunk lid is open.
R
Thereisheavy rain, snoworfog.
R
The ambient light conditions arepoor,e.g. at
night.
R
The cameralens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
gedup. Observe thenotes on cleaning the
rear viewcamera(/page421).
R
Cameras, or vehicle componentsinwhich
thecameras areinstalled, aredamaged. In
this event, have thecameras, their positions
and their setting checkedataqualified spe‐
cialistworkshop.
The field of vision and other functions of therear
viewcameramay be restricted duetoadditional
accessories on therear of thevehicle (e.g.
license platebracket or bicycle rack).
%
The displaycontrastmay be impaired due to
incident sunlightorother light sources. In
this case, payparticular attention.
240
Driving and parking
%
Have thedisplayrepaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
360°camera
Function of the360° Camera
The 360°Camera is asystem that consists of
four cameras. The cameras coverthe immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g.when parkingoratexitswithreduced visibil‐
ity.
The views of the360° Cameraare alwaysavaila‐
ble when drivingforwardsuptoaspeedof
approx.10mph (16km/h) and when backing
up.
The 360° Cameraisonlyanaid. It is notasub‐
stitutefor your attentiontothe surroundings.
The responsibility forsafemaneuvering and
parking remains withyou. Makesurethat there
arenopersons, animals or objects etc., in the
maneuvering area whilemaneuvering and park‐
ing.
The system evaluates images from thefollowing
cameras:
R
Rear viewcamera
R
Front camera
R
Twoside cameras in theoutside mirrors
Viewsofthe 360°Camera
Youcan select from different views:
1
Wide-angle view, front
2
Topviewwithimagefromthe front camera
3
Topviewwithimages from theside cameras
in theoutside mirrors
4
Wide-angle view, rear
5
Topviewwithimagefromthe rear viewcam‐
era
6
Topviewwithtrailer view(vehicles witha
trailer hitch)
Topview
1
Lane indicating theroutethe vehicle will
take at thecurrent steering wheel angle
2
Yellowwarning displayofParking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at adistance of
approximately3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
3
Your vehicle from above
If thedistance to theobjectlessens, thecolor of
warning display 2 changes. From adistance of
Driving and parking
241
approximately2.0 ft (0.6 m) thewarning display
is shown in orange. From adistance of approx‐
imately1.0 ft (0.3 m) thewarning displayis
shown in red.
When Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is operational
andnoobjectisdetected, thesegmentsofthe
warning displayare shown in gray.
%
If theentiresystemfails, thesegmentsof
thewarning displayare shown in red. The
indicator lamponthe PARKTRONICbutton
lightsupand the é symbol appearsin
themultifunction display.
If thesystemfails at therear,the displayof
thesegmentschanges as follows:
R
The rear segmentsare shown in red
when backingup.
R
The rear segmentsare hiddenwhen driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking AssistPARKTRONIC is deactivated,
thewarning displayfades out (/ page235).
Guidelines
1
Yellowlane markingthe course thetires will
take at thecurrent steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellowguide line, vehicle width(driven sur‐
face) depending on thecurrent steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Redguide line at adistance of approximately
1.0in(0.3 m) from therear area
4
Markatadistance of approx.3.3 ft (1.0 m)
%
When ActiveParking Assistisactive, the
lane markings aredisplayedingreen.
The guide lines in themultimedia system dis‐
playshowthe distances to your vehicle. The
distances only apply to road level.
Side viewofthe mirrorcameras
The sidesofthe vehicle can be seen in this view.
1
Guide line of external vehicle dimensions
withoutside mirrors folded out
2
Markerofthe wheel contact points
System failure
If thereisnooperational readiness, thefollowing
messageappearsinthe media display:
242
Driving and parking
R
If theroad condition is poor (unevenroad
surface or potholes).
R
If thereisastrongsidewind.
R
If youadoptasporty drivingstyle (highcor‐
nering speeds or high ratesofacceleration).
R
If theSteering Assistfunction of ActiveDis‐
tance Assist DISTRONICisactive.
R
If thetime has been setincorrectly.
R
In active driving situations, if youchange
lanes and vary your speedfrequently.
The ATTENTION ASSISTtiredness or alertness
assessment is deletedand restartedwhen con‐
tinuing thejourneyinthe following situations:
R
If youswitch offthe engine.
R
If youunfastenyour seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. changing driversortaking
abreak).
SettingATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting options
#
Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting arestarea
#
Select Suggest RestArea.
#
Activate O or deactivate thefunction ª.
If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention,itsuggests a
rest area in thevicinity.
#
Selectasuggestedrestarea: youare gui‐
ded to theselected rest area.
TrafficSign Assist
Function of TrafficSign Assist
Since TrafficSign Assist also uses thedata
stored in thenavigation system, it can update
thedisplayinthe following situations without
detecting trafficsigns:
R
Whenthe vehicle changes roads, e.g.ona
highwayentry or exit road.
Drivingand parking
251
R
It is dark.
1
Night View Assist display
2
Standbysymbolfor activepedestrian detec‐
tion
3
Highlighting
4
Pedestrian detected
If pedestriandetection is active, standbysymbol
2 appears. Thereisnoseparatesymbolfor ani‐
mals. Detected pedestrians or animalsare high‐
lighted by acolor frame.
ActivatingordeactivatingNight View Assist
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been startedorthe ignition
is switched on.
R
The light switchisinthe à or L posi‐
tion.
R
Reversegear has notbeen engaged.
#
Press button 1.
The appropriateNightViewAssist display
appearsinthe multifunction display.
%
The infrared headlamps aredeactivated at
speeds below3mph(5km/h).The Night
View imagecontinues to be displayeduntil
youswitch it offbypressing button 1.
Switching automatic activation on/off
Requirements:
R
Pedestrian detection is active (/ page254).
R
The roadway is notlit.
R
The speed is at least37mph (60 km/h).
If all therequirements arefulfilled, thenight
vision imageisautomaticallyshown in themulti‐
function displayassoon as people or animals
aredetected.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Aut. Night View Assist
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Spotlight function
The spotlight function is an additional function
forNight View Assist.Itruns in thebackground
and flashes theheadlamps at detected persons
Driving and parking
255
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
ActiveBlind SpotAssist
ActiveBlind SpotAssist does notreact to the
following:
R
If vehicles overtaketoo closelyonthe
side, placing them in theblind spotarea
R
Vehicles approaching and overtakingyou
at agreatly different speed
As aresult, ActiveBlind SpotAssist maynei‐
ther givewarningsnor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
#
Alwayspay careful attention to thetraf‐
ficsituation and maintainasafedis‐
tance at theside of thevehicle.
If acourse-correcting brakeapplication occurs,
thered warning lampflashes in theoutside mir‐
rorand awarning tone sounds. In addition, adis‐
play 1 indicatingthe danger of aside collision
appearsinthe multifunction display.
In rare cases, thesystemmay makeaninappro‐
priatebrake application. This brakeapplication
maybeinterruptedatany time if yousteer
slightlyinthe oppositedirection or accelerate.
System limits
Either acourse-correcting brakeapplication
appropriate to thedriving situation,ornoneat
all, mayoccur in thefollowing situations:
R
Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
R
Avehicle approaches tooclosely on theside.
R
Youhaveadoptedasporty driving stylewith
high cornering speeds.
R
Youbrake or acceleratesignificantly.
R
Adriving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP
®
or ActiveBrake Assist.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
Aloss of tirepressureorafaulty tireis
detected.
Activating/deactivatingBlind SpotAssistor
ActiveBlind SpotAssist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Blind Spot Assist
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
258
Driving and parking
ActiveLaneKeeping Assist
Function of ActiveLaneKeeping Assist
ActiveLaneKeeping Assistmonitorsthe area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera 1.Itservestoprotect youagainstunin‐
tentionally leavingyour lane. Youwill be warned
by vibration pulses in thesteering wheel and gui‐
ded by acourse-correcting brakeapplication
back intoyour lane.
Youare warned by vibration pulses in thesteer‐
ing wheel in thefollowing circumstances:
R
ActiveLaneKeeping Assistdetects alane
marking.
R
Afront wheel drives overthis lane marking.
Youwill also be guided backintoyour lane by
means of acourse-correcting brakeapplication
if thefollowing conditionsare met:
R
ActiveLaneKeeping Assistdetects lane
markings on both edges of thelane.
R
Afront wheel drives over asolid lane mark‐
ing.
Youcan activateordeactivatethe ActiveLane
Keeping Assistwarning.
ActiveLaneKeeping Assistcan neither reduce
therisk of an accident if youfail to adaptyour
driving stylenor override thelaws of physics. It
cannottakeintoaccount road, weather or traffic
conditions.ActiveLaneKeeping Assistisonlyan
aid. Youare responsible formaintaining asafe
distance to thevehicle in front, forvehicle
speed, forbraking in good time and forstaying
in lane.
Vehicles with DrivingAssistancePackage or
Driving Assistance Plus Package: ActiveLane
Keeping Assistcan bring thevehicle backinto
thelane withalane-correcting brakeapplication.
In thecase of abrokenlane marking being
detected, abrake application will only be madeif
avehicle has been detected in theadjacentlane.
Oncoming vehicles, overtakingvehicles and vehi‐
cles in adjacent lanes can be detected.
ActiveLaneKeeping Assistisavailable in the
speed rangebetween 37 mph(60 km/h) and
124mph (200 km/h).
Driving and parking
259
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
Observe thelegal requirements forthe country
in whichyou arecurrently driving when operat‐
ing theon-boardcomputer.
%
The on-boardcomputer displays will appear
on themultifunction display(/page267).
The on-boardcomputer is operated using left-
hand TouchControl 2 and theleft-hand back/
home button 1.
The following menus areavailable:
R
Service
R
DriveAssist
R
Trip
R
Navigation
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Phone
R
Head-up Disp.
R
Designs
The menus can be calledupfromthe menu bar
on themultifunction display.
#
To call up themenu bar: press backbutton
on theleft 1 until themenu bar is dis‐
played.
%
Vehicles without ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call
up themenu bar of theon-boardcomputer.
#
To scroll in themenu bar: swipe leftor
right on left-hand TouchControl 2.
#
To call up amenuorconfirmaselection:
press left-handTouchControl 2.
#
To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwardsonleft-
hand TouchControl 2.
#
To call up asubmenuorconfirmaselec‐
tion: press left-handTouchControl 2.
#
To exit asubmenu: press backbutton on
theleft 1.
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
265
Full-screen menu
Youcan display thefollowing menus in full on
theInstrument Display:
R
DriveAssist
R
Trip
#
On thecorresponding menu, use left-hand
TouchControl 2 to scroll to theend of the
list.
#
Press left-hand TouchControl 2.
The selected menuwill be displayedinfull.
Setting thedesign
On-boardcomputer:
4
Designs
%
This function is available only forvehicles
withaWidescreen Cockpit.
The following designscan be selected:
R
Classic
R
Sport
R
Progressive
#
To select adesign: swipe upwards or down‐
wardsonthe left-hand TouchControl.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
The Instrument Displaywillbeshown in the
selected design.
Setting theareafor additionalvalues
G-meter (example)
1
Area foradditional values
2
Index points
#
To select displaycontent: swipe to the
right on theleft-hand TouchControl.
#
Swipeupwards or downwardsonthe left-
hand TouchControl to select displaycontent.
When displaycontent is selected, thearea
foradditional values 1 will briefly be high‐
lighted.
Index points 2 will displaythe selected list
item.
The following displaycontent can be selected in
the Classic and Sport designs:
R
Tachometer
R
Navigation
R
ECOdisplay
R
Consumption
R
G-meter
The following content can be selected in the Pro-
gressive design:
R
date
R
Navigation
R
ECOdisplay
R
Consumption
R
G-meter
266
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
Overviewofdisplays on themultifunction
display
1
Outside temperature
2
Driveprogram
3
Transmission position
4
Time
5
Displaysection
%
Vehicles with an Instrument Displayin
theWidescreen Cockpit: theposition of
thedisplays will differfromthose displayed
here.
Further displays on themultifunction display:
Z
Gearshiftrecommendation(/page 187)
ë
ActiveParking Assistactivated
(/ page245)
é
Parking AssistPARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 237)
h
Cruise control (/ page210)
ç
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 212)
æ
ActiveBrake Assist(/ page209)
è
ActiveSteering Assist(/ page219)
Ã
ActiveLaneKeeping Assist(/ page259)
±
ActiveLaneChangeAssist(/ page221)
ë
HOLD function (/ page225)
_
AdaptiveHighbeam Assist(/page153)
Vehicles with TrafficSign Assist: Detected
instructions and trafficsigns (/ page 251).
Adjustingthe instrumentlighting
#
Turn brightness control 1 up or down.
The lightingofthe Instrument Displayand in
thecontrol elementsofthe vehicle interior is
adjusted.
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
267
showavehicle being refueled instead of the
range.
R
ECOdisplay (/ page182)
R
Trip computer FromStart and FromReset
R
Digital speedometer
%
The digital speedometeronly appearsinthe
Sport and Supersport styles.
Resetting values on theTripmenu of theon-
boardcomputer
On-boardcomputer:
4
Trip
%
The spelling on themain menu displayed
maydiffer. Therefore, observe themenu
overviewfor theInstrument Display
(/ page264).
Youcan resetthe values of thefollowing func‐
tions:
R
Trip distance
R
Trip computer "Fromstart"and "Fromreset"
R
ECOdisplay
#
To select thefunction to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwardsonthe left-hand
TouchControl.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
#
Select Yes.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
If youpress and hold theleft-hand TouchCon‐
trol, thefunction will be resetimmediately.
Calling up navigation instructions on theon-
boardcomputer
On-boardcomputer:
4
Navigation
Example: no changeofdirection announced
1
Distance to thenextdestination
2
Estimated arrivaltime
3
Distance to thenextchangeofdirection
4
Current road
270
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
trafficsituation. Thiscould also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
#
If youcannotbesureofthis, stop the
vehicle whilstpaying attention to road
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
When telephoning, youmustobservethe legal
requirements forthe countryinwhichyou are
currentlydriving.
The mostrecenttelephone connections(dialed,
receivedand missed calls) aredisplayedinthe
Phone menu.
#
To select thetelephone number: swipe
upwards or downwardsonthe left-hand
TouchControl.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
If thereisonlyone telephone number
savedtoanentry: thetelephone number is
selected.
#
If thereare multiple telephone numbers
savedtoanentry: swipe upwards or down‐
wardsonthe left-hand TouchControl to
select thedesired telephonenumber.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
The telephonenumber is dialed.
The following displays mayappear instead of the
telephonenumbersdialed:
R
Please Wait...:the applicationisstarting.
When aBluetooth
®
connection to themobile
phone is notestablished, themenu for
authorizingand connectingamobile phoneis
displayedonthe multimedia system
(/ page341).
R
Importing Contacts...:the contacts from the
mobilephone or from astorage medium are
being imported.
Accepting/rejecting acall
When youreceiveacall, the Incoming Call - mes‐
sageappearsonthe Head-up Display.
#
Swipe upwardsordownwards on theleft-
hand TouchControl and select 6 (Accept)
or ~ (Reject).
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
The call maybeaccepted/rejectedusing the
6 or ~ buttons on thesteering wheel.
Adjustingthe Head-up Display settings on
theon-board computer
On-boardcomputer:
4
Head-up Disp.
The following characteristicsofthe Head-up Dis‐
playcan be adjusted:
R
Position
R
Brightness
R
Display Content
#
To select characteristics: swipe upwards or
downwardsonthe left-hand TouchControl.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
#
To adjustthe value: swipe upwards or
downwardsonthe left-hand TouchControl.
#
Press theleft-hand TouchControl.
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
273
Switching theHead-up Displayon/off
#
Press button 1.
Instrument Displayand on-boardcomputer
275
Notesonoperating safety
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If youoperateinformation and communica‐
tionequipment integratedinthe vehicle
when driving, youwill be distracted from the
trafficsituation. Thiscould also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
#
If youcannotbesureofthis, stop the
vehicle whilstpaying attention to road
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobilecommunication equip‐
ment whilethe vehicle is in motion
Mobile communicationsdevices distract the
driver from thetraffic situation.Thiscould
also cause thedrivertolose control of the
vehicle.
#
As thedriver, onlyoperatemobile com‐
munications devices when thevehicle is
stationary.
#
As avehicle occupant, onlyuse mobile
communicationsdevices in theareas
intended forthis purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowedincorrectly
If objects in thevehicle interior arestowed
incorrectly,theycan slide or be thrown
aroundand hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowagespaces and
mobile phonereceptaclescannotalways
retain all objectstheycontain.
There is arisk of injury,particularly in the
event of sudden braking or asudden change
in direction.
#
Alwaysstowobjectssothat they can‐
notbethrownaroundinsuchsitua‐
tions.
#
Alwaysmakesurethat objectsdonot
protrude from stowagespaces, luggage
nets or stowagenets.
#
Close thelockable stowagespaces
beforestartingajourney.
#
Alwaysstowand secureheavy,hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in thetrunk/load compartment.
Foryour ownsafety, always observe thefollow‐
ing points when operating mobile communica‐
tions equipment and especiallyyour voice con‐
trol system:
R
Observe thelegal requirements forthe coun‐
tryinwhichyou aredriving.
R
While driving, only operatemobile communi‐
cationsequipment and your voice control
system when thetraffic conditionspermit it.
Youmay otherwise be distracted from the
trafficconditions and cause an accident,
injuring yourself and others.
276
Voice ControlSystem
R
If youuse thevoice control system in an
emergency your voice can changeand your
telephonecall, e.g. an emergency call, can
therebybeunnecessarily delayed.
R
Familiarize yourself withthe voice control
system functionsbeforestartingthe journey.
R
Complywiththe loading guidelines
(/ page125).
Operation
Overviewofoperation of theVoice Control
System on themultifunction steering wheel
The Voice ControlSystemisoperational approx‐
imatelythirty seconds afterthe ignition is
switched on.
1
Press therockerswitchup: £ starts the
Voice ControlSystem
2
Press thecontrol knob: 8 switches the
sound offoron(ends theVoice Control Sys‐
tem)
Turn thecontrol knob up/down: increases/
decreases thevolume
3
Press therockerswitchup: 6 makes/
accepts acall
Press therockerswitchdown: ~ rejects/
endsacall(ends theVoice Control System)
Conducting adialog withthe Voice Control
System
#
To startorcontinue adialog: on themulti‐
function steering wheel, press the £
rocker switchup.
Youcan sayavoice command afteran
acoustic signal.
#
To correct an entry: saythe Correction
voice command.
#
To select an entryfromthe selection list:
saythe line number or thecontents.
#
To browsethe selection list: saythe Next
or Back voice command.
#
To interrupt thedialog: saythe Pause voice
command.
#
To cancel thedialog: saythe Cancel voice
command.
Voice ControlSystem
277
Operable functions
Youcan use theVoice Control System to operate
thefollowing equipment depending on thefea‐
tures:
R
Telephone
R
Text messages
R
Navigation
R
Address book
R
Radio
R
Audio (memorycard, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth
®
audio)
R
Vehicle
Overviewoftypes of voice command
Adistinction is made between thefollowing
voice commands:
R
Global voice commands can be said at any
time and regardless of thecurrent applica‐
tion, e.g.the voice commands Navigateto,
Call or Text message to.
R
Application-specific voice commands are
onlyavailable forthe activeapplication.
Oncethe Voice ControlSystemisstarted an
autocue is shown. Apartfromthe available voice
commandsfor theapplication currently active,
this also cites example voice commandsfor
other applications whichare notactive. In this
way, youwill be familiar morequicklywiththe
available voice commands. The listcan be scrol‐
led or it can be operatedbyspeechorthe con‐
troller/touchpad.
Notesonthe languagesetting
Youcan changethe languageofthe Voice Con‐
trol System via thesystemlanguagesettings. If
theset system languageisnot supportedbythe
Voice ControlSystem, English will be selected.
The Voice ControlSystemisavailable in English,
French, Portuguese and Spanish.
Using theVoice Control System effectively
Features of audiblehelp functions
Youreceiveinformationand help forthe follow‐
ing topics:
R
Optimum operation: saythe brief instruc-
tion voice command.
R
Current application: on themultifunction
steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch
up and saythe Help voice command.
R
Continued dialog: saythe Help voice com‐
mand during avoice dialog.
R
Specific function: sayvoice commands for
thedesired function,e.g. Help telephone.
Notesonhow to improve speechquality
If theVoice Control System does notunderstand
you:
R
only operatethe Voice ControlSystemfrom
thedriver's seat.
R
saythe voice commandscoherentlyand
clearly,but do notexaggeratethe words.
278
Voice ControlSystem
R
avoid loud noises that causeinterference
whilemaking avoice command entry, e.g.
theblower.
Avoice taginthe address book is notrecog‐
nized:
R
onlycreatesensible address book entries in
thesystem/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur‐
name and firstnameinthe correct field.
R
do notuse anyabbreviations, unnecessary
spaces or special characters.
If astationlistentry is notrecognized:
R
saythe Read out station list voice command.
Essentialvoice commands
Overviewofswitchvoice commands
Switch voice commandscan be used to open
certain applications.The voice command selec‐
tion can be used regardless of theapplication
that is currently active.
Switchvoice commands
Voice command Function
Navigation
To switchtonavigation mode
Map
To switchtomap display
Address book
To switchtoaddress book
Telephone
To switchtotelephone mode
Text message
To switchtotextmessages
Radio
To switchtoradio mode
Media
To switchtomedia mode
Voice ControlSystem
279
Voice command Function
USB
To switchtoUSB
Memory card
To switchtomemorycard
Internet application <Name>
To startaMercedes-Benzonline application. The applicationmustbecalledupbytouchonceprior
to use.
Mercedes-BenzApps
To switchtoMercedes-BenzApps
Connect
To switchtoInternetmode
Vehicle menu
To switchtovehicle settings
System settings menu
To switchtosystemsettings
Overviewofnavigation voice commands
Usingnavigation voice commands, youcan enter
POIs or conventional addresses as well as
directly changeimportant navigation settings.
280
Voice ControlSystem
Navigation voice commands
Voice command Function
Navigate to <Address/POI/Contact>
Universal search forall types of destinations. Asearchisconducted in theaddress book contacts,
thenavigation database and on theInternet(POIs). The order of thedetails, e.g. city, street or
house number,can be changed.
Addressin<Country>
Destination entry in adesired country, e.g. address in France
Home
Starts navigationtohome address
Work
Starts navigationtoyour workspace
POI <POI>
Destination entryfor aPOI, e.g. thePOI BrandenburgGate. Asearch is performed in thenavigation
database and on theInternet.
POI online search <POI>
ConductsaPOI search on theInternetonly
Navigate to contact <Name>
Destination entry to acontact in theaddress book
Voice ControlSystem
281
Voice command Function
Enter country
Enter city
Enter district
Enter street
Enter intersection
Enter house number
Enter ZIP code
Enters acountry/city/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code
Nearest restaurant
Nearest parking lot
Nearest restarea with restrooms
Nearest gas station
Searches fornearbyrestaurants, parkinglots, rest areas withrestrooms and gasstations
Restaurantalongthe route
Parking alongthe route
Rest area with restroomsalongthe route
Gas stations alongthe route
Searches forrestaurants, parkingoptions,restareas withrestrooms and gasstations alongthe
route
282
Voice ControlSystem
Voice command Function
Restaurant at destination
Parking at destination
Rest area with restrooms at destination
Gas station at destination
Searches forrestaurants, parkingoptions,restareas withrestrooms and gasstations at thedesti‐
nation
Last destinations
Selectsadestination from thelistoflastentered destinations
Alternativeroutes
Switches routeguidance to another route
Start routeguidance
Starts routeguidance afterentering avalid destination
Cancelrouteguidance
Cancels routeguidance
Guidance instructionson
Guidance instructionsoff
Switches therouteguidance voice output on/off
Showtraffic map
Hide traffic map
Switches thetraffic map on/off
Switch on POI symbols
Switch off POI symbols
Switches thePOI symbols displayonthe map on/off
Voice ControlSystem
283
Overviewoftelephone voice commands
Youcan use thetelephone voice commandsto
makephone callsorsearch through theaddress
book.
Telephone voice commands
Voice command Function
Call <Name>
Makes aphone call. All address book names areavailable.
Search for contact<Name>
Searches forand displays acontact. All address booknamesare available.
Outgoingcalls
Displays thelastcall
Redial
Selectsthe lastphone number dialed
Overviewofradio voice commands
Radio voice commandscan also be used when
theradio applicationisrunninginthe back‐
ground.
284
Voice ControlSystem
Radio voice commands
Voice command Function
Station <Name>
To callupreceivable or savedstations
<Frequency>
To enter afrequency directly
Next station
To switchtothe next available station
Previous station
To switchtothe previous station
Savestation
To save astationinthe stationlist
Show stationlist
To displaythe names of all receivable stations
Read out stationlist
To listentothe names of all receivable stations
Traffic informationon
Traffic informationoff
To switchthe trafficinformation service on/off
Radioinfo on
Radioinfo off
To switchinformation about thecurrent stationon/off
Voice ControlSystem
285
Overviewofmedia playervoice commands
Media playervoice commands can also be used
when themedia playerisrunninginthe back‐
ground.
Media playervoice commands
Voice command Function
Play <Tracks>
Play <Albums>
Play <Artists>
Play<Composers>
Play <Genres>
Play <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks,albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists areaccepteddur‐
ing thesearch.
Media search <Track>
Media search <Albums>
Media search <Artists>
Media search <Composers>
Media search <Genres>
Media search <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks,albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists areaccepteddur‐
ing thesearch.
286
Voice ControlSystem
Voice command Function
Show all albums
Show all artists
Show all composers
Show all genres
Show all tracks
Show all playlists
Available albums,artists,composers,genres,tracksorplaylists aresearched for.
Next track
To select thenexttrack
Previous track
To select theprevioustrack
Random track list on
Random track list off
To switchthe randomtrack list on/off
Overviewofmessagevoice commands
Text messagescan be created, edited and lis‐
tened to usingthe messagevoice commands.
Voice ControlSystem
287
Messagevoice commands
Voice command Function
Text message to <Name>
To create amessage. All address book names areavailable.
Reply
To reply to amessage
Forward text message
To forwardamessage
Overviewofvehicle voice commands
Youcan use thevehicle voice commandsto
directly call up thecorresponding menus forthe
vehicle settings.
Vehiclevoice commands
Voice command Function
Ambientlight menu
To displayambient light settings
Ambientlight "blue"
To switchambient light to blue
Display and styles menu
To showdisplaysettings
Assistance menu
To displayassistance settings
288
Voice ControlSystem
Voice command Function
Consumption menu
To displayconsumption
Vehicle data
To displayvehicle data
290
Voice ControlSystem
Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
offfeature: if thetemperatureistoo high, the
brightness is initiallyreduced automatically.The
displaymay then switchoff completely fora
while.
%
If youare wearing polarizedsunglasses,it
maybedifficulttoread thedisplay.
Central control elements overview
1
TouchControl
2
Controller
3
Touchpad
TouchControl
Operating TouchControl
#
To call up main functions: press button 1.
or
#
Press and hold button 3.
#
To call up favorites: press button 1.
#
Swipe down on TouchControl 2.
#
To open alist: press TouchControl 2.
#
To close alist: press button 3.
or
#
Swipe right on TouchControl 2.
#
To select amenu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on TouchControl 2.
#
Press TouchControl 2.
#
To move thedigitalmap: swipe in any
direction.
Setting thesensitivityfor theTouchControl
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
w Input
5
Touch Control Sensitivity
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
292
Multimedia system
Operating thecontroller
1
% button
Press briefly:returns to thepreviousdisplay
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2
Controller
3
ò button
Calls up themain functions
To callupfavorites: when themain functions
aredisplayed, slide controller 2 down.
Controller 2 operating options:
#
Turn 3 counter-clockwise or clockwise.
#
Slide 1 left or right.
#
Slide 4 up or down.
#
Slide 2 diagonally.
#
Press 7 briefly or press and hold.
Touchpad
Activating/deactivatingthe touchpad
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
w Input
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the Touchpad.
Operating thetouchpad
Requirements:
R
The touchpad is switched on (/ page293).
1
% button
Press briefly:returns to thepreviousdisplay
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2
Touchpad
3
© button
Calls up themain functions
Calls up favorites: when themain functions
aredisplayed, swipe down on touchpad 2.
Multimedia system
293
On themultimedia system
#
Turn volume control 1.
The volume of thecurrent radio or media
source is set. The volume of other audio
sources can be adjustedseparately.
Adjustthis in thefollowing situations:
R
During atrafficannouncement
R
During anavigation announcement
The volume of thenavigation announce‐
ment changes in accordancewiththe vol‐
ume of thecurrent media source.
R
During atelephone call
R
When entering or exitingaparkingspace
while using ActiveParking Assist
Setting in themenu
#
Select System in themultimedia system.
#
Select Audio.
#
Select avolume setting.
#
Setthe volume.
Entering characters
Using thecharacter input function
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If youoperateinformation and communica‐
tionequipment integratedinthe vehicle
when driving, youwill be distracted from the
trafficsituation. Thiscould also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
#
If youcannotbesureofthis, stop the
vehicle whilstpaying attention to road
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
Youmustobservethe legal requirements forthe
countryinwhich youare currentlydriving when
operating themultimedia system.
Use thecharacter input function in thefollowing
situations, forexample:
R
Renaming afavorite
R
Entering aPOI or address
R
Making aphone call
The following functionsare available:
R
Selecting acharacter in thecharacter bar
R
Writingacharacter on thetouchpad
Character input can be startedwithacontrol
element and resumed withanother.
298
Multimedia system
#
On theTouchControl and controller:
select thecharactersinthe character bar.
Dependingonthe target entry,the following
charactersare available:
R
The full setofcharactersisshown
R
Only those characterswhichare useful
forthe current inputstring are shown
Other charactersare grayed out.
#
On thetouchpad: select thecharactersin
thecharacter bar.
or
#
Writethe charactersonthe touch-sensitive
surface of thetouchpad.
Handwriting recognition supportsyou by
means of character suggestions and aread-
aloud function.
Examples of character entry:
R
Renaming afavorite
R
Entering aPOI or an address using free or
step-by-step search
R
Entering aweb address
Entering charactersusingthe controller
Example:renaming favorites
#
Call up the"Renaming favorites" function
(/ page296).
#
To enter acharacter: turn 3,slide 4
and press thecontroller.
The character is entered in theinput line.
Use thefollowing entryfunctions:
%
To delete acharacter:press thecontrol‐
ler.
To delete an entry:press and holdthe
controller until theentireentry is deleted.
Ä
To switchtospecial charactersand sym‐
bols.
X
To switchtoupper-case or lower-case let‐
ters.
B
To switchthe language.
v
To switchtocharacter entryonthe touch‐
pad.
%
The available editing functionsdependon
theediting task,the languageset and the
character level.
#
To confirmthe entry: select ¡.
Example: entering adestination (navigation)
#
Enter thePOI or address (/ page315).
Enteringcharactersonthe touchpad
Requirements:
R
The touchpad is switched on (/ page293).
R
The entered or selected character shouldbe
read out:the handwriting recognition read-
aloud function is switched on (/ page294).
Multimedia system
299
Example: renaming favorites
#
Call up the"Renaming favorites" function
(/ page296).
#
To enter acharacter: use your finger to
writecharactersonthe touchpad.
The character is entered in theinput line. If
different interpretations arepossible, charac‐
tersuggestions aredisplayed.
#
To select acharacter suggestion: swipe up
or down on thetouchpad.
#
Resume character input.
#
To enter aspace: swipe right when thecur‐
sor is located in theinput line.
#
To deleteacharacter: swipe leftwhenthe
cursor is located in theinput line.
#
To confirmthe entry: press thetouchpad.
#
To finish character entry: swipe upwards.
or
#
Press the % button.
Example: entering adestination (navigation)
#
Enterthe POI or address (/ page315).
System settings
Display
Configuring displaysettings
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
G Display and Designs
Styles
#
Select Designs.
#
Select Sport, Classic or Progressive.
Adapting theambient lighting forthe style
#
Select Adjust Amb. Lighting.
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
This function adjusts theambient lighting for
theselected displaystyle.
Settingthe display brightness
#
Select Display Brightness.
#
Select abrightnessvalue.
Switching thedisplayoff/on
#
To switchoff: select Display Off.
#
To switchon: press abutton, %,for
example.
Display design
#
Select Day/Night Design.
#
Select Automatic, Day Design or Night
Design.
Additional display area
Depending on thevehicle, various items of addi‐
tional information can be shown. The additional
displayareacomprises theleft-hand or right-
hand thirdofthe display.
#
Select AdditionalDisp.Area.
300
Multimedia system
The following displaycontent can be selected:
R
Dynamic
R
Navigation Map
R
Consumption
R
Time and Date
Time and date
Settingthe time and dateautomatically
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
#
Deactivate ª Manual Time Adjustment.
The time and dateare setautomaticallyfor
theselected time zoneand summer time
option.
%
The correct time is required forthe following
functions:
R
Routeguidance withtime-dependent
trafficguidance.
R
Calculation of expected time of arrival.
Setting thetimezone
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Time Zone:
The listofcountries is displayed.
#
Select acountry #.
Depending on thecountry,time zones are
displayed.
#
Select atime zone.
The time zoneset is displayedafter Time
Zone:.
Settingsummer time
The Automatic Daylight Saving Time and Day-
light Saving Time options cannotbeselected in
all countries.
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
Automatically
#
Switch Automatic Daylight Saving Time on
O or off ª.
Manually
#
Deactivate ª Automatic Daylight Saving
Time.
#
Select Daylight Saving Time.
#
Select On or Off.
Settingthe time and dateformat
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Format
#
Setthe dateand time format #.
Setting thetimemanually
Requirements:
R
The Manual Time Adjustment function is
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Time
#
Setthe hours.
#
Navigatetothe right to setthe minutes.
#
Setthe minutes.
Multimedia system
301
#
Confirm changes when exitingthe menu.
The dateisset automaticallyvia GPS.
Activating/deactivatingvoice amplification
to rear passenger compartment
Requirements:
R
Mercedes-Maybachvehicles and vehicles
withalong wheelbase only.
R
Your vehicle is equipped withthe Burmester
®
surround soundsystemorthe Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround soundsystem.
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
Doors, side windows and thepanorama roof
withpowertilt/sliding panel areclosed.
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
Audio
5
Voice Amplification to Rear
The function supports communication between
thedriver/front passenger and vehicle occu‐
pants in therear passenger compartment.When
voice amplification to rear passenger compart‐
mentisactivated, thesignals pickedupbythe
microphone areamplified and playedbackover
thespeakersinthe rear passenger compart‐
ment, dependingupon vehicle noise levels. An
automatic adjustment occursbased on speaker
volume and ambientnoiseinorder to improve
speechintelligibility and maintain thenatural‐
ness of speech.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Connectivity
Switching transmission of thevehicle posi‐
tionon/off
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Select Transmit Vehicle Pos..
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Bluetooth
®
Information aboutBluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
technology is astandardfor short-
rangewirelessdatatransfer up to approximately
32.8ft(10 m).
Youcan use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phonetothe multimedia system and use thefol‐
lowing functions, forexample:
R
Hands-free system withaccess to thefollow‐
ing options:
-
contacts (/ page346)
-
call lists (/ page348)
-
text message (/ page349)
R
Internetconnection (/ page361 )
R
Listening to musicvia Bluetooth
®
audio
R
Transferring business cards (vCards) intothe
vehicle
Bluetooth
®
is aregisteredtrademarkofBlue‐
toothSpecial InterestGroup (SIG) Inc.
%
Internetconnection via Bluetooth
®
is not
available in all countries.
302
Multimedia system
Authorizing aconnected device
#
Select Authorize aNew Device.
The devices already connectedare displayed.
#
Select Continue Using Connected Devices.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
device and follow the instructions. message
appears.
#
Select Continue.
#
The connection requestfromthe device
Accept.
#
Enter thePIN shown on theexternal device.
Thedeviceisauthorized.
De-authorizingthe device
#
Select an authorizeddevicefromthe list.
Apromptwill appear asking whether you
would liketode-authorize theselected
device.
#
Select Yes.
The device is de-authorized.
Activating/deactivatingchild safetylock
Multimediasystem:
4
System
5
Parental Control
Locking theRear Seat Entertainment System
#
Select Rear Left or Rear Right.
#
Select Lock.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is
locked O or unlocked ª.
Switching offthe Rear Seat Entertainment
System display
#
Select Rear Left or Rear Right.
#
Select Display On.
#
Switch thedisplayonOor off ª.
Locking an external device
#
Select an external device.
#
Select Lock.
The deviceconnectedvia theCOMAND
Touchapp is locked O or unlocked ª.
System language
Notesonthe system language
This function allows youtodetermine thelan‐
guagefor themenu displays and thenavigation
announcements. The selected languageaffects
thecharactersavailable forentry. The navigation
announcementsare notavailable in all lan‐
guages. If alanguageisnot available, thenaviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting thesystemlanguage
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Language
#
Setthe language.
%
If youare usingArabic map data, thetext
information can also be shown in Arabic on
thenavigation map. To do so, select  as
thelanguagefromthe languagelist. Naviga‐
tion announcements arethen also made in
Arabic.
306
Multimedia system
%
If automatic softwareupdatesare activated,
thesystemupdates will be downloaded auto‐
matically(/page310).
As soonasanupdateisavailable fordownload,
acorresponding messageappears on themedia
display.
Youhave thefollowing selection options:
R
Download
The updatewill be downloaded in theback‐
ground.
R
Details
Information about thepending system
updateisdisplayed.
R
Later
The updatecan be downloaded manually at a
later time (/ page310).
If thedownload is completedand theupdateis
ready forinstallation,you will be informed of this
afterthe next ignition cycle, forexample.
%
Park thevehicle safely in asuitable location
beforestartingthe installation.
Requirements forthe installation:
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The engineisnot running.
R
Notesand warnings have been read and
accepted.
R
The parkingbrake is applied.
If all requirements aremet,the updatewill be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while theupdateisbeing installed and
vehicle functions arerestricted.
If errors should occur during theinstallation,the
multimedia system automaticallyattemptsto
restorethe previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is notpossible,asymbol
appearsonthe multimedia system display.
Please consult aqualified specialistworkshop to
resolvethe problem.
Resetfunction
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Reset
Personal dataisdeleted, forexample:
R
Stationpresets
R
Connectedmobile phones
#
Select Yes.
If PIN protection is activated, apromptappears
asking if youalso wish to restorethis to thefac‐
tory settings during areset.
#
Select Yes.
#
Enter thecurrent PIN.
The PIN is reset.
or
#
Select No.
The current PIN staysthe same afterreset‐
ting.
%
If youhave forgottenyour PIN,anauthorized
Mercedes-BenzCentercan deactivatethe
PIN protection foryou.
Multimedia system
311
ProgramFunction
Pleasure
Canpromote apositivemoodinthe vehicle occupants as well as mentaland physical regeneration. Moder‐
ately fast musicisplayedand amassageprogram is activated. The air is purified using ionization and a
pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated withamicable lighting.
Well being
Can aid thephysical and mental relaxation of vehicle occupants. Abackmassagecombined withlocal
warmth provide relaxation.The air is purified using ionization and apleasant fragranceisreleased. The
audio playerplays selections of calming music and thevehicle interior is illuminated withpleasant lighting.
Training
Cancounteract theonsetofmuscle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress withtargetedrelaxation or stim‐
ulation exercises. The exercises aredemonstratedinshortvideos. The air is purified using ionization and a
pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated withlighting appropriatetothe exercise.
%
Please note that theavailable programand
theassociated functionsdepend on your
vehicle equipment. Depending on your
equipment,fewer functionsmay be availa‐
ble.
Starting theENERGIZINGComfortprogram
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
ENERGIZING Comfortisavailable approx‐
imatelyfiveminutes afterstartingthe multi‐
media system.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
ENERGIZING Comfort
Selecting aseat
#
Select Seat Selection.
#
Select thedesired seat or All Seats O.
Starting aprogram
#
Select Refresh, Warmth, Vitality, Enjoyment
or Well-being.
The selected program will runfor tenminutes.
Configuring aprogram
#
Call up further options Ü forthe desired
program.
#
Switchthe functionsincluded in theprogram
on O or off ª.
Multimedia system
313
Starting training
#
Select Training.
#
Select Muscle Relaxation, Muscle Stimula-
tion or Balance.
The selected training videostartsand is dis‐
playedinthe media display.
#
Select FullScreen: Video.
The training video is displayed in full screen.
%
Formoreinformation on pausing or skipping
through videos, see (/ page371).
If,duringanactiveprogram,afunctionrequire‐
ment is no longer met, acorresponding message
appears.The active program is canceled.
Navigation
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Alternatively: press the ß button.
The map appearsand shows current vehicle
position 1.
%
If aclimatecontrolsetting is changed, acli‐
matebar appearsbriefly.
Showing/hiding thenavigation menu
Requirements:
R
The map shows thevehicle's current posi‐
tion.
314
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
To show: swipe leftonthe touchpad or the
TouchControl.
or
#
Slidethe controller to theleft.
#
To hide: swipe right on thetouchpad or the
TouchControl.
or
#
Slidethe controller to theright.
%
To showorhide lowermenu levels, swipe or
slide to theleftorright as manytimes as
necessary.
Destination entry
Entering aPOI or address
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If youoperateinformation and communica‐
tionequipment integratedinthe vehicle
when driving, youwill be distracted from the
trafficsituation. Thiscould also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
#
If youcannotbesureofthis, stop the
vehicle whilstpaying attention to road
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
Youmustobservethe legal requirements forthe
countryinwhich youare currentlydriving when
operating themultimedia system.
Requirements:
R
Forthe online search: Mercedes me con‐
nect is available.
R
Youhave auser accountfor theMercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The servicehas been activated at an author‐
izedMercedes-BenzCenter.
Further information can be found at:http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Showthe navigation menu.
#
Select ª Enter Destination .
Multimedia system
315
The stateorprovince in which thevehicle is
located is set 1.
Thereare twoavailable methods of destination
entry:
R
Free search 2
R
Searchstep-by-step 3
Method 1: free search
#
Enter thePOI or address in 2.The entries
can be made in anyorder.
During destination entry,suggestionsare
made by themultimedia system. Aselection
of destinations appearsinalist.
Enterthese address elements, forexample:
R
City,street, housenumber
R
Street,city
R
ZIP code
R
POI name
R
POI category, e.g. Gas Station
R
City,POI name
#
To switchtohandwriting recognition:
select v 5.
#
Writethe character on thetouchpad.
#
To switchtocharacterselection: press the
% button.
or
#
Press thetouchpad.
#
To deleteanentry: select % 4 (if avail‐
able).
Use thefollowing options:
R
Press briefly:deletes thelastcharacter
entered or thelastsuggestion adopted.
R
Press and hold: deletesthe entireentry.
#
To setthe language: select B 8.
#
Select thelanguage.
%
This function is useful forcountries in which
severalcharacter sets aresupported. An
example is Russia, whichuses Cyrillicand
Latin characters.
#
To call up theonline search function:
select Online Search 6.
Once an Internetconnection is established, a
listappears. It shows online destinations
related to thepreviousentry.
Online destinations areprovidedbythe Inter‐
netservice provider.
#
Selectthe online destination.
or
#
Enter theonline destination or a3word
address in theinput line.
%
Entera3wordaddress (/ page320).
Online search is notavailable in all coun‐
tries.
#
To call up thelist: press the % button.
or
316
Multimedia system
#
If thetop line of thecharacter bar is highligh‐
ted, navigateupwards.
#
Select thedestination in thelist.
#
To adoptadestination: select 7 Select
Destination .
If thereare severallistings foradestination,
alistappears.
#
Select thedestination.
The destination address is shown.
Method 2: search step-by-step
#
Press % button.
or
#
If thetop line of thecharacter bar is highligh‐
ted, navigateupwards.
The character bar is hidden. City or ZIP is
highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
POI,are available.
#
Select City or ZIP.
The character bar appears.
#
Enterthe city or theZIP code.
During destination entry,suggestionsare
made by themultimedia system. Aselection
of destinations appearsinalist.
The address entries can be made in any
order,for example:
R
City or ZIP, Street, HouseNo.
Enteranintersecting street,ifavailable.
R
Street, City or ZIP
R
POI,e.g. Gas Station, City or ZIP
%
During destinationentry,use thefollowing
functions:
R
Switchtohandwriting recognition.
R
Switchtocharacter selection.
R
Delete an entry.
An entry, e.g. POI,can be deletedwith
£ in astep-by-step search.Navigate
to thelefttodoso.
R
Call up theonline search function (if
available).
R
Call up alist.
The functionsare described in thefree
search.
#
To changethe state/province: select the
stateorthe province.
#
Enterthe stateorthe province. Youonly
needtoenter thefirst character.
#
Select thestate or theprovince in thelist.
#
To changethe country: select thecountry.
#
Enter thecountry.You onlyneedtoenter the
firstcharacter.
#
Select thecountry on thelist.
#
To adoptadestination: select Select Desti-
nation.
If thereare severallistings foradestination,
adistance-orientated listappears.
#
Select thedestination.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
#
Select Previous Destinations.
#
Select thedestination.
The destination address is shown.
or
Multimedia system
317
#
If favourites have been savedalready
(/ page329), select From My Favorites.
#
Select thefavourite.
The destinationaddress is shown.
Selecting aPOI
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
POIs
#
Select thecategory.
or
#
Select All Categories and thecategory.
If routeguidanceisnot active: thesearch
begins in thevicinityofthe current vehicle
position. The listissortedbydistance in
ascending order.
The POIs showthe following information:
R
name of POI
R
linear distance to thePOI
R
thedirection of thelinear distance to the
POI (arrow) is displayedwhen searching
forthe vehicle's current position
#
Select thePOI.
#
Routeguidanceisactive: select thesearch
position prior to choosing aPOI (see exam‐
ple).
#
If intermediatedestinations areset,these
can also be selected as thesearch position
afterselecting Near Destination.
Filtering displays forPOIs
#
Enter thesearch term in ª Search:.
The results listshows relevant POIs.
#
Select ¡.
The firstPOI in thelistishighlighted.
#
Select thePOI.
Example: setting thesearch position forthe
parkingcategory during activerouteguid‐
ance
#
Select In the Vicinity, Near Destination or
Along the Route.
The listshows thelocated POIs or opens an
overviewofthe routedestinationafter
selecting Near Destination.
#
Select thePOI.
#
Select Near Destination:select theinter‐
mediatedestination or thedestination.
Starting an automatic gasstationsearch
Requirements:
R
The automatic gasstationsearch is activated
O (/ page324).
Driving situation
Routeguidance is active. The fuel levelinthe
fuel tank reaches thereserve fuel level.
The ReserveFuel Do you want to startasearch
for surroundinggas stations? messageisshown.
#
Select Yes.
The automatic gasstationsearch begins. The
available gasstations alongthe routeorin
thevicinityofthe vehicle's current position
aredisplayed.
#
Select thegas station.
The address of thegas stationisdisplayed.
#
If routeguidance is notactive, select Start
RouteGuidance.
The selected gasstation is setasthe desti‐
nation. Routeguidance begins.
or
318
Multimedia system
#
If routeguidance is active, select Start New
RouteGuidance or Set as NextWay Point.
Start New RouteGuidance:the selected gas
stationisset as anew destination. The previ‐
ous destinationsand intermediatedestina‐
tionsare deleted. Routeguidance to thegas
stationbegins.
Set as NextWay Point:the selected gassta‐
tionisset as thenextintermediatedestina‐
tion.Routeguidance begins.
#
If thereare alreadyfour intermediatedes‐
tinations: select Yes in theprompt.
Theselected gasstationisentered intoposi‐
tion1ofthe intermediatedestinations menu.
Intermediatedestination 4isdeleted. Route
guidance begins.
Entering an intermediatedestination
Requirements:
R
Adestination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Pointsand Info
#
Select Search for Way Point.
#
Enterthe intermediatedestination as aPOI
or address (/ page315).
#
Select theintermediatedestination.
#
Select Set as Destination.
or
#
Select an intermediatedestination using
ª Enter Destination during routeguid‐
ance.
#
Select Set as NextWay Point afterentering
thedestination.
Editing intermediate destinations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at leastone intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Pointsand Info
#
To call up themap: highlight thedestination
or theintermediatedestination.
#
Select ¥ Map .
#
Move themap (/ page334).
#
Select destination on themap (/ page321).
#
To changethe order of destinations: high‐
light thedestination or theintermediatedes‐
tination.
#
Select ¥ Move .
#
Move theintermediatedestination to the
desired position.
#
Press theTouchControl, thecontroller or the
touchpad.
#
To deleteadestination: highlight thedesti‐
nation or theintermediatedestination.
#
Select ¥ Delete.
Calculating aroutewith intermediatedesti‐
nations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at leastone intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Pointsand Info
#
Select Start New Route Guidance.
The routeiscalculated withthe setinter‐
mediatedestinations.
Multimedia system
319
%
User Defined allows personal POI symbols to
be selected (/ page335).
Route
Calculating aroute
Requirements:
R
The destination has been entered.
R
The destination address is shown.
#
If routeguidance is notactive, select Start
RouteGuidance.
The routetothe destination is calculated.
The map shows theroute. Routeguidance
then begins.
or
#
If routeguidance is active, select Start New
RouteGuidance or Set as NextWay Point.
Start New RouteGuidance:the selected des‐
tination address is setasanewdestination.
The previous destinationsand intermediate
destinationsare deleted. Routeguidance to
thenew destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point:the selected destina‐
tion address is setasthe next intermediate
destination. Routeguidance begins.
Taking alternativeroutes intoconsideration
#
Select an alternativeroute(/page324).
Other menufunctions
#
To save thedestination: select ¥ Store
in "Previous Destinations".
#
To display on themap: select ¥ Map.
#
To call atelephone number: select
¥ Call (if available).
#
To call up an Internetaddress: select
¥ www (if available).
Selecting aroutetype
Multimediasystem:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Route Settings.
#
Select theroutetype.
If routeguidance is active, thenew routeis
calculated withthe newroutetype.
If routeguidance is notactive, thenextroute
is calculated withthe newroutetype.
Youcan choose from thefollowing routetypes:
R
EcoRoute
An economical routeiscalculated. The jour‐
neytimemay be somewhat longer than for
quickerroutes.
The symbol forthe current vehicle position is
displayedingreen.
R
Fast Route
Aroutewithaquickjourneytimeiscalcula‐
ted.
R
ShortRoute
Aroutewithashort driving distance is calcu‐
lated.
Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance can be
switched on O or off ª forthese routetypes.
If Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance is switched
on, Ask in the EventofTraffic Jam Avoidance can
be selected.
322
Multimedia system
The following lanes aredisplayed:
R
Recommended lane 1
In this lane, youwill be able to completeboth
thenextchangeofdirection and theone
afterthat.
R
Possible lane 2
In this lane, youwill only be able to complete
thenextchangeofdirection.
R
Lanenot recommended 3
In this lane, youwill notbeable to complete
thenextchangeofdirection without chang‐
ing lane.
During thechangeofdirection,new lanesmay
be added.
%
Lanerecommendations can also be dis‐
playedinthe Instrument Displayand in the
Head-up Display.
Overviewofdestination reached
Once thedestination is reached, youwill see the
Í checkeredflag. Routeguidance is finished.
Whenanintermediate destination has been
reached, youwill see theintermediatedestina‐
tion flag withthe number of your Î inter‐
mediatedestination. Afterthis, routeguidance is
continued.
Switching navigation announcementson/off
Requirements:
R
Routeguidance is active.
#
To switchoff: press thevolume control on
themultifunction steering wheel during a
navigation announcement(/page297).
or
#
Press thevolume control on thecenter con‐
sole during anavigation announcement
(/ page297).
The Voice Guidance has been deactivated.
messageappears.
or
#
Showthe navigation menu (/ page314).
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
The symbolchanges to #.
#
To activate: select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
played.
%
In thefollowing situations, navigation
announcements areswitched on automati‐
cally:
R
Anew routeguidance is started.
R
The routeisrecalculated.
%
Youcan add and call up this function as a
favorite under VoiceGuidance On/Off.
Switching navigation announcementson/off
during aphone call
#
Select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Voice Guidance During Call on O or
off ª.
Adjustingthe volumeofnavigation
announcements
Requirements:
R
Routeguidance is active.
#
On themultifunction steering wheel or
on themultimedia system: turnthe volume
Multimedia system
327
control on themultifunction steering wheel
during anavigation announcement.
or
#
Turn thevolume control on thecenter con‐
sole during anavigation announcement
(/ page297).
%
In thefollowing situations, thevolume is
raised to themaximum volume or loweredto
theminimum volume:
R
Anew routeguidance is started.
R
The routeisrecalculated.
%
The minimum volume can be individuallyset
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Viasystemsettings: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Select VoiceGuidanceVolume.
#
Setthe volume.
#
To switchaudio fadeout on/off during
navigationannouncements: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Audio FadeoutDuring Voice Guidance
on O or off ª.
Repeating navigationannouncements
Requirements:
R
Aroutehas already been created.
R
Routeguidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
#
Select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
%
Youcan add and call up this function as a
favorite under Repeat VoiceGuidance.
Canceling routeguidance
Requirements:
R
Aroutehas already been created.
R
Routeguidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select % Cancel Route Guidance.
Overviewofrouteguidancetoanoff-road
destination
An off-road destinationiswithin thedigital map.
The map contains no roads that lead to thedes‐
tination.
Youcan entergeo-coordinates or athree word
address foroff-road destinations on themap.
Routeguidance guides youfor as long as possi‐
ble withnavigation announcements and displays
on roads that areknown to themultimedia sys‐
tem.
Shortly beforeyou reachthe lastknown position
on themap, youwill hear the"Please followthe
direction arrow"announcement. The display
shows adirection arrow and thelinear distance
to thedestination.
328
Multimedia system
Overviewofrouteguidancefromanoff-road
location to adestination
Off-road position: thecurrent vehicle position is
located within thedigital map on roads that are
notavailable.
When routeguidance beginsthe following dis‐
plays appear:
R
The Road Not Mapped messageisshown.
R
Adirection arrowshowing thelinear direc‐
tion to thePOI.
When thevehicle is backonaroad known to the
multimedia system, routeguidance continuesas
normal.
Overviewofoff-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks,for example, theremay be dif‐
ferences betweenthe dataonthe digital map
and theactual course of theroad. In suchcases,
themultimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locatethe vehicle's current positionon
thedigital map. The vehicle is off-road.
When thevehicle is off-road, thefollowing dis‐
plays areshown:
R
the Road Not Mapped message
R
adirection arrow showing thelinear direction
to thePOI
When thevehicle is backonaroad known to the
multimedia system, routeguidance continuesas
normal.
Destination
Saving thecurrent vehicleposition
Multimediasystem:
4
Navigation
#
If themap is displayedinfull screen mode,
press thecentralcontrol element.
The map menuappears.
#
Select 1 on themap menu (/ page333).
The current vehicle position is savedtothe
"Previous destinations" memory.
Storing amap position
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
The map is in full-screen mode.
#
Press theTouchControl, thecontroller or the
touchpad.
#
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/ page333).
#
Select aposition on themap.
If multiple entries areavailable foramap
position, alistappears.
#
Highlight an entry.
#
Select ¥ Store in "PreviousDestina-
tions" .
The map position is savedtothe "Previous
destinations" memory.
Editing theprevious destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Previous Destinations
#
Highlight one of thepreviousdestinations.
Multimedia system
329
#
To save as afavorite: select ¥ SaveMy
Favorite .
The favoritesare displayed.
#
Move thefavorite to thedesired position.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
#
To save as "Home"address: select ¥
Save as "Home" .
#
To save as "Work" address: select ¥
Save as "Work" .
#
To deleteasingle or all destinations:
select ¥ Delete or Delete All.
Apromptappears.
#
Select Yes.
#
To display destinationinformation: select
¥ Details.
Using external destinations
External destinations can be receivedfromthe
following sources:
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
R
Door-to-doornavigation with Companion app
(USA)
R
Rear Seat Entertainment System
%
Receiveddestinations aresavedinthe previ‐
ous destinations.
Apromptappearsonthe media display.
#
Adestination hasbeen received without
pictureinformation: select Yes.
#
If routeguidance is notactive, select Start
RouteGuidance.
The routetothe destination is calculated.
The map shows theroute. Routeguidance
then begins.
or
#
If routeguidance is active, select Start New
RouteGuidance or Set as NextWay Point.
Start New RouteGuidance:the receiveddes‐
tination address is setasanewdestination.
The previous destinationsand intermediate
destinationsare deleted. Routeguidance to
thenew destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point:the receiveddestina‐
tion address is setasthe next intermediate
destination. Routeguidance begins.
#
Adestination hasbeen received withpic‐
ture information: select Start Route Guid-
ance.
Routeguidance starts.
Routeguidancewith current trafficreports
Trafficinformation overview
Trafficreports arereceived using LiveTraffic
Information and areused forrouteguidance.
This serviceisunavailable in some countries.
Theremay be differences betweenthe traffic
reports receivedand theactual road and traffic
conditions.
Important informationonLiveTraffic Informa‐
tion:
R
Current traffic reports arereceived via the
Internetconnection.
R
The trafficsituation is updatedatshort, regu‐
lar intervals.
R
The subscription informationshows thesta‐
tus (/ page331).
330
Multimedia system
Map and compass
Map and compass overview
1
Savesthe current vehicle position
2
Movesthe map
3
Selects themap orientation and map view
4
Selectsthe function depending on theequip‐
ment:
•Sends ahazardwarning via Car-to-X.
•Filtersthe displayofPOIs in thevicinity
according to POI category
5
Switches thedisplayofpersonal POI sym‐
bols on themap on or off
6
Switches one of thefollowing displays on or
offdepending on theequipment:
•Weather information
•Satellitemap
•Traffic incidents
7
Switchesthe traffic map displayonoroff
The map and satelliteimages areshown in globe
projection. This allows forarealistic map display
in all map scales. The map uses elevationmodel‐
ing.
Depending on themap data, important buildings
in many cities aredepicted realisticallyonthe
map in small map scales (e.g. 1/32 mi (20 m),
1/16mi(50 m)). Other buildings areshown as
models.
%
Youcan setthe unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page307).
If online information is available, fuel pricesand
theavailabilityofparkingspaces in parking
garage aredisplayed, forexample.
%
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connectisavailable.
R
Youhave auser accountfor the
Mercedes me portal.
R
The service has been activated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at:http://
www.mercedes.me
%
The onlineinformation is notavailable in all
countries.
If Display in COMAND is activated in TrafficSign
Assist (/ page253),speed limits and overtak‐
ing restrictions aredisplayed on themap.
Multimedia system
333
Observe thefollowing when entering theactiva‐
tion code:
R
The activation code can be used forone vehi‐
cle
R
The activation code is nottransferable
R
The activation code has six digits
In theevent of thefollowing problems, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
The multimedia system does notacceptthe
activation code
R
Youhave lostthe activation code
Displaying thecompass
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Compass.
The compass displayshows thefollowing
information:
R
thecurrent direction of travelwithbear‐
ing (360°format) and compass direction
R
longitude and latitudecoordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
height (rounded)
R
number of GPS satellites from whicha
signal can be received
Setting themap scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
The map scale is setautomaticallydepending on
your drivingspeed.
Forjourneys in cities withdetailed citymodels,a
map viewfromthe driver's perspectiveisused.
#
Switch Auto Zoom on O or off ª.
%
The automaticallyselected map scale can be
changed manuallyfor ashorttime. The set‐
ting is resetautomatically afterafew sec‐
onds.
Displaying thesatellitemap
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Switch SatelliteMap on O or off ª.
or
#
If satellitemap display 6 is available in the
map menu, switchitonOor off ª
(/ page333).
Switched on O:satellitemaps aredisplayed
in map scales of 2mi(2km) or less.
Switched off ª:satellitemaps arenot dis‐
playedinmap scales from 2mi(2km) to
10 mi (10km).
%
Satellitemaps forthese map scales arenot
available in all countries.
Displaying weather information
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connectisavailable.
R
Youhave auser accountfor theMercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The servicehas been activated at an author‐
izedMercedes-BenzCenter.
Further information can be found at:http://
www.mercedes.me
338
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Activate Weather Information O.
or
#
If weather information display 6 is available
in themap menu, activate O(/ page333)
it.
Current weather information is displayedon
thenavigation map, e.g. temperatureor
cloud cover.
%
Weather information is notavailable in all
countries.
Calling up theDigital Operator'sManual
(navigation)
Calling up information on navigation
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Navigation Info
#
Select thetopic.
Telephone
Telephony
Notesontelephony
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while thevehicle is in motion
If youoperatecommunicationequipment
integrated in thevehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from thetraffic situation.
This could also cause youtolose control of
thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
#
If youcannotbesureofthis, stop the
vehicle whilstpaying attention to road
and trafficconditions and operate the
equipment withthe vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobilecommunication equip‐
ment whilethe vehicle is in motion
Mobile communicationsdevices distract the
driver from thetraffic situation.Thiscould
also cause thedrivertolose control of the
vehicle.
#
As thedriver, onlyoperatemobile com‐
munications devices when thevehicle is
stationary.
#
As avehicle occupant, onlyuse mobile
communicationsdevices in theareas
intended forthis purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
Youmustobservethe legal requirements forthe
countryinwhich youare currentlydriving when
operating mobilecommunication equipment in
thevehicle.
Further information can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Multimedia system
339
Information on Near Field Communication
(NFC)
NFC enables short-rangewirelessdatatransfer
or (re)connection of amobile phonewiththe
multimedia system.
The following functionsare available without
havingauthorizedamobile phone:
R
Transferring aURL to be viewedinthe multi‐
media system (see themanufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
R
Setting up thevehicle's Wi-Fi access data via
thesystemsettings (/ page304).
Further information can be found at:https://
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Using themobilephone withNear Field Com‐
munication (NFC)
Requirements:
R
NFC is activated on themobile phone (see
themanufacturer's operating instructions)
R
The mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked(see themanufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions)
#
To connect amobile phone: open thecover
of thearmrest on thecenter console.
#
Place theNFC area of themobile phone (see
manufacturer's operating instructions) on
NFC logo 1.
The mobile phone is connected to themulti‐
media system.
#
To changemobile phones: place theNFC
area of themobile phone on NFC logo 1.
If themobile phone has already been author‐
ized on themultimedia system, it is nowcon‐
nected.
If themobile phone is authorized on themul‐
timedia system forthe firsttime, it is connec‐
tedafter confirming themobile phone
instructions(see themanufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
Further information can be found at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
Setting thereception and transmission vol‐
ume
Requirements:
R
Amobile phoneisauthorized (/ page341).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Phone
This function ensures optimal languagequality.
#
Select Reception Volume or Transmission
Volume.
#
Setthe volume.
344
Multimedia system
Saving amobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select themobile phone contact ó.
#
Select p.
#
Select Save to Vehicle.
The contact savedinthe multimedia system
is identified by the f symbol.
Calling acontact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Entercharactersintothe search field.
#
Select thecontact.
#
Select thetelephone number.
The number is dialed.
Selecting further options in thecontacts
menu
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select acontact.
#
Select p.
Depending on thestoreddata, thefollowing
options areavailable:
R
Call
R
SendTextMessage
R
Show Website (if an Internet address has
been stored)
R
Navigate (if an address has been stored)
R
Save My Favorite
R
Send DTMF Tones (for anumber withDTMF
tones)
#
Select an option.
Deletingacontact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
Youcan delete contacts stored in thevehicle.
#
Search forthe contact.
#
Selectthe contact.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete Contact.
#
Select Yes.
Calllist
Calllistoverview
Depending on whether your mobile phonesup‐
ports thePBAPBluetooth
®
profile or not, this
can have different effects on thepresentation
and functionsofthe call list.
If thePBAPBluetooth
®
profile is supported, the
effects are as follows:
R
The call lists from themobile phone aredis‐
playedinthe multimedia system.
R
When connecting themobile phone, youmay
have to confirmthe connection forthe PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
If thePBAPBluetooth
®
profile is notsupported,
theeffects areasfollows:
R
The multimedia system generates its owncall
lists.
R
The call listisnot synchronized withthe call
lists in themobile phone.
348
Multimedia system
R
Remain in thevehicle if theroad and traffic
conditions permit youtodosountil avoice
connection is established withthe emer‐
gency callcenter service provider.
R
On thebasis of thecall, theservice provider
decideswhether it is necessarytocallres‐
cue teams and/or thepolice to theaccident
site.
If no connection can be made to theemergency
serviceseither, acorresponding message
appears in themedia display.
#
Dialthe local emergency numberonyour
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentional emergency call
#
Select ~ on themultifunction steering
wheel. Depress button forseveralseconds.
Data transfer of theMercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
In theevent of an automatic or manualemer‐
gency callthe following dataistransmitted, for
example:
R
Vehicle's GPS position data
R
GPS position dataonthe route(afew
(hundred meters)beforethe incident)
R
Direction of travel
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Vehicle drivetype
R
Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle
R
Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
R
Whether theemergency callwas initiated
manually or automatically
R
Time of theaccident
R
Languagesetting on themultimedia system
Datatransmittedisvehicle information. Forany
questionsabout thecollection, use and sharing
of theeCall system data, please contact MBU‐
SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-
MERC.
ForCanada,please contact MBC's Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
Customer requests forcovered information
should be submitted via thesame channels.
Foraccident clarificationpurposes,the following
measures can be takenuptoanhour afterthe
emergency callhas been initiated:
R
The current vehicle position can be called up.
R
Avoice connection to thevehicle occupants
can be established
Online and Internetfunctions
Internetconnection
Information on connecting to theInternet
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If youoperateinformation and communica‐
tionequipment integratedinthe vehicle
when driving, youwill be distracted from the
trafficsituation. Thiscould also cause youto
lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyoperatethis equipment when the
trafficsituation permits.
Multimedia system
361
Callingupweb browser options
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
The following functionsare available:
R
Refresh Page/Cancel
R
Zoom
R
Browser Settings
R
DeleteBrowser Data
#
Select an option.
#
Makethe desired changes to thesettings.
Calling up theweb browser settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
Browser Settings
The following functionsare available:
R
Block Pop-Ups
R
Activate Javascript
R
AllowCookies
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
DeleteBrowser Data
The following optionsare available:
R
All
R
Cache
R
Cookies
R
Entered URLs
R
FormData
#
Select an option.
#
Select Yes.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
ß Bookmarks
Selecting abookmark
#
Select an entry.
Creating abookmark
#
Select Add New Bookmark.
#
EnteraURL and aname.
#
Select ¡.
Editingabookmark
#
Highlight abookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Edit.
#
Enter aURL and aname.
#
Select ¡.
Deleting abookmark
#
Highlight abookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Closingthe browser
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
#
Select å Close Browser.
Multimedia system
365
TuneIn radio
Calling up Internet Radio
Requirements:
R
The InternetRadio service is activated.
R
The datavolume is available.
Dependingonthe country, datavolume may
need to be purchased.
R
AfastInternetconnection fordatatransmis‐
sion free of interference.
The servicesare country-dependent.
Formoreinformation, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
#
Select TuneIn Radio.
The InternetRadio display appears. The last
stationset starts playing.
%
The connectionqualitydepends on thelocal
mobile phone reception.
Internet Radio overview
1
InternetRadio provider
2
Selectedcategory
3
Display(if connectedtoprivate user
account)
4
Datatransfer rate
5
Current stationisstoredasafavorite
6
Additional information on thecurrent station
Selecting and connecting InternetRadio sta‐
tions
Multimediasystem:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
è Search
#
Select acategory.
#
Select astation.
The connectionisestablished automatically.
or
#
Select Enter Address or POI.
#
Enter astationnameusingthe entryfield.
%
Arelativelylarge volume of datacan be
transmittedwhen using InternetRadio.
Saving/deleting an InternetRadio station as
afavorite
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Select astation.
366
Multimedia system
#
Press and hold thecentralcontrol element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol appearsbythe station
name.
#
Select ß Favorites.
The listofsavedfavorite stations appears.
or
#
Createanaccountfor theonline provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on themulti‐
media system.
Your favoritesare importedtothe multimedia
system.
Deleting favorites
#
Select ß Favorites.
#
Select astation.
#
Press and hold thecentralcontrol element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by thestationnamedisap‐
pears.
Setting InternetRadio options
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
Z Options
The following optionsare available:
R
Select Stream:selectthe stream quality.
R
Login to TuneIn Account:log in to your
TuneIn user account.
R
Log OutofAccount:log outofyour TuneIn
user account.
#
Select an option.
Media
Audio mode
Information on theaudio mode
&
WARNING Risk of distraction whenhan‐
dling data storagemedia
If youhandle adatastorage medium while
driving, your attentionisdivertedfromthe
trafficconditions.Thiscould also cause you
to lose control of thevehicle.
#
Onlyhandle adatastorage medium
when thevehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems:
R
FAT32
R
exFAT
R
NTFS
Permissible datastorage medium:
R
SD card
R
USB storagedevice
R
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
R
MTP devices
R
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
%
Observethe following notes:
R
The multimedia system supports atotal
of up to 50,000 files.
R
Datastorage media up to 2TBare sup‐
ported(32‑bit address space).
Multimedia system
367
Supportedformats:
R
MP3
R
WMA
R
AAC
R
WAV
R
FLAC
R
ALAC
%
Observe thefollowing notes:
R
Due to thelarge varietyofavailable
music files regarding encoders, sampling
ratesand datarates, playback cannot
alwaysbeguaranteed.
R
Due to thewide rangeofUSB devices
available on themarket, playbackcannot
be guaranteed forall USB devices.
R
Copy-protected music files or DRM
encryptedfiles cannotbeplayedback.
R
MP3 players mustsupportMediaTrans‐
ferProtocol (MTP).
Manufacturedunder license from DolbyLabora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and thedouble-D sym‐
bol aretrademarks of DolbyLaboratories.
Gracenote,the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist
Plus areeither registeredtrademarks or trade‐
marks of Gracenote,Inc.inthe United States
and/or other countries.
368
Multimedia system
"Made foriPod",and "Made foriPhone," mean
that an electronic accessory has been designed
to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by thedevel‐
oper to meetApple performancestandards.
Apple is notresponsiblefor theoperation of this
device or its compliancewithsafetyand regula‐
tory standards. Please note that theuse of this
accessorywithiPod, or iPhonemay affect wire‐
less performance.
Forthe USA: iPhone
®
,iPod
®
,iPodclassic
®
,
iPod nano
®
,and iPod touch
®
aretrademarks of
Apple Inc., registeredinthe U.S. and other coun‐
tries. Lightning™ is atrademarkofApple Inc.
ForCanada: iPhone, iPod,iPodclassic, iPod
nano,and iPod touchare trademarks of Apple
Inc., registeredinthe U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is atrademarkofApple Inc.
Notesoncopyright
Audio files that youcreateorreproduce yourself
forplayback aregenerallysubject to copyright
protection. In manycountries, reproductions,
even forprivate use, arenot permitted without
theprior consent of thecopyright holder.Make
surethat youknowabout theapplicable copy‐
right regulations and that youcomply with these.
Activatingmediamode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select amedia source.
Playable music files areplayedback.
Inserting/removing an SD card
&
DANGER Risk of fatalinjuryfromswal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards aresmall parts.
Theycould be swallowedand lead to chok‐
ing.
#
Keep SD cards out of thereachofchil‐
dren.
#
Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD cardhas been swallowed.
*
NOTE Damage due to high temperatures
High temperatures maydamagethe SD card.
#
Remove theSDcardafter use and take
it out of thevehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Mem. Card
Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowagecompartment underthe armrest.
#
Insertthe SD memorycardintothe SD card
slotuntil it engages. The side withthe con‐
tacts mustface downwards.
Playable music files areplayedback.
Removing
#
Pressthe SD card.
#
Remove theSDcard.
Multimedia system
369
Overviewofthe audio mode
1
Activedatastorage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Tracknumber and number of tracks in the
tracklist
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
FullScreen (for video playback)
A
Options
Connecting USB devices
*
NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damageUSB devices.
#
Remove theUSB device afteruse and
take it out of thevehicle.
370
Multimedia system
#
Searchfor and select video files or playlists
withvideo files.
Playable video files areplayedback.
The multimedia system supports thefollowing
formats:
R
MPEG
R
AVI, DivX, MKV
R
MP4, M4V
R
WMV
%
If thevehicle is traveling faster than 3mph
(5 km/h) thevideo imageishidden from the
driver.Ifavailable, thechannel and program
information is continuously displayed.
Due to thelarge varietyofavailable video
files regarding encoders, sampling ratesand
datatransfer rates, playbackcannotbeguar‐
anteed.
Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080)are sup‐
ported.
Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encryptedfiles cannot
be playedback.
372
Multimedia system
Overviewofvideo mode
1
Activedatastorage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Tracknumber and number of tracks in the
tracklist
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
FullScreen (for video playback)
A
Options
Activating/deactivatingfull-screenmode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select adatastorage medium.
Playable video files areplayedback.
#
To activatefull-screenmode: select #
Full Screen.
Multimediasystem
373
#
To deactivatefull-screen mode: press the
touchpad.
Changing video settings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Z Options
5
Picture Format
The following pictureformats areavailable:
R
Automatic
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
#
Select apictureformat.
Adjustingthe brightness manually
If the Automatic pictureformat is switched off,
youcan adjustthe brightness yourself.
#
Select Brightness.
#
Adjustthe brightness.
Media search
Starting themedia search
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
ª Search
Depending on theconnected media sources and
files, thefollowing categories arelisted:
R
Current Track List
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Tracks
R
Folders
R
Music Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Podcasts (Apple
®
devices)
R
Audiobooks (Apple
®
devices)
#
Select acategory.
%
The categories areavailable as soon as the
entiremedia content hasbeenread in and
analyzed.
Media Interface
Information aboutthe Media Interface
Media Interface is auniversal interface forthe
connection of mobile audioequipment. The mul‐
timediasystemhas twoUSB ports. The USB
ports arelocated in thestowage compartment
underthe armrest.
Supporteddevices
The Media Interface allows youtoconnect the
following datastorage media:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
MP3 player
R
USB devices
Fordetails and alistofsupporteddevices, visit
our websiteathttp://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.Followthe instructions in
the"Media Interface" section.
374
Multimedia system
Switching to Media Interface
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Connectadatastorage medium to theUSB
port(/page370).
#
Select amedia device.
Playable music files areplayedback.
OverviewofMedia Interface
Multimedia system
375
Displaying satelliteradio serviceinformation
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
Sound
Tone settings
Information about thesound system
The soundsystemhas atotal output of 100W
and is equippedwithten speakers. It is available
forall functions in theradio and media modes.
Calling up thesound menu
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functionsare available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Automatic VolumeAdjustment
R
Other SoundSettings
#
Select asoundmenu.
Adjustingtreble, mid-rangeand bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Changethe settings.
Activating/deactivatingautomaticvolume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Adjustingthe balance/fader
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance and Fader
#
Adjustthe balance and fader.
#
To exit themenu: press the % button.
Burmester
®
surround soundsystem
Information aboutthe Burmester
®
surround
soundsystem
The Burmester
®
surround soundsystemhas a
totaloutput of 590 Wand is equipped with13
speakers. It is available forall functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up thesound menu in the
Burmester
®
surround soundsystem
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functionsare available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Automatic VolumeAdjustment
R
SurroundSound
R
SoundFocus
R
Other SoundSettings
#
Select afunction.
Multimedia system
387
Activating/deactivatingvolumeadjustment
in theBurmester
®
high-end 3D surround
soundsystem
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Adjustingthe balance/fader in the
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound
system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance and Fader
#
Adjustthe balance and fader.
#
To exit themenu: press the % button.
Adjustingthe seat-basedsound optimization
in the Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround
soundsystem
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
VIP Seat
This setting optimizes thesound playbackfor the
selected seat position.
#
Activatethe function O.
#
Select aseat position.
Selecting thesound profile in the
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound
system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Sound Profiles
The following profiles areavailable:
R
Pure
R
EasyListening
R
Live
R
Surround
R
3D-Sound
#
Select asoundprofile.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of injury from laser radi‐
ation from theBlu-ray drive
The Blu-ray driveisaclass 1laser product. If
youopen thehousing of theBlu-ray drive,
thereisarisk of exposuretoinvisible laser
radiation.
Laser radiation can damageyour retina.
#
Do notopenthe housing.
#
Alwayshave maintenance work and
repairscarried out by aqualified spe‐
cialistworkshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in thevehicle
If objectssuchasheadphones/headsets or
external audio/videosources arenot
secured in thevehicle interior,theycan be
flung aroundand hit vehicle occupants.
Multimedia system
389
#
Alwaysstowthese items or similar
objects carefully so that they cannotbe
flung around, forexample in alockable
vehicle stowagecompartment.
Observethe notesonloading thevehicle.
Replacing batteries(Rear SeatEntertain‐
ment System)
Batteries arerequired forthe remote control and
thecordless headphones.
&
DANGER Serious damagetohealth
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosivesub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries maycause
serious damagetohealth.
Thereisarisk of fatalinjury.
#
Keep batteries out of thereachofchil‐
dren.
#
If batteries areswallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTALNOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them withthe household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentallyresponsiblemanner.
Take dischargedbatteries to aqualified
specialistworkshop or to acollection
pointfor used batteries.
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes:
R
Tworear displays
R
Tworemote controls
R
Up to twocordless headphones
R
Blu-ray drive
R
Portsfor USB (two) and HDMI
%
The function of theremote control and the
cordless headphones can be impaired by
other radio-based electronic devices, e.g.
mobilephones.
390
Multimedia system
The batterycompartmentislocated on theleft
headphone.
#
Switchthe headphones off.
#
Turn batterycompartmentcover 1 counter-
clockwise and remove.
#
Remove dischargedbatteries from thebat‐
tery compartment.
#
Insertnew batteries. Observe thepolarity
markings on thebatteries and batterycom‐
partment.
#
Replace batterycompartmentcover 1 and
turnitclockwise until it engages.
#
Switchthe headphones on.
If thebatteries have been insertedcorrectly,
theindicator lampwill light up green.
Blu-raydrive overview
1
Disc slot
2
To insert/eject data storagemedium
Depending on thevehicle equipment, theBlu-ray
driveislocated in thefollowing positions:
R
at therear of thecenter console under the
automatic climatecontrol panel
Multimedia system
395
Activatingthe A/Cfunction
#
Select A/C.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Controlling therear climatecontrol automat‐
ically
#
Select AUTO.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª thefunction.
Setting theairflow
#
Select Airflow.
#
Setthe airflow.
Setting thetemperature
#
Select Temperature.
#
Setthe temperature.
Setting theair distribution
#
Select Air Distribution.
#
Setthe air distribution.
Starting ENERGIZING comfortinthe rear
passenger compartment
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
System
5
ENERGIZING Comfort
ENERGIZINGcomfortprogram overview
#
Foranoverviewofthe available ENERGIZING
comfort program(/page312).
Starting theENERGIZINGcomfortprogram
The ENERGIZING comfortprogram can only be
startedvia therear display forthe seat to which
therear display belongs.
#
Forinformation on startingENERGIZING
comfort program(/page313).
Starting PowerNap forthe rear seats
Forthe rear seatsthe Power Nap function is
available foryou as an additional ENERGIZING
comfortprogram.
%
PowerNap can onlybestarted when youare
drivingdue to thebatterypowerrequired.
The program runs in threephases:
R
Sleep onsetphase: relaxingmusic is played
in this phase, and thewarmed seats provide
asubtle massage.
R
Sleep phase: theactivefunctionsare deacti‐
vatedorrestricted as muchaspossible.
R
Waking phase: in this phase, slightly stimu‐
latingmusic is played, and theair is purified
withionization and scented. The seat is ven‐
tilated.The vehicle interior is illuminated with
stimulatinglight.
#
Select Power Nap.
The program is started.
Configuring PowerNap
#
Call up additional options Ü for Power
Nap.
#
To setthe duration: select DurationXXMin.
#
Setthe desired running time.
#
To select thefunction: switch thefunctions
included in theprogram on O or off ª.
Multimedia system
397
Media
Information about media mode in therear
passenger compartment
The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes a
Blu-raydrive (/ page395), twoUSB ports and
an HDMIport(/page396).
Depending on thevehicle model and equipment
level, theBlu-raydrive is found:
R
at therear of thecenter console under the
automatic climatecontrol panel
R
between therear shelf and through-load ski
bag
Datastorage media and devices supportedby
theRear Seat Entertainment System:
R
SD cards
R
USB storagedevice
R
Audio CD
R
DataCD
R
DataDVD
R
Video DVD
R
BD (Blu-ray disc) video
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
MTP devices
R
Bluetooth
®
audio
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment can only be
authorizedusingthe multimedia system.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System supports a
total of up to 50,000 files. The Rear Seat Enter‐
tainment System can also access files on the
multimedia system.
Further information about audiomode
(/ page367).
Further information about Bluetooth
®
audio
(/ page376).
is atrademarkofDVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
400
Multimedia system
Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™and thelogos aretrade‐
marks of theBlu-rayDisc Association.
Java is aregisteredtrademarkofOracle and/or
its affiliates.
The termsHDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multi‐
media Interface, and theHDMILogo aretrade‐
marks or registeredtrademarks of HDMI Licens‐
ing LLCinthe United States and other countries.
Gracenote,the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist
Plus areeither registeredtrademarks or trade‐
marks of Gracenote,Inc.inthe United States
and/or other countries.
Manufactured under license from DolbyLabora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and thedouble-D sym‐
bol aretrademarks of DolbyLaboratories.
Multimedia system
401
ForDTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufacturedunder license from DTSLicensing
Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, theSymbol, &DTS and
theSymbol together areregisteredtrademarks
of DTS, Inc.
©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
"Made foriPod",and "Made foriPhone," mean
that an electronic accessory has been designed
to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by thedevel‐
oper to meetApple performancestandards.
Apple is notresponsiblefor theoperation of this
device or its compliancewithsafetyand regula‐
tory standards. Please note that theuse of this
accessorywithiPod, or iPhonemay affect wire‐
less performance.
Forthe USA: iPhone
®
,iPod
®
,iPodclassic
®
,
iPod nano
®
,and iPod touch
®
aretrademarks of
Apple Inc., registeredinthe U.S. and other coun‐
tries. Lightning™ is atrademarkofApple Inc.
ForCanada: iPhone, iPod,iPodclassic, iPod
nano,and iPod touchare trademarks of Apple
Inc., registeredinthe U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is atrademarkofApple Inc.
Cinavia notice: this product uses Cinavia tech‐
nology to limit theuse of unauthorized copies of
some commercially-produced film and videos
and their soundtracks. When aprohibited use of
an unauthorized copyisdetected, amessagewill
be displayed and playbackorcopying will be
interrupted. Moreinformation about Cinavia
technology is provided at Cinavia OnlineCon‐
sumer InformationCenter at http://
www.cinavia.com.Torequestadditional informa‐
tion about Cinavia by mail,send apostcardwith
your mailingaddress to:Cinavia Consumer Infor‐
mation Center,Box 86851, San Diego, CA,
92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology
under license from Verance Corporation and is
protected by U.S. Patent 7, 369,677 and other
U.S. and worldwide patentsissued and pending
as well as copyright and trade secret protection
forcertain aspectsofsuchtechnology.Cinavia is
atrademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright
2004-2012 Verance Corporation. All rights
reservedbyVerance.ReverseEngineering or dis‐
assemblyisprohibited.
Inserting adisc
&
WARNING Risk of injury from laser radi‐
ation from theBlu-raydrive
The Blu-raydrive is aclass 1laser product. If
youopen thehousing of theBlu-raydrive,
402
Multimedia system
4
Opens thevideo displayofthe Rear Seat
Entertainment System
5
Confirms entry in control menu
6
Navigates through theBlu-ray/DVD menu
7
Changes cameraperspectives
8
Changes theaudio language
9
Shows or hides subtitles
A
Selectsascene
B
Color selection menu
C
Stops playback
D
Pauses playback
Blu-ray/DVD menu
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Disc
Calling up theBlu-ray or DVDmenu
The Blu-rayorDVD menuisthe menu savedon
thedisc itself.
#
To showdisc functions: press the 9 button
on theremote control.
#
Select Menu.
The Blu-ray or DVDmenu appears.
Selecting menuitems in the Blu-rayorDVD
menu
#
Select amenu item.
#
Pressthe 9 button on theremote control.
#
Select Select.
#
Press the 9 button on theremote control.
The action is carried out or asubmenu
appears.
Exiting theBlu-ray or DVDmenu
#
Press the ~ button on theremote control
untilyou see thefilm.
Playbackoption in Blu-ray/DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Disc
Pausing or continuing playback
#
To showdisc functions: press the 9 button
on theremote control.
#
To pause playback: select Ë.
#
To stop playback: select É.
#
To continueplayback:select Ì.
Fast forwarding or rewinding
#
Press and hold the C or D button in
theDVD/Blu-ray control menu untilthe
desired position has been reached.
Selecting aBlu-ray/DVD chapter
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Disc
#
Call up theBlu-ray or DVDmenu
(/ page 404).
The Blu-ray or DVDmenu appears.
#
Select ascene or chapter.
#
Press the 9 button on theremote control.
#
Select thechapternumber.
#
Press the 9 button on theremote control.
Afterashorttime, playback starts from the
selected position.
404
Multimedia system
Selecting afilm or track
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Disc
#
Call up theBlu-ray or DVDmenu
(/ page 404).
The Blu-ray or DVDmenu appears.
#
Select thefilm or track.
#
Press the 9 button on theremote control.
#
Call up theselection list.
#
Select afilm or track.
Switching to HDMI mode
Requirements:
R
Amedia source is connectedtothe Rear
Seat Entertainment System via theHDMI
port(/page396).
R
ThereisanHDMIsignal to theRear Seat
Entertainment System.
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
To showthe menu: press the = button.
#
Select HDMI.
The Playback content displayappears.
#
To showthe menu: press the = button.
#
Select Full Screen.
Radio
Switchingonthe radio
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Radio
#
Alternatively: press the $ button on the
remote control. Further information about
radio mode (/ page380).
Sound
Overviewofthe Rear Seat Entertainment
System sound settings
The equalizer functions,automatic volume
adjustment and dynamic rangecontrol areavail‐
able in thetone menuofthe Rear Seat Entertain‐
mentSystem.
Further information about thesound system
(/ page387).
Information about dynamic rangelimitation
The dynamic rangeofthe audio signal can be
adjustedfor theplaybackdevice. The Dynamic
Range Control function compensates fordiffer‐
ences in thequietest and loudestsounds. This
raises thevolume of quietdialog compared to
loud sound effects, forexample.
The following settings areavailable:
R
Automatic
The dynamic rangeisset automatically.
This setting is onlyavailable forBlu-ray discs.
R
Standard
The dynamic rangeisrestricted to improve
thelistening experience and comprehension.
R
Maximum
The dynamic rangeisnot restricted. The
playbackvolume is thesame as theoriginal
soundtrack.
Setting dynamic rangelimitation
Requirements:
R
Thereisnomedia playback.
Multimedia system
405
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Dynamic Range Control
#
Select thesetting.
406
Multimedia system
ASSYSTPLUSservice interval display
Function of theASSYSTPLUSservice interval
display
The ASSYSTPLUSservice intervaldisplayonthe
Instrument Displayprovidesinformationonthe
remaining time or distance before thenext
service due date.
Youcan hide this service displayusing theback
button on theleft-hand side of thesteering
wheel.
Depending on howthe vehicle is used, the
ASSYSTPLUSservice intervaldisplaymay
shortenthe service interval, e.g. in thefollowing
cases:
R
Mainlyshort-distance driving
R
Whenthe engine is oftenleftidling forlong
periods
R
In theevent of frequent coldstart phases
Mercedes-Benzrecommends avoiding such
operating conditions.
Youcan obtain information concerningthe serv‐
icing of your vehicle from aqualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Displaying theservice duedate
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
ASSYST PLUS
The next service due dateisdisplayed.
#
To exit thedisplay: press thebackbutton
on theleft-hand side of thesteering wheel.
Be suretoalso payattention to thefollowing
related topic:
R
Operating theon-boardcomputer
(/ page264).
Information on regular maintenance work
*
NOTE Prematurewear through failureto
observe service due dates
Service work whichisnot carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damagetothe vehicle.
#
Alwaysobserve theprescribed service
intervals.
#
Alwayshave theprescribed service
work carried out at aqualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service intervalisbased on nor‐
mal operation of thevehicle. Maintenance work
will needtobeperformed moreoften if thevehi‐
cle is operated under arduous conditions or
increased loads.
The ASSYSTPLUSservice intervaldisplayisonly
an aid. The driver of thevehicle bearsresponsi‐
bility as regardstowhether maintenancework
needs to be performed moreoften than speci‐
fied based on theactual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R
regular city driving withfrequent intermedi‐
atestops
R
mainly short-distance driving
Maintenance and care
407
R
frequent operation in mountainousterrain or
on poor road surfaces
R
whenthe engine is oftenleftidling forlong
periods
R
operation in particularlydusty conditions
and/orifair-recirculation modeisfrequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions,havethe
interior air filter,engineair cleaner,engineoil
and oil filter etc. changed morefrequently.The
tires mustbecheckedmorefrequentlyifthe
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at aqualified
specialistworkshop.
Batterydisconnection periods
The ASSYSTPLUSservice interval display
can onlycalculatethe servicedue date when
thebattery is connected.
#
Note down theservice due datedisplayedon
theinstrument displaybeforedisconnecting
thebattery(/page407).
Engine compartment
Activehood(pedestrian protection)
Operation of theactivehood (pedestrian pro‐
tection)
In certain accident situations,the risk of injury
to pedestrians can be reduced by theactuation
of theactivehood. The rear area of thehood is
raised by approximately80mm.
Forthe drivetothe workshop, resetthe trig‐
geredactivehood yourself.After theactivehood
has been triggered, pedestrian protection may
be limited.
Aqualified specialistworkshop mustre-instate
thefull functionality of theactivehood.
The activehood is notavailable in all countries.
Resetting theactivehood
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#
Allowthe engine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
#
With your handflat, push down activehood
1 in theareaaround thehinges on both
sides (arrows).
The hood mustengageinposition.
#
If theactivehood can be raised slightly at
therear in theareaofthe hinges, repeat the
step until it engages correctly.
408
Maintenanceand care
Opening/closing thehood
&
WARNING Risk of accident if theengine
hood is unlatched while driving
An unlockedenginehood mayopen up when
thevehicle is in motion and blockyour view.
#
Neverunlatchthe engine hood while
driving.
#
Beforeevery trip, ensurethat the
engine hood is latched.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing theengine
hood
When opening or closing theengine hood, it
maysuddenlydropintothe end position.
Thereisarisk of injury foranyone in the
engine hood's rangeofmovement.
#
Onlyopen or close theengine hood
when thereare no persons in the
engine hood's rangeofmovement.
&
WARNING Danger of burnswhen open‐
ing thehood
If youopen thehood when theengine has
overheated or during afireinthe engine
compartment, youcould come intocontact
withhot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Beforeopening thehood, allowthe
engine to cool down.
#
In theevent of afireinthe engine com‐
partment, keep thehood closed and
call thefireservice.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment maycontinue to move or suddenly
move again evenafter theignition has been
switched off, e.g. thecooler fan.
Make sureofthe following beforeperforming
tasksinthe engine compartment:
#
Switchthe ignition off.
#
Nevertouchthe danger zone surround‐
ing movingcomponent parts, e.g. the
rotationareaofthe fan.
#
Remove jewelryand watches.
#
Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and thefuel injection
system work under high voltage. If youtouch
component parts whichare under voltage,
youcould receive an electric shock.
#
Nevertouchcomponent partsofthe
ignition system or thefuel injection sys‐
temwhen theignition is switched on.
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine,the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
Maintenanceand care
409
#
Allow theengine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wiperswhile theengine hood
is open
When theengine hood is open and thewind‐
shield wipersare setinmotion,you can be
trappedbythe wiper linkage.
#
Alwaysswitchoff thewindshield wipers
and ignition beforeopening theengine
hood.
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
#
To open: pull lever 1 to release thehood.
#
Push handle 1 of thehood catchupwards
and liftthe hood by approximately15in
(40 cm).
#
To close: lowerthe hood and letitfall from a
height of approximately8in (20 cm).
#
If thehood can still be liftedslightly, open
thehood again and close it withalittle more
forceuntil it engages correctly.
410
Maintenance and care
Engine oil
Checking theengine oil levelusing theoil
dipstick
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#
Allowthe engine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
Plug-in hybrid: observe thenotes in theSupple‐
ment.Otherwise, youmay notrecognize dan‐
gers.
Requirements:
R
The enginemusthave an oil dipstick. If not,
theengine oil levelcan be checkedonlywith
theon-boardcomputer (/ page411 ).
Depending on theengine, theoil dipstickmay be
installed in theengine compartmentindifferent
locations.
The waitingtimebeforechecking theoil level
when theengine is at normal operating tempera‐
tureisfiveminutes.
#
Park thevehicle on alevel surface.
#
Pull oil dipstick 1 outand wipe off.
#
Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 intothe guide
tube to thestop, and take it out again after
approximatelythree seconds.
R
Oil leveliscorrect:oil levelisbetween 2
and 3.
R
Oil leveltoo low: oil levelisat3or
below.
R
Oil leveltoo high: oil levelisabove 2.
#
If theoil levelistoo low, add 1.1USqt
(1 liter) of engine oil.
#
If theoil levelistoo high, have theexcess
engine oil removedassoon as possible at a
qualified specialistworkshop.
Checking theengine oil levelusing theon-
boardcomputer
Requirements:
R
The enginehas warmed up.
R
The vehicle is parkedonalevel surface.
R
The engine is running at idle speed.
The engine oillevelisdetermined during driving.
Determiningthe engine oil levelcan take up to
Maintenance and care
411
30 minutes withanormal driving styleand even
longer withanactivedrivingstyle.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Engine Oil Level
Youwill see oneofthe following messages on
themultifunction display:
R
Measuring Engine Oil Level...:measurement
of theoil levelisnot yetpossible.
#
Repeat therequestafter amaximumof
30 minutes driving.
R
Engine Oil Level OK and thebar displayfor
indicating theoil levelonthe multifunction
displayisgreen and is between "min" and
"max": theoil leveliscorrect.
R
Engine Oil LevelAdd 1.0 l and thebar display
forindicating theoil levelonthe multifunc‐
tion displayisorangeand is below"min":
#
Add1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
R
Reduce Engine Oil Level and thebar display
forindicating theoil levelonthe multifunc‐
tion displayisorangeand is above "max":
#
Drain offany excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult aqualified specialist
workshop.
R
For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On:
#
Switchonthe ignition to checkthe engine oil
level.
R
Engine Oil LevelSystem Inoperative:sensor
faulty or notinserted.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
R
Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail.:
#
Close thehood.
Refilling engine oil
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#
Allowthe engine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and injuryfrom
engine oil
If engine oil comes intocontact with hot
component parts in theengine compart‐
ment,itmay ignite.
#
Makesurethat no engine oil is spilled
next to thefiller opening.
#
Allowthe engine to cool offand thor‐
oughlyclean theengine oil from compo‐
nentparts beforestartingthe vehicle.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter,incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do notuse engine oilsoroil filters
whichdonot correspond to thespecifi‐
cationsexplicitly prescribed forthe
service intervals.
#
Do notalter theengine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer changeintervals
than prescribed.
#
Do notuse additives.
412
Maintenance and care
#
Followthe instructions in theservice
intervaldisplayregarding theoil
change.
*
NOTE Damage caused by refilling too
muchengine oil
Toomuchengine oil can damagethe engine
or thecatalytic converter.
#
Have excess engine oil removedata
qualified specialistworkshop.
%
Depending on theengine, thecap maybe
installed in theengine compartmentindif‐
ferent locations.
#
Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
#
Addengineoil.
#
Replace cap 1 and turnitclockwise as far
as it will go.
#
Checkthe oil levelagain (/ page411 ).
Checking thecoolant level
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine,the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#
Allowthe engine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
&
WARNING Risk of scalding from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when theengine is warm.Ifyou
open thecap, youcould be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
#
Letthe engine cool down beforeopen‐
ing thecap.
#
When opening thecap, wear protective
glovesand safetyglasses.
#
Open thecap slowlytorelease pres‐
sure.
Maintenance and care
413
#
Park thevehicle on alevel surface.
#
Checkthe coolant temperaturedisplayinthe
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperaturemustbeinthe bot‐
tomquarterofthe temperaturedisplay.
#
If necessary, remove thecover.
#
Slowly turncap 1 counter-clockwise to
relieve overpressure.
#
Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it.
The coolantleveliscorrect in thefollowing
cases:
R
If theengine is cold, up to markerbar 2.
R
If theengine is warm,upto0.6 in (1.5 cm)
over markerbar 2.
#
If necessary, add coolant that has been
approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
R
Further information on coolant (/ page486)
Refilling thewindshield washer system
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromhot com‐
ponent parts in theengine compartment
Certain componentsinthe engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. theengine, the
radiator and parts of theexhaust system.
#
Allowthe engine to cool down and only
touchcomponent partsdescribed in
thefollowing.
&
WARNING Danger of burnswhen open‐
ing thehood
If youopen thehood when theengine has
overheated or during afireinthe engine
compartment, youcould come intocontact
withhot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Beforeopening thehood, allowthe
engine to cool down.
#
In theevent of afireinthe engine com‐
partment, keep thehood closed and
call thefireservice.
&
WARNING ‑Riskoffireand injuryfrom
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrateishighly
flammable. It couldigniteifitcomes into
contact with hotengine component parts or
theexhaust system.
#
Makesurethat no windshield washer
concentratespills out next to thefiller
opening.
414
Maintenance and care
#
Remove cap 1 by thetab, place on theedge
of thefiller opening and engageinplace.
#
Refilling washer fluid.
Keeping theair-water duct free
#
Keep theareabetween thehood and the
windshield free of deposits,e.g.ice, snow
and leaves.
Cleaning and care
Notesonwashingthe vehicleinacar wash
&
WARNING Risk of accident dueto
reduced braking effect afterwashing the
vehicle
The braking effect is reduced afterwashing
thevehicle.
#
Afterthe vehicle has been washed,
brakecarefully while paying attention to
thetraffic conditionsuntilthe braking
effect hasbeenfully restored.
*
NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car
wash
#
Beforedriving intoacar wash make
surethat thecar wash is suitable for
thevehicle dimensions.
#
Ensurethereissufficient ground clear‐
ance between theunderbody and the
guide rails of thecar wash.
#
Ensurethat theclearance widthofthe
car wash, in particular thewidthofthe
guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damagetoyourvehicle when using a
car wash, ensurethe following beforehand:
R
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICand the
HOLD functionare deactivated.
R
The 360° Cameraorthe rear viewcamerais
switched off.
R
The side windows and slidingsunroof are
completely closed.
R
The blower forthe ventilation/heating is
switched off.
R
The windshield wiperswitchisinposition
g.
R
In car washes withaconveyorsystem: neu‐
tral i is engaged.
R
The SmartKey is at adistance of at least
10 ft (3 m) away from thevehicle, otherwise
thetrunk lid could open unintentionally.
Maintenance and care
415
%
If youwould liketoleave thevehicle while it
is being washed, makesurethe SmartKey is
located in thevehicle. The parkposition j
is otherwise automaticallyengaged.
%
If, afterthe car wash, youremove thewax
from thewindshield and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using apowerwasher
&
WARNING Risk of accident whenusing
high-pressurecleaning equipment with
round-spray nozzles
The waterjet from around-spray nozzle(dirt
grinder) maycause damage to tires and sus‐
pension components that is notvisible.
Componentsdamaged in this waymay fail
unexpectedly.
#
Do notuse high-pressurecleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to
clean your vehicle.
#
Damaged tires or suspension compo‐
nentsmustbereplaced immediately.
To avoid damagetoyourvehicle, observe thefol‐
lowing when using apower washer:
R
keep theSmartKey at least10ft(3m)away
from thevehicle. Otherwise thetrunk lid
could open unintentionally.
R
maintain adistance of at least11.8in
(30 cm) to thevehicle.
R
vehicles with decorativefoil: parts of your
vehicle arecoveredwithadecorativefoil.
Maintain adistance of at least27. 6in
(70 cm) between thefoil-coveredparts of the
vehicle and thenozzle of thepowerwasher.
Move thepower washer nozzle around whilst
cleaning. The watertemperatureofthe
powerwashermustnot exceed 14F
(60 °C).
R
observethe information on thecorrect dis‐
tance in theequipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
R
do notpoint thenozzle of thepowerwasher
directly at sensitiveparts suchastires, slits,
electrical components, batteries, light bulbs
and ventilation slots.
Washing thevehicle by hand
Observe thelegal requirements, e.g. in anumber
of countries, washing by hand is onlypermitted
in specially designated wash bays.
#
Use amild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
#
Wash thevehicle withlukewarm waterusing
asoftcar sponge. When doing so, do not
expose thevehicle to direct sunlight.
#
Carefully hose thevehicle offwithwater and
dryusing achamois. Take carenot to point
thewater jetdirectlytowards theair inlet
grille belowthe hood.
416
Maintenance and care
Notesonpaintwork/mattefinish paintwork care
Observe thefollowing information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintworkdamage
Paintwork
R
Insect remains: soak withinsect removerand rinse offthe
treated areas afterwards.
R
Birddroppings: soak withwater andrinseoff afterwards.
R
Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐
tlywithacloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
R
Coolantand brakefluid: remove withadampcloth and
clean water.
R
Tarstains:use tarremover.
R
Wax: usesilicone remover.
R
Do notattachstickers,films or similar materials.
R
Remove dirtimmediately, wherepossible.
Maintenance and care
417
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintworkdamage
Matte finish
Onlyuse careproducts approvedfor Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do notpolish thevehicle and alloywheels.
R
Onlyuse car washes that correspond to thelatestengi‐
neering standards.
R
Do notuse car wash programs withafinalhot waxtreat‐
ment.
R
Do notuse paint cleaners,buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers,e.g. wax.
R
Alwayshavepaintworkrepairscarried out at aqualified
specialistworkshop.
Notesoncleaning decorativefoils
Observe thenotes on mattefinish care in the
chapter"Notesonpaintwork/mattefinish paint‐
work care" (/ page 417). Theyalsoapply to
mattedecorativefoils.
418
Maintenance and care
Cleaning Night View Assist
Camerabehind thewindshield
*
NOTE Damage to thecameralens when
cleaning
If youclean thecameralens yourself or spray
glass cleaner on thecameralens, youcould
damagethe cameralens.
#
When cleaningthe field of vision of the
driving systems, do notspray glass
cleaner on thecameralens.
#
If thecameralens is dirty,please con‐
tact aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Fold down thecameracoverbyhandle
recess 1.
#
Use acloth to clean thewindshield in front of
thecamera.
Camerainthe radiator grill
Cameralens 2 is cleaned at regular intervals
by operating thewindshield washer system.
#
Use clear waterand asoftcloth to clean
camera lens 2 when it is very dirty.
420
Maintenanceand care
Notesoncareofvehicle parts
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipersare switched on while
thewindshield is being cleaned
If thewindshield wipersare setinmotion
while youare cleaningthe windshield or
wiper blades, youcan be trapped by the
wiper arm.
#
Alwaysswitchoff thewindshield wipers
and theignition beforecleaningthe
windshield or wiperblades.
&
WARNING Risk of burnsfromthe tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhausttailpipe and tailpipe trims can
becomeveryhot.Ifyou come intocontact
withthese parts of thevehicle, youcould
burnyourself.
#
Alwaysbeparticularly careful around
thetailpipe and thetailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closelyin
this area.
#
Allowvehicle parts to cool down before
touchingthem.
Observe thefollowing information:
Notesoncleaning and careAvoiding vehicledamage
Wheels/rims
Use waterand acid-free wheelcleaners.
R
Do notuse acidic wheelcleanerstoremove brakedust.
This could damagewheel bolts and brakecomponents.
R
To avoid corrosion of thebrake discs and brakepads, drive
thevehicle forafew minutes aftercleaning beforeparking
it. The brakediscs and brakepads warm up and dryout.
Windows
Clean windows inside and outside withadampcloth and with
acleaningagent recommended forMercedes-Benz.
Do notuse dryclothsorabrasiveorsolvent-based cleaning
agents to clean theinside of windows.
Wiper blades
Fold out thewiper blades and clean them using adampcloth.Donot clean thewiper blades toooften.
Maintenance andcare
421
#
(1): Locatethe statement"The combined
weight of occupantsand cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
#
(2): Determine thecombined weight of the
driver and passengersthat will be riding in
your vehicle.
#
(3): Subtract thecombined weight of the
driver and passengersfromXXX kg or
XXX lbs.
#
(4): The resulting figureequals theavailable
amountofcargo and luggageload capacity.
Forexample, if the"XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150lbpas‐
sengersinyour vehicle, theamount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggageload capacity is
650lbs. (1400-750 (5 x150) =650 lbs.)
#
(5): Determine thecombined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo beingloaded on thevehicle.
The weight maynot safelyexceed theavaila‐
ble cargo and luggageload capacity calcula‐
tedinStep4.
#
(6): If your vehicle will be towing atrailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐
mine howthis reduces theavailable cargo
and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.
%
Notall vehicles arepermitted to towa
trailer.Towing atrailer is onlypermittedifa
trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if youhave
anyquestionsabout towing atrailer with
your vehicle.
Even if youhavecalculated thetotal load care‐
fully, youshould still makesurethat themaxi‐
mum permissible gross weight and themaxi‐
mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are
notexceeded. Details can be found on thevehi‐
cle identification plate.
#
Have your loaded vehicle –including driver,
occupants and load –weighed on avehicle
weighbridge.
The measured values maynot exceed the
maximumpermissible values stated on the
vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects:
R
Calculation example fordeterminingthe max‐
imum load (/ page456)
R
Tire and Loading Informationplacard
(/ page454)
R
Tire pressuretable (/ page449)
R
Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example fordetermining the
maximum load
The following table shows examples of howto
calculatetotal and load capacities withvarying
seatingconfigurations and different numbers
and sizes of occupants. The following examples
use amaximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is forillustrationpurposes only. Makesure
youare usingthe actual load limit foryour vehi‐
cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Informationplacard(/page454).
The higher theweight of all theoccupants, the
smaller themaximum load forluggage.
456
Wheels and tires
Step1
Example 1Example 2
Combinedmaximum weight of occupantsand
load (datafromthe Tire and Loading Information
placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg)1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step2
Example 1Example 2
Number of people in thevehicle (driver and
occupants)
51
Distribution of theoccupantsFront:2
Rear:3
Front:1
Weight of occupantsOccupant 1: 150lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160lbs (73kg)
Occupant 4: 140lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120lbs (54kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91kg)
Totalweight of all occupants750 lbs (340 kg)200 lbs (91kg)
Wheels and tires
457
Step3
Example 1Example 2
Permissible load (maximum grossvehicle weight
rating from theTireand Loading Information
placardminus thegross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750lbs (340 kg)=750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91kg) =1300 lbs
(589 kg)
458
Wheels and tires
%
The datashown in theimageisexample
data.
The TIN is aunique identification number to
identify tires and comprises thefollowing:
R
DOT(Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicatingthat thetire
complies withthe requirements of theUS
DepartmentofTransportation.
R
Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of thetiremanufacturer.New tires
have acodewithtwo symbols. Retreaded
tires have acodewithfour symbols.Further
information on retreadedtires (/ page 467).
R
Tire size: identifier 3 describes thetire
size.
R
Tire type code: tiretypecode 4 can be
used by themanufacturer as acode to
describe specific characteristicsofthe tire.
R
Manufacturing date: manufacturing date
5 provides informationabout theage of a
tire. The 1stand 2nd positionsrepresent the
calendarweek and the3rd and 4thpositions
statethe year of manufacture(e.g. "3208"
representsthe 32nd week of 2008).
Information on themaximum tireload
%
The datashown in theimageisexample
data.
Maximum tireload 1 is themaximum permissi‐
ble weight forwhich thetireisapproved.
Do notoverload thetires by exceeding thespeci‐
fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading
Informationplacardonthe B-pillar on thedriv‐
er's side (/ page454).
Specifications formaximum tirepressure
%
The data shown in theimageisexample
data.
Wheels and tires
461
Neverexceed maximum tirepressure 1 speci‐
fied forthe tire.
Information on tirecharacteristics
%
The datashown in theimageisexample
data.
This information describes thetype of tirecord
and thenumber of layers in side wall 1 and
under tiretread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed ratingand load index
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing thespecified tireload rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding thespecified tireload rating or
thepermissible speed rating mayleadtotire
damage and to thetires bursting.
#
Therefore, onlyuse tiretypes and sizes
approvedfor your vehicle model.
#
Observe thetireload rating and speed
rating required foryour vehicle.
1
Preceding letter
2
Nominal tirewidthinmillimeters
3
Aspect ratio in %
4
Tire code
5
Rimdiameter
6
Load-bearing index
7
Speed rating
8
Loadindex
%
The datashown in theimageisexample
data.
Informationabout readingtiredatacan be
obtainedfromany qualified specialistworkshop.
462
Wheels and tires
Preceding letter 11:
R
Without:passenger vehicle tires according to
Europeanmanufacturing standards.
R
"P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards.
R
"LT": light trucktires accordingtoUSmanu‐
facturing standards.
R
"T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tirepressurethat areonly designedfor
temporaryuse in an emergency.
Aspectratio 3
3:
Ratio betweentireheight and tirewidth in per‐
cent (tire height divided by tirewidth).
Tirecode 44 (tire type):
R
"R"radial tire
R
"D": bias ply tire
R
"B": bias belted tires
R
"ZR": radial tirewithamaximum speed above
149mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 55:
The diameter of thebead seat (notthe diameter
of therim flange). The rimdiameterisspecified
in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6
6:
Numerical code that specifies themaximum
load-bearing capacity of atire(e.g. "91" corre‐
sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)).
The load-bearing capacity of thetiremustbeat
leasthalf thepermissible axle load of your vehi‐
cle. Do notoverload thetires by exceeding the
specified load limit.
See also:
R
Maximum permissible load on theTireand
Loading Informationplacard(/page454)
R
Maximum tireload (/ page461 )
R
Load index
Speed rating 7
7:
Specifiesthe approvedmaximum speed of the
tire.
%
An electronicspeed limiterprevents your
vehicle from exceeding aspeed of 130mph
(210 km/h).
Make surethat your tires have therequired
speed rating.You can obtain information on the
required speed rating from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
IndexSpeedrating
Qupto100 mph(160km/h)
Rupto106 mph(170km/h)
Supto112 mph(180km/h)
Tupto118 mph(190km/h)
Hupto130 mph(210km/h)
Vupto149 mph(240km/h)
Wupto168 mph(270km/h)
Yupto186 mph(300 km/h)
Wheels andtires
463
UniformTireQuality Grading Standards: a
uniformstandardtograde thequalityoftires
withregardtotread quality, tiretraction and
temperaturecharacteristics. The qualitygrading
assessment is made by themanufacturer follow‐
ing specifications from theU.S. government. The
qualitygrade of atireisimprinted on theside
wall of thetire.
Recommendedtirepressure: therecommen‐
ded tirepressureisthe tirepressurespecified
forthe tires mounted to thevehicle at thefac‐
tory.
The tireand information table contains therec‐
ommended tirepressures forcold tires, themax‐
imum permissible load and themaximum per‐
missible vehicle speed.
The tirepressuretable contains therecommen‐
ded tirepressures forcold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of thevehicle.
Increased vehicleweight due to optional
equipment: thecombined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available forthe vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
thevehicle or not.
Rim: thepartofthe wheel on whichthe tireis
installed.
GAWR (Gross AxleWeight Rating): theGAWR
is themaximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle mustnever exceed the
grossaxle weight rating.The gross axleweight
rating can be found on thevehicle identification
plateonthe B‑pillar on thedriver's side.
Speed rating: thespeed rating is part of thetire
identification.Itspecifies thespeed rangefor
whichatireisapproved.
GVW(Gross VehicleWeight): thegross vehicle
weight comprises theweight of thevehicle
including fuel, tools, thesparewheel, accesso‐
ries installed, occupants, luggageand thetrailer
drawbar noseweight,ifapplicable. The gross
vehicle weight mustnot exceed thegross vehicle
weight rating GVWR as specified on thevehicle
identification plateonthe B‑pillar on thedriver's
side.
GVWR (Gross VehicleWeight Rating): the
GVWR is themaximum permitted gross weight
of thefully laden vehicle (weight of thevehicle
including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
gage and thetrailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
cable). The grossvehicle weight rating is speci‐
fied on thevehicle identification plateonthe
B‑pillar on thedriver's side.
Maximum weight of theladen vehicle: the
maximumweight is thesum of thecurb weight
of thevehicle, theweight of theaccessories, the
maximumloadand theweight of optional equip‐
ment installed at thefactory.
Kilopascal(kPa): metric unit fortirepressure.
6.9 kPacorresponds to 1psi.Another unit for
tirepressureisbar.100 kilopascal(kPa) equals
1bar.
Load index: in addition to theload-bearing
index, theload indexmay also be imprinted on
theside wall of thetire. This specifies theload-
bearing capacity of thetiremoreprecisely.
Curbweight: theweight of avehicle withstand‐
ardequipment includingthe maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes theair
conditioningsystemand optional equipment if
Wheels and tires
465
these areinstalled on thevehicle, but does not
include passengersorluggage.
Maximum tireload: themaximum tireload is
themaximum permissible weight in kilograms or
lbs forwhich atireisapproved.
Maximum permissible tirepressure: maxi‐
mum permissible tirepressurefor one tire.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum loadon
one tire. This is calculated by dividing themaxi‐
mum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per squareinch): standardunit of
measurementfor tirepressure.
Aspect ratio: ratio betweentire height and tire
widthinpercent.
Tirepressure: pressureinside thetireapplying
an outwardforce to every squareinchofthe tire.
The tirepressureisspecified in pounds per
squareinch(psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.
The tirepressureshould onlybecorrected when
thetires arecold.
Cold tirepressure: thetires arecold when the
vehicle has been parkedfor at least3hours
without direct sunlight on thetires or thevehicle
has been driven forless than 1mile (1.6 km).
Tire contact surface: thepartofthe tirethat
comes intocontact with theroad.
Tire bead: thepurpose of thetirebead is to
ensurethat thetiresits securelyonthe wheel
rim. Thereare severalwirecores in thetirebead
to prevent thetirefromchanging lengthonthe
wheelrim.
Sidewall: thepartofthe tirebetween thetread
and thetirebead.
Weight of optionalequipment: thecombined
weight of theoptional equipment weighingmore
than thereplaced standardparts and morethan
5lbs (2.3kg).This optional equipment, suchas
high-performancebrakes, levelcontrol system, a
roof luggagerackorhigh-performancebatteries,
is notincluded in thecurb weight and theweight
of theaccessories.
TIN (TireIdentification Number): aunique
identification number whichcan be used by a
tiremanufacturertoidentify tires, forexample,
in aproductrecall, and thus identifythe pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of themanufactur‐
er's identitycode, tiresize, tiretype code and
themanufacturing date.
Load-bearing index: theload-bearing indexisa
code that contains themaximum load-bearing
capacity of atire.
Traction: traction is thegripresulting from fric‐
tion between thetires and theroad surface.
Wear indicator: narrow bars(tread wear bars)
that aredistributed overthe tirecontact surface.
If thetiretread is levelwiththe bars, thewear
limit of 1/16in(1.6mm) has been reached.
Distribution of vehicleoccupants: distribution
of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
tionsinavehicle.
Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
nal load and luggageload plus 150lb(68 kg)
multipliedbythe number of seats in thevehicle.
466
Wheels and tires
Onlyuse tires, wheels and accessories that
have been checkedand recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*
NOTE Risk to driving safetyfromretrea‐
dedtires
Retreadedtires areneither tested nor recom‐
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damagecannotalwaysbedetected on
retreadedtires.
Forthis reason drivingsafetycannotbeguar‐
anteed.
#
Do notuse used tiresifyou have no
informationabout their previous usage.
*
NOTE Possible damagetowheels or tires
when drivingoverobstacles
Largewheelshave alower tiresection width.
The lowerthe tiresection width, thegreater
is therisk of damage to wheels or tires when
drivingoverobstacles.
#
Avoid obstaclesordrive particularly
carefully.
*
NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from theuse of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with atirepressuremonitoring
system: Electronic component parts are
located in thewheel. Tire-mounting tools
should notbeused in theareaofthe valve.
This could otherwise damagethe electronic
component parts.
#
Have thetires changed at aqualified
specialistworkshop only.
*
NOTE Damage to summer tires at low
ambient temperatures
At lowambienttemperatures, tearscould
form when drivingwithsummer tires, caus‐
ing permanent damagetothe tires.
#
At temperatures below4F(C),
use M+S tires .
Accessoryparts that arenot approvedfor your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benzorare notbeing used
correctlycan impair theoperating safety.
Beforepurchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit aqualified specialistworkshop
and inquireabout:
R
Suitability
R
Legal stipulations
R
Factoryrecommendations
&
WARNING Risk of accident with high
performancetires
The special tiretread in combinationwiththe
optimized tirecompound means that therisk
of skidding or hydroplaning on wetroads is
increased.
In addition,the tiregripisgreatlyreduced at
alow outside temperatureand tirerunning
temperature.
#
Switchonthe ESP
®
and adaptyour
driving styleaccordingly.
#
Use M+S tireatoutside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).
468
Wheels and tires
The wear patternsonthe front and rear wheels
differ:
R
Front wheels wear moreonthe shoulder of
thetire
R
Rear wheels wear moreatthe center of the
tire
Do notdrive with tires that have toolittle tread
depth.Thissignificantlyreduces traction on wet
roads (hydroplaning).
On vehicles that have thesame size front and
rear wheels,rotatethe wheels according to the
intervals in thetiremanufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, rotate thetires every
3,000 to 6,000 miles(5,000 to 10,000 km),
dependingonthe wear.Ensurethat thedirection
of rotationismaintained.
Observethe instructions and safetynotes on
"Changing awheel" when doing so
(/ page471).
Notesonstoring wheels
When storing wheels, observe thefollowing
notes:
R
Afterremoving wheels, storethem in acool,
dryand preferably darkplace.
R
Protect thetires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overviewofthe tire-changetool kit
Apartfromsome country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles arenot equipped withatire-changetool kit.
Formoreinformation on which tire-changing
tools arerequired and approvedfor performing a
wheel changeonyour vehicle, consult aqualified
specialistworkshop.
Required tire-changetools mayinclude, for
example:
R
Jack
R
Chock
R
Lugwrench
The tire-changetool kit is located under the
trunk floor.
1
Ratchet
2
Alignment bolt
3
Jacking support
4
Jack
5
Lugwrench
6
Folding chock
470
Wheels and tires
#
Align center cap 2 on therear side of cen‐
tercover 3 of thehub cap on one lug hole
1.
#
Position thehub cap and turnthe center
coverclockwise until thehub cap engages
physicallyand audibly.
Aluminum hub cap
#
To remove: positionsocket 2 on hubcap
1.
%
The socketcan be found in thetire-change
tool kit.
#
Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2.
#
Using wheelwrench 3,turnhub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
#
To install: position hub cap 1 and turnuntil
it is completely flush withthe wheel.
#
Position socket 2 on hubcap 1.
#
Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and
tighten thehub cap clockwise.
Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raising thevehicle when changing awheel
Requirements:
R
Thereare no persons in thevehicle.
R
The vehicle is prepared forawheelchange
(/ page471).
R
Thehub capshave been removed
(/ page471).
Important notesonusing thejack:
R
Use onlyavehicle-specific jackthat has
been approved by Mercedes-Benztoraise
thevehicle.
R
The jackisonlydesigned forraising and
holdingthe vehicle forashorttime while a
wheelisbeing changed and notfor mainte‐
nance work under thevehicle.
R
The jackmustbeplaced on afirm, flat and
non-slip surface.
472
Wheels and tires
R
The foot of thejackmustbepositioned verti‐
callyunder thejacksupportpoint.
Rules of conduct when thevehicle is raised:
R
Neverplace your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
R
Neverlie under thevehicle.
R
Do notstart theengine and do notrelease
theelectric parking brake.
R
Do notopen or close anydoorsorthe trunk
lid.
#
Using thelug wrench, loosen thewheel bolts
on thewheel youwish to changebyabout
onefull turn. Do notunscrew thebolts com‐
pletely.
Position of jacksupportpoints
&
WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of thejack
If youdonot positionthe jackcorrectly at
theappropriatejacking point of thevehicle,
thejackcould tip withthe vehicle raised.
#
Onlyposition thejackatthe appropri‐
atejacking point of thevehicle. The
base of thejackmustbepositioned
verticallyunder thejacking point of the
vehicle.
Wheels and tires
473
1
Front roof area
2
Rear roof area
3
Rear fenders
4
Trunk lid
On vehicles withapanoramic sliding sunroof,
installing an antennatothe front or rear roof
area is notpermitted.
On therear fenders,itisrecommendedthat you
install theantennaonthe side of thevehicle
closesttothe center of theroad.
Use TechnicalSpecificationISO/TS21609 (Road
Vehicles –"EMCs forinstallation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmittingequipment") when
retrofitting two-way radios. Comply withthe
legal requirements fordetachable parts.
If your vehicle has installationsfor two-way radio
equipment,use thepower supplyand antenna
connectors provided in thepre-installation.
Observe themanufacturer's supplementswhen
installing.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output(PEAK) at the
base of theantennamustnot exceed thevalues
in thefollowing table:
Frequency band and maximum transmission
output
Frequency band Maximumtransmis‐
sion output
Short wave
3-54MHz
100W
4mfrequency band
74 -78MHz
30 W
2mfrequency band
144-174 MHz
50 W
trunked radio sys‐
tem/Tetra
380 -460 MHz
10 W
70 cm frequency
band
400 -460 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
Technicaldata
479
The following can be used in thevehicle without
restrictions:
R
RF transmitterswithamaximum transmis‐
sion output of up to 100mW
R
RF transmitterswithtransmitter frequencies
in the380 -410 MHz frequency band and a
maximumtransmissionoutputofupto2W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R
mobilephones (2G/3G/4G)
Thereare no restrictions whenpositioning the
antennaonthe outside of thevehicle forsome
wavebands.
This applies to thefollowing wavebands:
R
trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm frequency band
R
2G/3G/4G
Vehicleidentification plate, VIN and engine
number overview
Vehicleidentification plate
Vehicle identification plate(USAonly)
1
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
2
Maximum permissible front axle load
3
Maximum permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
480
Technicaldata
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
*ACTIVEBODYCONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristicsmay be affected.
*
NOTE The tires on thefront axle or thefenderscould be damaged by large steering movements
#
Avoid largesteering movements whiledriving and listenfor scraping sounds.
#
If youhear scraping sounds, pull overand stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditions, and
setahigher vehicle levelifpossible.
#
Do notdrive at speeds greater than 50 mph(80 km/h).
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
¢
Lowering
*The vehicle levelmay be loweredfor thefollowing reasons:
R
Youhave selected adifferent driveprogram.
R
Youhave exceeded thespeed limit.
R
Youhave changed thevehicle levelbypressing thebutton.
É
Vehicle Rising
*Your vehicle is adjusting to thelevelyou have selected.
Drive More Slowly
*You aredriving toofastfor theselected vehicle level.
518
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
¢
Max. Speed 22 mph
*The vehicle has been settotransport level. Transportlevelisnot apermissible drivinglevel. Onlysuitable fortrans‐
porting thevehicle.
#
Do notdrive at speeds greater than 22 mph(35 km/h).
ABC Malfunction Stop Vehi-
cle
*ACTIVEBODYCONTROL is malfunctioning.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions.Donot continuedriving under anycir‐
cumstances.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Road Surface Scan Inopera-
tive
*ROADSURFACE SCAN is malfunctioning.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
É
ABC Vehicle Rising Please
Wait Briefly
*The vehicle levelistoo low. The vehicle is raised to theselected vehicle level.
#
Wait until thedisplaymessagedisappearsbeforepulling away.
520
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Steering Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator'sManual
*ActiveSteering Assististemporarilyunavailable.
The ambientconditionsare outside thesystemlimits (/ page219).
#
Driveon.
As soon as theambient conditions arewithin thesystem limits, thesystemwill become available again.
#
If necessary, clean thewindshield in thecamera's field of vision.
#
Checkthe tirepressureifnecessary.
Active Steering Assist Inop-
erative
*ActiveSteering Assistismalfunctioning. ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICremainsavailable.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Ø
*ActiveSteering Assisthas reached thesystemlimits (/ page219).
Youhave notsteered independentlyfor aconsiderableperiod of time.
#
Take overthe steering and driveoninaccordance withthe trafficconditions.
Beginning Emergency Stop
*Your hands arenot on thesteering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page222).
#
Put your hands backonthe steering wheel.
Youcan cancel thedeceleration at anytime by performing one of thefollowing actions:
R
Steering
R
Braking or accelerating
R
Pressing asteering-wheel button
R
Operating TouchControl
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
521
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear,stopthe vehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditionsand restart
theengine.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
*ActiveBlind SpotAssist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative
See Operator's Manual
*ActiveParking Assistand Parking AssistPARKTRONIC aremalfunctioning.
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditionsand restartthe engine.
#
If thedisplaymessagecontinues to be displayed, consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Traffic Sign Assististemporarilyunavailable.
#
Driveon.
Oncethe cause of theproblem is no longer present,the system will be available again.
Traffic SignAssist Inopera-
tive
*Traffic Sign Assistismalfunctioning.
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditionsand restartthe engine.
#
If thedisplaymessagecontinues to be displayed, consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Camera
View Restricted See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The cameraviewisrestricted. Possible causes:
R
Dirtonthe windshield in thecamera's field of vision
R
Heavy rain, snoworfog
Drivingsystems and driving safetysystems maybemalfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
524
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Oncethe cause of theproblem is no longer present,the driving systems and driving safetysystems will be available
again.
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear:
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditions.
#
Clean thewindshield.
ë
Off
*The HOLD function is deactivated because thevehicle is slipping or acondition foractivation is notfulfilled.
#
Reactivatethe HOLD function later or checkthe activation conditions forthe HOLD function (/ page225).
ç
---mph
*ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICcannotbeactivatedasnot all activation conditionsare fulfilled.
#
Comply withthe activation conditions of ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC(/page 214).
ç
Suspended
*Ifyou depress theacceleratorpedalbeyond theActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICsetting,the system will be put
intopassivemode (/ page223).
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
525
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator'sManual
*
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other drivingsystems and driving safetysystems mayalso be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning,ESP
®
cannotcarry out vehicle stabilization. In addition,other driving safetysystems
areswitched off.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checkedataqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Drivecarefully on asuitable stretchofroad, making slight steering movements at aspeed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear,consult aqualified specialistworkshop immediately.Drive carefully.
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safetysystems mayalso be malfunctioning.
The brakesystemwill continue to operatenormally.Braking distance mayincrease in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
529
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning,ESP
®
cannotcarry out vehicle stabilization. In addition,other driving safetysystems
areswitched off.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checkedataqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
T
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
EBD, ABS and ESP
®
aremalfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safetysystems mayalso be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP
®
aremalfunctioning,the wheels can lockwhen braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristicsare thus severely impaired.The brakingdistance in an emer‐
gency braking situationcan increase. In addition, other driving safetysystems areswitched off.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Have thebrake system checkedimmediatelyataqualified specialistworkshop.
530
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Currently LimitedSee
Operator'sManual
* Vehicles with theDriving Assistance Package: ActiveBrake Assist withcross-trafficfunction, Evasive Steering
AssistorPRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS aretemporarily unavailable or onlypartiallyavailable.
Vehicles without theDriving Assistance Package: ActiveBrake Assist is temporarily unavailable or onlypartially
available.
The ambient conditionsare outside thesystem limits (/ page205).
#
Driveon.
As soon as theambient conditions arewithin thesystem limits, thesystemwill become available again.
#
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear,stopthe vehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditionsand restart
theengine.
Active BrakeAssist Func-
tionsLimited See Opera-
tor'sManual
* Vehicles with DrivingAssistancePackage: ActiveBrake Assist withcross-trafficfunction, Evasive Steering
AssistorPRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS is malfunctioning.
Vehicles without DrivingAssistancePackage: ActiveBrake Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
RadarSensors Dirty See
Operator's Manual
*The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R
Dirtonthe sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Extendedcountrydriving without other traffic, e.g. in thedesert
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
531
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Driving systems and driving safetysystems maybemalfunctioning or temporarilyunavailable.
Oncethe cause of theproblem is no longer present,the driving systems and driving safetysystems will be available
again.
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear:
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditions.
#
Clean all sensors(/page421).
#
Restartthe engine.
Mercedes me connect
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Mercedes me connect
Services Limited See Oper-
ator's Manual
*Service limited.
At leastone of themain functionsofthe Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
#
Observe thenotes on thediagnostics connection (/ page26).
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
G
Inoperative
*Atleast one of themain functionsofthe Mercedes me connect system or of theSOS emergency callsystem is
malfunctioning.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
532
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Battery
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
12 VBattery See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The engine is offand thecharge levelistoo low.
#
Switchoff electricalconsumersthat arenot required.
To charge thebattery:
#
Leave theengine running forafew minutes, or driveanextendeddistance.
*Ifthe messageappearswhile theengine is running,this indicates an on-boardelectrical system malfunction.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
See Operator's Manual
*The batteryisnot being charged.
*
NOTE Possible engine damageifyou continue driving
#
Do notcontinue drivingunder anycircumstances.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely and switchoff theengine, paying attention to road and trafficconditions.
#
Consultaqualified specialistworkshop.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
533
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The batteryisnolonger being chargedand thecharge levelistoo low.
*
NOTE Possible engine damageifyou continue driving
#
Do notcontinue drivingunder anycircumstances.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions.Donot continuedriving under anycir‐
cumstances.
#
Switchoff theengine.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running
*The batterycharge levelistoo low.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions.Donot continuedriving under anycir‐
cumstances.
#
Leave theengine running.
#
Wait until thedisplaymessagedisappearsbeforepulling away.
#
If thedisplaymessagedoes notdisappear: consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
534
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Tire pressuremonitor
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur-
rently Unavailable
*Thereisinterference from apowerful radio signal source. As aresult, no signals from thetirepressuresensorsare
being received. The tirepressuremonitor is temporarily unavailable.
#
Driveon.
The tirepressuremonitor will restartautomaticallyassoon as thecause has been rectified.
TirePress. Monitor Inopera-
tive
*The tirepressuremonitor is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is arisk of an accident if thetirepressuremonitoring system is malfunctioning
If thetirepressuremonitoring system is malfunctioning, it is notable to issue awarning if thereispressureloss
in one or moreofthe tires.
Underinflated tires may, forexample, impair thedriving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have thetirepressuremonitoring system checkedataqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop-
erative No Wheel Sensors
*The wheels installed do nothave suitable tirepressuresensors. The tirepressuremonitor is deactivated.
#
Install wheels withsuitable tirepressuresensors.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
535
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
*Thereisnosignal from thetirepressuresensor of one or morewheels. No pressurevalue is displayedfor theaffec‐
tedtire.
#
Have thefaulty tirepressuresensor replaced at aqualified specialistworkshop.
h
Check Tires
*The tirepressureinone or moretires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident duetoinsufficient tirepressure
Tire pressures that aretoo lowpose thefollowing hazards:
R
The tires mayburst,especiallyasthe load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires maywear excessively and/or unevenly, whichmay greatlyimpair tiretraction.
R
The drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybegreatlyimpaired.
Youcould then lose control of thevehicle.
#
Observe therecommendedtirepressure.
#
Adjustthe tirepressureifnecessary.
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditions.
#
Checkthe tirepressure(/page448) and thetires.
536
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Please Correct Tire Pres-
sure
*The tirepressureistoo lowinatleastone of thetires, or thedifference in tirepressurebetween theindividual
wheels is toogreat.
#
Checkthe tirepressureand add air,ifnecessary.
#
When thetirepressureiscorrect, restartthe tirepressuremonitor (/ page453).
h
Warning Tire Malfunction
*The tirepressureinone or moretires has dropped suddenly.The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with aflat tire
Flat tires aredangerous in thefollowing ways:
R
The tires can overheat and cause afire.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybegreatlyimpaired.
Youcould then lose control of thevehicle.
#
Do notdrive withaflat tire.
#
Observe thenotes on flat tires.
Notesonflat tires (/ page425).
#
Stop thevehicle in accordance withthe traffic conditions.
#
Checkthe tires.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
537
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tires Overheated
*Atleast one tire is overheating. The affected tires aredisplayed in red. At temperatures close to thelimit value, the
tires aredisplayed in yellow.
#
Drivemoreslowly.
DecreaseSpeed
*Atleast one tire is overheating. The affected tires aredisplayed in red. At temperatures close to thelimit value, the
tires aredisplayed in yellow.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires mayburst,particularly at high speeds.
#
Reduce speed so that thetires cool down.
#
Reduce speed so that thetires cool down.
Engine oil
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Check Engine Oil At Next
Refueling
*The engine oil levelhas dropped to theminimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving withinsufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys withinsufficient engine oil.
538
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Checkthe engine oil levelwhen next refueling.
Addengineoil (/ page412).
Notesonengine oil (/ page484).
5
Check Engine Oil Level
(Add 1quart)
*Displaymessageonlyfor certainengines:
The engine oillevelhas dropped to theminimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving withinsufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys withinsufficient engine oil.
#
Whennextrefueling, add 1.1USqt(1l)ofengine oil (/ page412).
Notesonengine oil (/ page484).
5
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
*Displaymessageonlyfor certain engines:
The engineoil levelistoo high.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving withexcess engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys withexcess engine oil.
#
Consultaqualified specialistworkshop immediatelyand have theengine oil levelreduced.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
539
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Engine Oil Level Low Stop
Vehicle Turn Engine Off
*Displaymessageonlyfor certain engines:
The engineoil levelistoo low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving withinsufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys withinsufficient engine oil.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions.Donot continuedriving under anycir‐
cumstances.
#
Switchoff theengine.
#
Add1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page412).
#
Check theengine oil level.
Notesonengine oil (/ page484).
5
Engine Oil Pressure Stop
Switch Off Engine
*Displaymessageonlyfor certainengines:
The oilpressureistoo low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving withinsufficient oil pressure
#
Avoid driving withinsufficient oil pressure.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions.Donot continuedriving under anycir‐
cumstances.
540
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
Displaymessages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured
*The electrical connection to theoil levelsensor has been interruptedorthe oil levelsensor is faulty.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overviewofindicator and warning lamps
Somesystems will perform aself-testwhen the
ignition is switched on. Someindicator and
warning lamps maybriefly light up or flash. This
behavior is non-critical. Theseindicator and
warning lamps indicateamalfunction onlyifthey
light up or flash afterthe engine has been star‐
tedorduring ajourney.
Instrument Display
Dependingonthe displaysetting, thepositions
of theindicator lamps on theInstrument Display
maydifferfromthe example shown.
Progressivesetting
If youselect theprogressivedisplaysetting, the
positionsofthe indicator lamps on theInstru‐
ment Displaywill change.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
541
Indicator and warning lamps:
L
Lowbeam (/ page150)
T
Parking lamps (/ page150)
K
Highbeam(/page151)
#!
Turn signal light (/ page151)
R
Rear foglight (/ page150)
6
Restraint system (/ page543)
ü
Seat beltnot fastened (/ page543)
$
USA: brakes (red) (/ page548)
J
Canada: brakes (red) (/ page548)
!
Electric parking brake(yellow)
(/ page548)
F
USA: electric parking brakeapplied
(red) (/ page548)
!
Canada: electric parking brake
applied(red) (/ page548)
!
ABS malfunction (/ page551 )
÷
ESP
®
(/ page551 )
å
ESP
®
OFF (/ page551 )
L
Distance warning (/ page550)
Ù
Electric powersteering malfunction
(/ page544)
ä
AIRMATIC/ActiveBody Control mal
function (/ page550)
;
Check Engine (/ page 545)
#
Electrical malfunction (/ page545)
8
Fuel reserve withfuel filler cap loca‐
tion indicator (/ page545)
ÿ
Coolant toohot or cold
(/ page545)
h
Tire pressuremonitor (/ page554)
542
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
The redrestraint system warning lampislit while theengine is running.
*Therestraint system is malfunctioning (/ page34).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in therestraint system
If therestraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components maybetriggered unintentionallyormay
notdeployasintended during an accident. This mayaffect theEmergency Tensioning Devicesorairbags, for
example.
#
Have therestraint system checkedand repaired immediately at aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Driveoncarefully.
#
Note themessages on themultifunction display.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
7
Seatbeltwarning lamp
flashes
The redseat belt warning lampflashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
*The driver or front passenger has notfastened their seat belt while thevehicle is in motion.
#
Fasten your seat belt(/ page39).
*Thereare objectsonthe front passenger seat.
#
Remove theobjects from thefront passenger seat.
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
543
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
7
Seat belt warning lamp
lightsup
The redseat belt warning lampwill light up forsix seconds once theengine has started.
In addition, awarning tone maysound.
*The seat belt warning lampremindsthe driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#
Fasten your seat belt (/ page39).
If youhaveplaced objects on thefront passenger seat, theseat belt warning lampmay remain lit.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Warning lampfor electric
powersteering
The redelectricpowersteering warning lampislit while theengine is running.
*Thepower-assistedsteering or thesteering itself is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If thesteering does notfunction as intended, thevehicle's operating safetyisjeopardized.
#
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trafficconditions.Do
notcontinuedriving under anycircumstances.
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Note themessages on themultifunction display.
544
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp
The redcoolant warning lampislit while theengine is running.
*Possible causes:
R
The temperaturesensor is malfunctioning
R
Coolant leveltoo low
R
The air supplytothe radiator is obstructed
R
The radiator fanisfaulty
If thereisanadditional warning tone, thecoolant temperaturehas exceeded themaximum permissible temperature.
&
WARNING Danger of burnswhen opening thehood
If youopen thehood when theengine has overheated or during afireinthe engine compartment, youcould
come intocontact withhot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Beforeopening thehood, allowthe engine to cool down.
#
In theevent of afireinthe engine compartment, keep thehood closed and call thefireservice.
#
Stop thevehicle immediately in accordance withthe trafficconditions and switchoff theengine. Do notcontinue
driving under anycircumstances.
#
Note themessages on themultifunction display.
If thecoolant temperaturedisplayisatthe lowerend of thetemperaturescale:
Displaymessages and warning/indicator lamps
545
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
or
#
Exit thevehicle and keep asafedistance from it untilthe engine has cooled down.
#
Checkthe coolant level(/page413).
#
Makesurethat theair supply to theradiator is notimpaired.
#
Avoiding high loads on theengine, drivetothe nearestqualified specialistworkshop. In doing so, ensurethat the
coolant temperaturedisplayremainsbelowthe redarea.
;
Engine diagnosis warning
lamp
The yellowCheckEngine warning lampislit while theengine is running.
*A malfunctionhas occurred in theengine, theexhaust system or thefuel system.
The emission limit values maybeexceeded and theengine maybeinemergency mode.
In somestates, legal requirements stipulatethat youmustimmediatelyconsultaqualified specialistworkshop as
soon as theyellowCheckEngine warning lamplightsup.
#
Have thevehicle checkedassoon as possible at aqualified specialistworkshop.
#
Electrical malfunction warn‐
ing lamp
The redelectrical malfunction warning lampislit.
*Thereisamalfunction in theelectrics.
#
Observe themessages on themultifunction display.
546
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellowfuel reserve warning lamplightsupwhile driving.
*Therehas been pressureloss in thefuel system. The fuel filler cap is notclosed correctly or thefuel system is leak‐
ing.
#
Close thefuel filler cap.
If thefuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
#
Visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellowfuel reserve warning lampislit while theengine is running.
*The fuel supply has dropped intothe reserve range.
#
Refuel.
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
547
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
F
Redindicator lamp, electric
parkingbrake applied (USA
only)
!
Redindicator lamp, electric
parkingbrake applied (Can‐
ada only)
!
Yellowelectricparking
brakeindicator lampismal‐
functioning
The redelectricparkingbrake indicator lampflashes or is lit. The yellowindicator lampisalso lit if theelectric parking
brakemalfunctions.
*
#
Observe themessages on themultifunction display.
548
Display messagesand warning/indicator lamps
50

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Mercedes S-Class 2020 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Mercedes S-Class 2020

Mercedes S-Class 2020 Kurzanleitung - Englisch - 2 seiten

Mercedes S-Class 2020 Bedienungsanleitung - Englisch - 54 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info